華嚴經 義疏通講 · 冊13Avataṃsaka Sūtra · Exposition Throughout · Vol. 13
品二十九 十忍品The Ten Forbearances
全文五層 →Full five layers →「忍」這個字,先要換一副眼睛
一聽「十忍」,人多半以為講的是忍耐——受了委屈往肚裡吞。可是把整品讀完會發現,這裡從頭到尾沒有一句在講忍氣吞聲。第一忍講的是聽到深法不驚不怖,第二忍講思惟觀察,第三忍講不見有少法生滅,後面七忍全是『知一切世間如幻、如焰、如夢』。這哪裡是忍耐?澄觀釋此品之名說得極準:忍是忍解印可,就是智照觀達——心裡對一件事看透了、認了、安住了,那個『認了』叫忍。法藏說得更直白:這忍以智為性。所以十忍不是十種脾氣,是十種看法;不是把不舒服壓下去,是把『不舒服的那個東西本來就不是那樣』看清楚。要排除的誤解正在這裡:以為忍是壓抑,就會把整品讀成道德訓誡;知道忍是智照,才會明白後七忍為什麼全在打比方——因為那是十副眼鏡,不是十條戒條。落到用處上:日常裡讓人受不了的事,用力忍住是第一層,看清它如幻而自然不動是第二層——本品講的是第二層。
開宗一句:得此忍,則到無礙忍地
普賢一開口先把賞格報出來:菩薩摩訶薩有十種忍,得此忍則到於一切菩薩無礙忍地,一切佛法無礙無盡;隨即列出十名——音聲、順、無生法、如幻、如焰、如夢、如響、如影、如化、如空;再加一句保證:此十種忍,三世諸佛已說、今說、當說。為什麼一開頭就要說「三世諸佛已說、今說、當說」?因為十忍不是普賢一時的新說,是諸佛共說之法,聽的人可以放心把它當作恆軌。澄觀科這一段為兩節:先舉數,後從「若得」以下歎其殊勝;再往下才是列名顯要。要排開的誤解是:以為「無礙忍地」是十忍之外另一個地位。經文說的是『得此忍則得到於』——忍即是地,不是忍完了另有一處可去。落地處在於:讀後面十段時心裡要有這個標尺——「無礙忍地」是十忍之總標(十段結名之前唯第八如影忍作「善巧方便,通達無礙」),若讀出來的是更緊、更繃,那就是讀反了。
音聲忍:第一關不在做到,在聽得下去
第一忍為什麼是「音聲」?因為修行的第一道門檻不是做,是聽。經文的定義乾淨:聞諸佛所說之法不驚、不怖、不畏,深信悟解,愛樂趣向,專心憶念,修習安住。七個階段一路排下來——先是三個「不」,再是信解、愛樂、憶念、安住。要注意這三個「不」的份量:深法之所以令人驚怖,是因為它拆掉人賴以自安的東西(無我、無生、無所得),凡夫聽了會本能地退。能不退,這一忍就成了。要排除的誤解是:以為「音聲忍」是聽力好、記性好。經文說的是『不驚不怖不畏』——這是心量問題,不是耳根問題。李通玄從一乘的角度讀,說十住初心得憶念諸佛智慧光明門、生佛智慧家,就叫得音聲忍——他把這一忍讀得很前,等於說門檻雖低,跨過去的人已入佛家。落地處:判斷自己是否入門,不看誦了多少,看第一次聽見『並無一個我』時,心是縮的還是開的。
音聲忍之頌:寶藏喻與真金藏喻
重頌唱這一忍時用了兩個比方,長行沒有,是頌獨有的。一是寶藏喻:世上有人聽說某處有寶藏,因為那寶可得,心生大歡喜;菩薩聞佛深法,其心得安隱,不驚不怖亦不生恐畏。這比方點的是「聞」與「喜」的因果——不是先修出歡喜,是先聽見有寶可得而歡喜,喜了才堪忍。二是真金藏喻:如有大福人獲得真金藏,隨身所應服,造作莊嚴具;菩薩聞此甚深義,思惟增智海,以修隨順法。這一喻把聞後之事說盡了:得了金不是供起來看,是打成隨身用的莊嚴具——聞法不是收藏,是拿來用。頌中又補了「聞法增勇猛,供佛令歡喜」「精進無退轉,不捨眾善軛」諸句,把第一忍從『聽得下去』一路帶到『行得下去』。要防的誤解是把這兩喻讀成勸發心的套語——它們其實是在解釋第一忍的機制:因見其可得,故心不驚。
順忍:隨順不是附和
第二忍經文只有一句:於諸法思惟觀察,平等無違,隨順了知,令心清淨,正住修習,趣入成就。關鍵在「平等無違」四字。人觀法時最難的是不偏——遇合意的法就趣,不合意的就違;順忍是把這偏心去掉,法怎麼樣就怎麼認。頌裡有一句把這事講絕了:法有亦順知,法無亦順知,隨彼法如是,如是知諸法。有也順它、無也順它,不是含糊,是不拿自己的成見去校正法。要排除的誤解是把「隨順」當成隨和、當成不辨是非。頌另有一句反過來說得更明白:如無等所說,平等觀諸法,非不平等忍,能成平等智——成就平等智的,正是那平等之忍,不是那不平等的忍。所以順忍是有揀擇的:揀掉的是自己的偏,不是法的差別。落地處:讀經時碰到不合口味的段落,那一下的抗拒就是「違」;能停住抗拒把它讀完,順忍才有第一步。
無生法忍:十一支連鎖是本品最緊的骨架
第三忍是全品的樞紐。經文的立義只有兩句:不見有少法生,亦不見有少法滅。然後追一句「何以故」,接下來是十一支連鎖——若無生則無滅,若無滅則無盡,若無盡則離垢,若離垢則無差別,若無差別則無處所,若無處所則寂靜,若寂靜則離欲,若離欲則無作,若無作則無願,若無願則無住,若無住則無去無來。這一串不是修辭堆疊,是一條推理:從「不生」這一個立足點,一路推到連去來都不可說。為什麼要推這麼長?因為人放下「生」之後,還會抓「盡」,放下「盡」還會抓「淨」,放下「淨」還會抓「差別」——這十一支是把後續每一個藏身處逐個關掉。要排除的誤解是把「無生」讀成什麼都沒有:經文說的是「不見有少法生」——是見不到生,不是斷言有一個叫「無」的東西。晉譯此鏈作十支,中段三支作『無壞・不動・寂滅地』,末段更由離欲轉入『無所行—是大願—住莊嚴』,與八十本歸於『無去無來』者所趣不同——一收於寂滅之絕待,一收於大願之莊嚴。二本並錄不判。落地處:檢驗自己是否真放下一物,就看放下之後心有沒有立刻抓住第二物。
無生法忍之頌:三十三天共器異食
重頌講這一忍時,端出一個長行沒有的比喻:三十三天中所有諸天子,共同一器食,所食各不同;所食種種食不從十方來,如其所修業,自然咸在器。同一個器皿,各人吃到的味道不一樣,而那些食物並不是從外面某處運來的,是各自的業自然現在器裡。這比方要說的是:所謂「法生」,其實只是業感現行,沒有一個東西真的從別處生出來。頌接著就把長行的連鎖再唱一遍:悉從因緣起,無生故無滅,無滅故無盡,無盡故無染,於世變異法,了知無變異,無異則無處,無處則寂滅。這裡的「無染」對應長行的「離垢」,「無處」對應「無處所」——頌不是重複,是換一個入口。頌中又有「諸業從心生,故說心如幻」一句,把業與心也收進如幻。落地處:抱怨境遇不公時,共器異食這一喻是最直接的解藥——同一張桌子,吃到什麼是自己帶來的。
如幻忍:一法中解多法,多法中解一法
第四忍起,後七忍全走比喻路。如幻忍的立義是:知一切法皆悉如幻,從因緣起,於一法中解多法,於多法中解一法。前半句人人會說,後半句才是眼目——正因為法如幻無自性,一與多才不相礙:一法裡能解出眾多法,眾多法裡能解出一法。若法有定體,一就是一、多就是多,斷不能互解。菩薩知法如幻之後,經文列出七種了達:了達國土、眾生、法界、世間平等、佛出現平等、三世平等,成就種種神通變化。神通被放在最後,是果不是因——因為看穿了幻,示現才可能。要排除的誤解是把「如幻」當作『假的、不必管』:經文緊接著就說菩薩觀世間如幻時仍度眾生、仍轉法輪。落地處:一與多互解不是玄談,是讀經的實際能力——從一句經文讀出整部教理,又能把整部教理收回這一句。
如幻忍之喻:種種非幻,幻非種種
幻喻的排法值得細看。經文一口氣四十餘個「非」——非象非馬、非男非女、非樹非葉、非地水火風、非晝非夜、非一劫非多劫、非定非亂、非一非異、非多非少、非麁非細——把幻所現的一切逐項否掉;然後給出結論:種種非幻,幻非種種,然由幻故,示現種種差別之事。這兩句是全喻的關鍵:所現的種種不就是幻本身,幻本身也不就是那些種種——可是離了幻,種種也現不出來。能現與所現,不一也不異。要排除的誤解是把『非象非馬』讀成『什麼都沒有』——經文明明接著說「示現種種差別之事」,差別宛然在。澄觀科前三忍約法、後七忍就喻,這一喻正是「就喻」之首,後六喻的讀法都由此定:先遮實有,再顯宛然。落地處:看一件事「如幻」,不是看它不存在,是看它的存在不由自己作主。
如幻忍:觀十世間・諸不見・九番雖成就
如幻忍的篇幅在十忍中最長,因為它把「如幻」推到了行門上。先是所觀之境:業世間、煩惱世間、國土世間、法世間、時世間、趣世間、成世間、壞世間、運動世間、造作世間——十種世間,從業與惑一直數到成壞運動,人所處的一切被分十層攤開。次是觀時之相:不見眾生生滅、不見國土生滅、不見諸法生滅、不見過去可分別、不見未來有起作、不見現在一念住,乃至不見佛出現、不見佛涅槃、不見住大願、不見入正住。連「佛出現」「住大願」都不見——這是把修行者自己最珍惜的東西也放進了觀裡。最要緊的是第三節:雖成就佛國土,知國土無差別,雖成就眾生界,知眾生無差別,雖普觀法界而安住法性寂然不動,雖達三世平等而不違分別三世法,雖成就蘊處而永斷所依,雖度脫眾生而了知法界平等,雖知一切法不可言說而常說法辯才無盡,雖不取著化眾生事而不捨大悲,雖為開示過去因緣而知因緣性無有動轉。九個『雖』字句,其中七句作『雖……而……』,首二句作『雖……,知……』;每一句都是兩頭同時站住。要排除的誤解是:以為看破了就該歇手。經文的答案恰恰相反——正因為不見有可度之眾生,大悲才不會疲。這一段結名曰第四如幻忍。落地處:做事而不執事,這九句是最好的自檢表。
如幻忍之頌:幻師喻與如幻際
頌唱如幻忍,補了一個長行未出的喻:譬如工幻師,普現諸色像,徒令眾貪樂,畢竟無所得。長行的幻喻重在「非」,頌的幻師喻重在「貪」——幻師現像不為騙人,人自己貪著才受騙;世間如幻而眾生受苦,苦不在幻,在貪。頌又有「度脫諸眾生,令知法如幻,眾生不異幻,了幻無眾生」四句,把度生與如幻扣在一起:所度的眾生也在幻中,了了幻就沒有一個實在的眾生被我度——這正是長行「雖度脫眾生,而了知法界平等」的頌文對位。再有「入於如幻際,於彼無依著」「如是得善巧,寂滅無戲論,住於無礙地,普現大威力」——如幻不是終點,住於無礙地、普現威力才是。要防的誤解:把「畢竟無所得」讀成消極。頌下一句就是「普現大威力」,無所得與大威力是同一件事的兩面。
如焰忍:世間住於想
第五忍最短,卻最鋒利。立義是知一切世間同於陽焰;喻是:譬如陽焰,無有方所,非內、非外,非有、非無,非斷、非常,非一色、非種種色亦非無色,但隨世間言說顯示。落腳在最後一句——陽焰之所以「有」,全靠言說與遠望;世間之所以「有」,也是如此。經文接著只用一句收:菩薩如是如實觀察,了知諸法,現證一切,令得圓滿。頌把這一忍鋪得比長行還開,且點出核心字眼:眾想如陽焰,令眾生倒解;世間如陽焰,以想有差別,知世住於想,遠離三顛倒。又有:譬如熱時焰,世見謂為水,水實無所有,智者不應求。要排除的誤解是把如焰忍讀成『世界不存在』——陽焰的相是真有的,只是那相不是水。世間的相也真有,只是那相不是實。落地處:起煩惱時問一句『這是水,還是熱時的焰』——差別不在境上,在自己那個「想」上。
如夢忍:夢體無生滅
第六忍以夢立喻。喻的排法與焰喻同格:譬如夢,非世間、非離世間,非欲界、非色界、非無色界,非生、非沒,非染、非淨,而有示現——遮到最後留一句「而有示現」,這是後七喻的共同句法。然後是九個『如夢……故』:無有變異故、如夢自性故、如夢執著故、如夢性離故、如夢本性故、如夢所現故、如夢無差別故、如夢想分別故、如夢覺時故。九句從自性說到覺時,最後一句最要緊——夢之為夢,是醒了才知道的;世間之為如夢,也是覺了才知道的。要排除的誤解是把「如夢」當成當下就該否定眼前一切:夢中人不能靠否認來出夢,只能靠醒。頌唱此忍說「夢體無生滅,亦無有方所,三界悉如是,見者心解脫」,又說「住於夢定者,了世皆如夢,非同非是異,非一非種種」,末以「是名如夢忍,因此了世法,疾成無礙智,廣度諸群生」結——如夢不是逃離,是「疾成無礙智」的路。落地處:夢中最真實的是情緒,醒後最先散的也是情緒——這一點可以現在就用。
如響忍:說而無說的機制
第七忍講聲。立義分兩層:一是知一切音聲悉同於響,無來無去;二是觀如來聲,不從內出,不從外出,亦不從於內外而出。第二層是難處——如來說法四十九年,那音聲究竟從哪裡來?答案是三處都不是,然而「能示現善巧名句,成就演說」。谷響喻正解此義:譬如谷響,從緣所起,而與法性無有相違,令諸眾生隨類各解而得修學。回響不從山中出、不從人口出,從「緣」出;佛聲亦然。經文再加一個舍支喻:帝釋夫人阿脩羅女名曰舍支,於一音中出千種音,亦不心念令如是出——關鍵在「亦不心念」四字:不作意而千音自出。所以菩薩「入無分別界,成就善巧隨類之音」。末段又收成一對:雖知聲無起而普現音聲,雖知無所說而廣說諸法。要排除的誤解是把『聲如響』讀成佛說法無效——經文說的是無自性而有效用。落地處:說法者最怕的是把自己當成音聲的來源,一有這個,隨類各解就成了強人就我。
如影忍:現而無染,差別即非差別
第八忍以影立喻,先出九番(十八目)「非」:非於世間生、非於世間沒,非在世間內、非在世間外,非行於世間、非不行世間,非同、非異,非往、非不往,非住、非不住,非是世間、非出世間,非修菩薩行、非捨於大願,非實、非不實。這十八目把菩薩與世間的關係遮盡了,緊接一句正說:雖常行一切佛法,而能辦一切世間事,不隨世間流,亦不住法流——連「法流」都不住,這一句極重。影喻隨之而來:日月、男女、舍宅、山林、河泉,於油、於水、於身、於寶、於明鏡等清淨物中而現其影;影與油等非一非異、非離非合,於川流中亦不漂度,於池井內亦不沈沒,雖現其中無所染著。三句話說盡『在裡面而不屬於裡面』。經文又補兩層:遠物近物雖皆影現,影不隨物而有近遠;如種子中無有根芽莖節枝葉,而能生起如是等事——前者破空間之執,後者示無二法中分別二相之善巧。要排除的誤解:影不是假象的別名,是『依他而現、現而不染』的樣本。這一忍結名之後另有一段成就之德,最要緊的是那句「此差別即非差別,別與不別無所障礙」——差別當體就不是差別。落地處:入世做事而不被事染,影是最貼切的自我形象。
如影忍之頌:水中影,非內非外
頌唱此忍,句句扣『非內非外』:譬如水中影,非內亦非外,菩薩求菩提,了世非世間;又:不於世住出,以世不可說,亦不在內外,如影現世間。長行以九番(十八目)非遮盡,頌則收成『非內非外』一組,這是頌的體例——長行已教者頌只作對位。而頌獨有的一節是入此忍之後的心行:入此甚深義,離垢悉明徹,不捨本誓心,普照智慧燈;世間無邊際,智入悉齊等,普化諸群生,令其捨眾著。要留意「不捨本誓心」——長行說「非修菩薩行,非捨於大願」,頌把後半正面挑明了:遮的是執取,不是願本身。落地處:讀到「非修菩薩行」而心生退意的人,這一句頌就是解藥。
如化忍:十化、七知與化士
第九忍以「化」統攝一切。先列十種化:眾生意業化(覺想所起)、世間諸行化(分別所起)、苦樂顛倒化(妄取所起)、不實法化(言說所現)、煩惱分別化(想念所起)、清淨調伏化(無分別所現)、於三世不轉化(無生平等)、菩薩願力化(廣大修行)、如來大悲化(方便示現)、轉法輪方便化(智慧無畏辯才所說)。前五是染邊,後五是淨邊——連如來大悲、轉法輪都算作化,這是本忍最猛的一著:不留一個『這個是真的』的角落。次列六知:現證知、廣大知、無邊知、如事知、自在知、真實知,並「非虛妄見所能傾動」。再出化喻,一連二十餘對「非」——不從心起、不受果報、非久住非須臾住、非凡非聖、非染非淨、非智非愚、非生死非涅槃、非有非無有。要排除的誤解:把『如來大悲亦是化』讀成貶低佛——經文的意思是佛的悲與說法同樣無自性,故能遍應而不竭。結名之後另有化士喻與五名(解脫者、調伏者、神通者、無退者、無礙者),把成忍之德標定。落地處:把自己最珍視的善行也放進「化」裡看一遍,那份不甘心的地方,就是執還在的地方。
如化忍之頌:化力為說法
頌唱此忍,最重的一句是「三世所有佛,一切亦如化,本願修諸行,變化成如來」與「佛以大慈悲,度脫化眾生,度脫亦如化,化力為說法」。長行說十化含如來大悲,頌把它推到底:佛亦如化、度亦如化、能度之力也是化力。要防的誤解是讀成虛無——頌緊接著說「知世皆如化,不分別世間,化事種種殊,皆由業差別」,差別仍在業上宛然。頌另有「修習菩提行,莊嚴於化藏,無量善莊嚴,如業作世間」——修行不是脫離化,是在化中莊嚴。末以「化法離分別,亦不分別法,此二俱寂滅,菩薩行如是」與「化海了於智,化性印世間」收:以智了化海,以化性印世間。落地處:做善事而不覺得自己在做善事,這叫行如化行;「畢竟永不捨」五字則保證它不會滑成不做。
如空忍:九句猶如虛空
第十忍是全品之極。開頭九句一氣排下:一切法界猶如虛空以無相故、一切世界猶如虛空以無起故、一切法猶如虛空以無二故、一切眾生行猶如虛空無所行故、一切佛猶如虛空無分別故、一切佛力猶如虛空無差別故、一切禪定猶如虛空三際平等故、所說一切法猶如虛空不可言說故、一切佛身猶如虛空無著無礙故。九句的次第從法界一路數到佛身,把所依(界、世界、法)、能行(眾生行)、所歸(佛、佛力、禪定、所說法、佛身)全部歸空。每句都自帶理由——不是說『都是空的』了事,是逐項給出所以然:無相、無起、無二、無所行、無分別、無差別、三際平等、不可言說、無著無礙。要排除的誤解是把「猶如虛空」當成空無所有——虛空之所以能作喻,正因為它無相而能容,不是因為它什麼都不是。收句說「以如虛空方便,了一切法皆無所有」——「方便」二字要緊:虛空是方法,不是結論。落地處:這九句可以當作一份逐項的檢查表,看自己還把哪一項當作有相之物在守。
如空忍:十一番譬如虛空對觀
接下來是本品篇幅最整齊的一段:十一番「譬如虛空……菩薩摩訶薩亦復如是」。虛空為一切法所依而不生不歿,菩薩則一切法身不生不歿;虛空不可破壞,菩薩則智慧諸力不可破壞;虛空為世間所依而自無所依,菩薩則為諸法所依而自無所依;虛空無生無滅而能持世間生滅,菩薩無向無得而能示向得;虛空無方無隅而顯無邊方隅,菩薩無業無報而顯種種業報;虛空非行非住而示種種威儀,菩薩非行非住而分別一切諸行;虛空非色非非色而示種種色,菩薩非世間色非出世間色而示一切色;虛空非久非近而能久住現一切物,菩薩亦非久非近而久住顯菩薩所行;虛空非淨非穢不離淨穢,菩薩非障非無障不離障無障;虛空一切世間皆現其前而不現於世間之前,菩薩一切諸法皆現其前而不現於諸法之前;虛空普入一切而無邊際,菩薩普入諸法而心無邊際。十一番的公式是同一個:空邊立「無」,行邊立「能」——無所以能。要排除的誤解是把兩邊讀成矛盾修辭:不是『雖然無卻能』,是『因為無所以能』。落地處:一件事做不動,多半是心裡先有了相;把相退掉,能反而出來。
如空忍:何以故——一體一味一種
十一番對觀之後,經文自設一問:何以故?答曰:菩薩所作如虛空故。隨即把理由展開:所有修習、所有嚴淨、所有成就皆悉平等,一體、一味、一種,分量如虛空,清淨遍一切處。「一體、一味、一種」六字是本段眼目——修習、嚴淨、成就三事在凡夫看是三件不同的工程,在此地是同一件事的三個名字。接著十一句正述其所成:證知一切諸法而於一切法無有分別、嚴淨一切諸佛國土、圓滿一切無所依身、了一切方無有迷惑、具一切力不可摧壞、滿足一切無邊功德、已到一切甚深法處、通達一切波羅蜜道、普坐一切金剛之座、普發一切隨類之音、為一切世間轉於法輪未曾失時。末句「未曾失時」最堪玩味:無分別而不誤時節。要排除的誤解是把「無分別」讀成不辨機宜——經文恰恰把「未曾失時」放在無分別之後,正說明無分別是最精準的分寸。這一段之後結名為第十如空忍。落地處:以為要先分別得清楚才能不失時,經文說反了——分別越少,時節越準。
如空忍之果:二十種身
成就如空忍者,經文列二十身,每身各繫一個以「故」收尾的理由,後十身之理由皆繫於「如虛空」:無來身(以無去故)、無生身(以無滅故)、無動身(以無壞故)、不實身(離虛妄故)、一相身(以無相故)、無量身(佛力無量故)、平等身(同如相故)、無差別身(等觀三世故)、至一切處身(淨眼等照無障礙故)、離欲際身(知一切法無合散故)、虛空無邊際身(福德藏無盡如虛空故)、無斷無盡法性平等辯才身、無量無礙音聲身、具足一切善巧清淨菩薩行身、一切佛法海次第相續身、一切佛剎中現無量佛剎身、示現一切自在法無休息身、一切不可壞堅固勢力身、諸根明利如金剛堅固不可壞身、持一切世間力身。二十身從「無來」起、以「持一切世間力」終——由最空之義走到最能持之用,次第本身就是義理。要排除的誤解是把這二十身當作神通名目的鋪陳:每一身都給了理由——前十身作「以無去故」「離虛妄故」之類,後十身則一一繫於「如虛空」,可見這不是功能表,是同一個空義的二十個切面。頌唱此忍時說「智慧與音聲,及以菩薩身,其性如虛空,一切皆寂滅」,正把身、語、意三者一併收歸空性。落地處:修到最後不是多出許多本事,是少掉一個能所之隔。
總結:為什麼要說到十
長行末句只有一行:佛子!是名菩薩摩訶薩十種忍。頌末亦然:菩薩能成就,如是十種忍,智慧及所行,眾生莫能測。一長一短兩處總結,看似平常,卻回應了開篇的舉數。法藏釋此品之名說十者圓數無盡;澄觀說寄圓顯十——「十」在華嚴不是計數,是表無盡。所以十忍不是十個台階,是同一個智照在十種境上的十番現行:對聲、對法、對生滅、對幻焰夢響影化空。要排除的誤解是把十忍讀成必須逐級修滿的次第表——經文自身從未說第一忍修完才能起第二忍,倒是每一忍都自足地說『是名第某忍』。頌末「智慧及所行,眾生莫能測」與前句「眾生及剎塵,尚可知其數,菩薩諸功德,無能度其限」相承:塵數可算,此德不可量。落地處:讀完十忍最該帶走的不是十個名相,是一句話——世界的樣子,隨看它的眼睛而定。
承衍
本品之「忍」與唯識一系之「忍」,名同而開合異。瑜伽師地論、成唯識論皆以三忍統攝忍波羅蜜——耐怨害忍、安受苦忍、諦察法忍;本品則開十門,前三約法、後七就喻,二者不相攝屬。又「無生法忍」一名兩軸共用:本品列為第三忍而不繫地位,瑜伽則以之繫第八不動地之無加行無功用無相住。同名而所繫之位不同,各依本宗之判,誌錄不判。華嚴宗論方面,法藏《華嚴一乘教義分齊章》全篇無「十忍」一詞,唯「無生法忍」二處,皆屬五教寄乘位次之義,非逐釋本品。至於十忍當何位一問,古德三說並行:澄觀以「寄圓顯十」立之,法藏分漸教(寄十地之後等覺位中)與圓教(遍通五位)二判,李通玄以「隨行立名」通十住初心以至佛果後利生之方便。又忍門之數,法藏錄一忍(無生忍)、二忍(二無我忍)、三無性忍、三忍(信、順、無生)、四種無生、五忍諸家開合之不齊;澄觀於列名段亦錄光統、古德、《攝論》、遠公四家配喻之異,其中遠公以空喻喻無為法一說,澄觀評為「非不有理,而違下經」。諸家成說,並錄之,不判高下。
The Word ‘Forbearance’ — First One Must Change One’s Eyes
Hearing ‘the ten forbearances,’ most people take it that what is being spoken of is endurance — swallowing a wrong rather than answering it. Yet read the chapter through and one finds that from beginning to end there is not one sentence in it about swallowing an insult. The first forbearance speaks of hearing the profound Dharma without fright or terror; the second of pondering and examining; the third of seeing not the least particle of a dharma arise or cease; and the latter seven are all of them ‘knowing that all worlds are like an illusion, like a heat-haze, like a dream.’ Where in this is there endurance? Chengguan, explaining the name of this chapter, puts it with the greatest exactness: forbearance means bearing with, understanding, and setting one’s seal upon — that is, wisdom illumining and contemplation penetrating. When a man has seen a thing through, has granted it, and rests in it, that granting is what is called forbearance. Fazang says it more plainly still: this forbearance has wisdom for its nature. So the ten forbearances are not ten tempers but ten ways of seeing; they are not the pressing down of what is uncomfortable, but the seeing clearly that the uncomfortable thing was never what it seemed. The misunderstanding to be cleared away lies just here: take forbearance for repression and one will read the whole chapter as a moral exhortation; know forbearance to be wisdom’s illumining and one will understand why the latter seven forbearances are all similes — because they are ten pairs of spectacles, not ten commandments. Brought down to use: with what one cannot bear in daily life, holding it down by force is the first level, and seeing it clearly as an illusion so that one is unmoved of oneself is the second — and it is the second that this chapter speaks of.
The Opening Clause: Gaining This Forbearance, One Reaches the Ground of Unobstructed Forbearance
Samantabhadra, opening his mouth, first declares the prize: a bodhisattva-mahāsattva has ten kinds of forbearance, and gaining them he reaches the ground of unobstructed forbearance of all bodhisattvas, where all the Buddha’s teachings are unobstructed and unexhausted; and at once he lists the ten names — sound, conformity, the non-arising of dharmas, what is like an illusion, like a heat-haze, like a dream, like an echo, like a reflection, like a transformation, like space; and then he adds a guarantee: these ten kinds of forbearance the buddhas of the three times have already declared, now declare, and will declare. Why must it be said at the very opening that the buddhas of the three times have already declared them, now declare them, and will declare them? Because the ten forbearances are not a new saying of Samantabhadra’s for the occasion, but a Dharma declared by the buddhas in common, and the hearer may take it with confidence for a constant rule. Chengguan divides this passage into two: first the raising of the number, and afterward, from ‘if he gains’ onward, the praising of its excellence; only below this comes the listing of the names and the displaying of their import. The misunderstanding to be set aside is this: taking ‘the ground of unobstructed forbearance’ for some further station outside the ten forbearances. What the scriptural text says is ‘gaining these forbearances he then reaches’ — the forbearance is itself the ground, and it is not that when the forbearing is done there is another place to go to. The place where it comes down is this: reading the ten passages that follow, one should hold this measure in mind — ‘the ground of unobstructed forbearance’ is the general marking of the ten forbearances (and among the ten passages, before the concluding of the names, only the eighth, the forbearance of what is like a reflection, has ‘by skillful means he penetrates without obstruction’); if what one reads out of them is tighter and more strained, then one has read them backward.
The Forbearance of Sound: The First Barrier Is Not the Doing, but the Being Able to Listen
Why is the first forbearance ‘sound’? Because the first threshold of cultivation is not doing but listening. The definition in the scriptural text is clean: hearing the Dharma declared by the buddhas he is not startled, not terrified, not afraid; he believes it deeply and comprehends it, loves it and delights in it and turns toward it, holds it in memory single-mindedly, cultivates it and rests in it. Seven stages are set out in a row — first three ‘nots,’ then believing and understanding, loving and delighting, holding in memory, and resting. The weight of those three ‘nots’ deserves notice: the profound Dharma frightens a man because it takes away the things he leans upon for his own ease (no self, no arising, nothing gained), and an ordinary man, hearing it, draws back by instinct. To be able not to draw back — with that, this forbearance is accomplished. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: taking ‘the forbearance of sound’ for good hearing and a good memory. What the scriptural text says is ‘not startled, not terrified, not afraid’ — this is a matter of the measure of the mind, not of the faculty of the ear. Li Tongxuan reads it from the side of the One Vehicle and says that at the first mind of the ten abidings one gains the gate of the light of the wisdom of holding the buddhas in memory and is born into the house of the Buddha’s wisdom, and that this is called gaining the forbearance of sound — he reads this forbearance very early, which amounts to saying that although the threshold is low, whoever has crossed it has already entered the Buddha’s house. Where it comes down: to judge whether one has entered the gate, do not count how much one has recited; look rather at whether, the first time one hears ‘there is no self at all,’ the mind shrinks or opens.
The Verses on the Forbearance of Sound: The Simile of the Treasure Store and the Simile of the Store of True Gold
When the verses in repetition sing this forbearance they use two similes that the prose does not have; they belong to the verses alone. The first is the simile of the treasure store: a man in the world hears that in a certain place there is a treasure store, and because that treasure may be got, there arises in his mind a great gladness; the bodhisattva, hearing the Buddha’s profound Dharma, gains ease and quiet of mind, is not startled and not terrified, nor does dread arise in him. What this simile points at is the causal order of ‘hearing’ and ‘gladness’ — it is not that gladness is first cultivated up and then one hears, but that first one hears that a treasure may be got and is glad, and being glad is able to bear. The second is the simile of the store of true gold: as a man of great merit obtains a store of true gold and, according to what befits his station, makes of it every kind of adornment; so the bodhisattva, hearing this profound sense, ponders it and the ocean of his wisdom grows, and thereby he cultivates the dharma of conformity. This simile says everything about what comes after hearing: having got the gold, one does not set it up to be looked at, but beats it into adornments to be worn — hearing the Dharma is not collecting, it is putting to use. The verses add further the clauses ‘hearing the Dharma he grows the more valiant, and he makes offerings to the buddhas and causes the buddhas to rejoice’ and ‘vigorous and not falling back, not casting off the yoke of the manifold goods,’ carrying the first forbearance all the way from ‘being able to listen’ to ‘being able to walk.’ The misunderstanding to be guarded against is reading these two similes as set phrases for exhorting the raising of the mind — they are in fact explaining the mechanism of the first forbearance: because he sees that it may be got, his mind is not startled.
The Forbearance of Conformity: To Conform Is Not to Agree
Of the second forbearance the scriptural text has but one sentence: toward dharmas he ponders and examines, is level toward them and goes against them in nothing, and conforming with them understands them clearly; he causes his mind to become pure, rests in them rightly and cultivates them, and enters into them and comes to accomplishment. The hinge is in the four words ‘level toward them and going against them in nothing.’ The hardest thing when a man contemplates dharmas is not to lean — the dharma that suits him he turns toward, the dharma that does not suit him he goes against. The forbearance of conformity is the taking away of this partiality: whatever the Dharma is, so does one grant it to be. There is a clause in the verses that says the thing outright: where dharmas are, he knows in conformity; where dharmas are not, he knows in conformity; whatever those dharmas may be, just so does he know dharmas. Where they are, he conforms with that; where they are not, he conforms with that too — this is not vagueness, it is the refusal to correct the Dharma by one’s own settled opinion. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is taking ‘conformity’ for compliance, for the refusal to distinguish right from wrong. The verses say it still more plainly from the other side: as the Peerless One has declared it, he contemplates dharmas levelly — not that forbearance which is not level, but that forbearance which is able to accomplish the level wisdom. What accomplishes the level wisdom is precisely that level forbearance, and not the forbearance that is unlevel. So the forbearance of conformity does choose: what it strikes out is one’s own partiality, not the differences among dharmas. Where it comes down: reading a sūtra and meeting a passage not to one’s taste, that instant of resistance is the ‘going against’; being able to halt the resistance and read the passage to the end is the first step of the forbearance of conformity.
The Forbearance of the Non-arising of Dharmas: The Chain of Eleven Members Is the Tightest Frame of This Chapter
The third forbearance is the pivot of the whole chapter. The setting up of its sense is only two clauses: he sees not the least particle of a dharma arising, nor does he see the least particle of a dharma ceasing. Then it presses with a ‘why is this,’ and what follows is a chain of eleven members — if there is no arising then there is no ceasing, if there is no ceasing then there is no exhausting, if there is no exhausting then there is separation from defilement, if there is separation from defilement then there is no difference, if there is no difference then there is no place, if there is no place then there is quiescence, if there is quiescence then there is separation from craving, if there is separation from craving then there is no doing, if there is no doing then there is no wish, if there is no wish then there is no dwelling, if there is no dwelling then there is no going and no coming. This string is not a heaping up of rhetoric; it is one line of reasoning: from the single footing of ‘no arising’ it presses all the way to the point where even going and coming cannot be spoken of. Why must it press so far? Because when a man has let go of ‘arising’ he will still catch at ‘exhausting’; letting go of ‘exhausting’ he will catch at ‘purity’; letting go of ‘purity’ he will catch at ‘difference’ — these eleven members shut off, one after another, every hiding place that comes after. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is reading ‘no arising’ as though nothing at all existed: what the scriptural text says is ‘he sees not the least particle of a dharma arising’ — it is that arising is not seen, not that there is asserted to be a thing called ‘nothing.’ In the Jin rendering this chain has ten members, the three in the middle running ‘no breaking down · no motion · the ground of quiescent extinction,’ and the last stretch turning from separation from craving into ‘nothing practiced — it is the great vow — he dwells in adornment,’ so that where it tends differs from the eighty’s coming home to ‘no going and no coming’ — the one gathering into the absoluteness of quiescent extinction, the other into the adornment of the great vow. Both recensions are recorded side by side without adjudication. Where it comes down: to test whether one has truly let a thing go, watch whether, having let it go, the mind at once catches hold of a second thing.
The Verses on the Forbearance of the Non-arising of Dharmas: The Thirty-Three Gods, One Vessel and Differing Food
When the verses in repetition speak of this forbearance they set out a simile the prose does not have: within the Heaven of the Thirty-Three all the gods’ sons eat from one and the same vessel, and yet what each eats is not the same; the manifold foods they eat do not come from the ten directions, but according to the deeds each has cultivated, of themselves they are all there within the vessel. One vessel, and the savor each man tastes is different; and those foods have not been carried in from anywhere outside — each man’s deeds appear of themselves within the vessel. What this simile means to say is: what is called ‘a dharma arising’ is in truth only deeds coming to bear and appearing, and there is no thing that truly arises out of somewhere else. The verses then sing the prose’s chain over again: all of them arise from causes and conditions; because there is no arising there is no ceasing, because there is no ceasing there is no exhausting, because there is no exhausting there is no defilement; toward the dharmas of the world that alter and change, he understands that in truth there is no altering; where there is no altering there is no place, and where there is no place there is quiescence. Here ‘no defilement’ answers to the prose’s ‘separation from defilement,’ and ‘no place’ to ‘no place’ — the verses are not repetition, they are another way in. The verses also have the clause ‘deeds arise from mind, and therefore it is said that mind is like an illusion,’ gathering deeds and mind too into what is like an illusion. Where it comes down: when one complains that his circumstances are unjust, the simile of one vessel and differing food is the most direct remedy — at one and the same table, what one tastes is what one brought.
The Forbearance of What Is Like an Illusion: Within One Dharma Understanding Many, Within Many Understanding One
From the fourth forbearance onward, all the latter seven go by way of simile. The sense set up for the forbearance of what is like an illusion is: he knows that all dharmas are altogether like an illusion, arising from causes and conditions; within one dharma he understands many dharmas, and within many dharmas he understands one dharma. Anyone can say the first half; the second half is the eye — it is precisely because dharmas are like an illusion and without own-nature that one and many do not obstruct each other: within one dharma many dharmas can be understood, and within many dharmas one dharma can be understood. Were dharmas to have a fixed substance, one would be one and many would be many, and they could by no means be understood through each other. After the bodhisattva knows dharmas to be like an illusion, the scriptural text lists seven penetrations: he penetrates the lands, sentient beings, the Dharma realm, the levelness of the world, the levelness of the buddhas’ appearing, the levelness of the three times, and accomplishes every kind of spiritual penetration and transformation. Spiritual penetration is placed last, being fruit and not cause — because he has seen through the illusion, displaying becomes possible. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is taking ‘like an illusion’ for ‘false, and not to be bothered with’: the scriptural text goes straight on to say that when the bodhisattva contemplates the world as an illusion he still delivers sentient beings and still turns the wheel of the Dharma. Where it comes down: one and many being understood through each other is no abstruse talk but an actual ability in reading a sūtra — to read a whole body of doctrine out of a single sentence, and to gather the whole body of doctrine back into that one sentence.
The Simile of the Forbearance of What Is Like an Illusion: The Manifold Things Are Not the Illusion, the Illusion Is Not the Manifold Things
The ordering of the simile of illusion is worth looking at closely. The scriptural text lays down in one breath more than forty ‘nots’ — not an elephant, not a horse; not a man, not a woman; not a tree, not a leaf; not earth, water, fire, wind; not daytime, not night; not one kalpa, not many kalpas; not concentration, not distraction; not the same, not other; not many, not few; not coarse, not fine — striking out one by one everything that the illusion displays; and then it gives its conclusion: the manifold things are not the illusion, nor is the illusion the manifold things; and yet it is because of the illusion that the manifold differentiated affairs are displayed. These two clauses are the hinge of the whole simile: what is displayed is not the illusion itself, nor is the illusion itself those manifold things — and yet apart from the illusion the manifold things could not be displayed at all. The displayer and what is displayed are neither one nor other. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is reading ‘not an elephant, not a horse’ as ‘there is nothing at all’ — the scriptural text says in the very next breath that the manifold differentiated affairs are displayed, and difference stands there plain. Chengguan divides the first three forbearances as being in terms of dharmas and the latter seven as being in terms of similes, and this simile is the first of those ‘in terms of similes,’ so that the way of reading the six similes after it is fixed here: first block the real, then display the plain. Where it comes down: to see an affair as ‘like an illusion’ is not to see it as nonexistent, but to see that its existing is not in its own keeping.
The Forbearance of What Is Like an Illusion: The Ten Worlds Contemplated · the Things Not Seen · the Nine Rounds of Accomplishing
The forbearance of what is like an illusion is the longest of the ten, because it pushes ‘like an illusion’ out into the gate of practice. First comes the object contemplated: the world made by deeds, the world made by afflictions, the world of lands, the world of dharmas, the world of times, the world of destinies, the world of forming, the world of decaying, the world of motion, the world of contriving — ten worlds, counting from deeds and delusion all the way to forming, decaying and motion, so that everything a man stands within is spread out in ten layers. Next come the marks of the time of contemplating: he does not see sentient beings arising or ceasing, does not see lands arising or ceasing, does not see dharmas arising or ceasing, does not see the past as something that can be discriminated, does not see the future as having anything set going, does not see the present as having a single thought that stays, and on to not seeing buddhas appear, not seeing buddhas enter nirvāṇa, not seeing a resting in the great vow, not seeing an entering of the right dwelling. Even ‘buddhas appearing’ and ‘resting in the great vow’ are not seen — this puts into the contemplation the very things the cultivator holds most precious. Most weighty is the third section: though he accomplishes buddha-lands, he knows the lands have no differences; though he accomplishes the realm of sentient beings, he knows sentient beings have no differences; though he contemplates the Dharma realm everywhere, he rests in the nature of dharmas, quiescent and unmoving; though he penetrates the levelness of the three times, he does not go against the dharma of discriminating the three times; though he accomplishes the aggregates and sense-fields, he has forever cut off any leaning upon them; though he delivers sentient beings, he understands that the Dharma realm is level; though he knows dharmas cannot be spoken, he constantly declares the Dharma with unexhausted eloquence; though he does not grasp at the transforming of sentient beings, he does not forsake great compassion; though he reveals for them the causes and conditions of the past, he knows that the nature of causes and conditions has no shifting. Nine clauses of ‘though,’ of which seven run ‘though … and yet …’ and the first two run ‘though …, he knows …’; and every one of them stands on both feet at once. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: supposing that once one has seen through, one ought to stop working. The scriptural text’s answer is exactly the opposite — it is precisely because there are no sentient beings to be delivered that great compassion never wearies. This passage concludes its name as the fourth, the forbearance of what is like an illusion. Where it comes down: doing a thing without clinging to the thing — these nine clauses are the best checklist there is.
The Verses on the Forbearance of What Is Like an Illusion: The Simile of the Master of Illusion and the Limit of What Is Like an Illusion
The verses on the forbearance of what is like an illusion supply a simile the prose does not have: it is as with a skillful master of illusion, who displays everywhere every kind of form and image, causing the multitude in vain to crave and delight, while in the end there is nothing gained at all. The prose’s simile of illusion rests its weight on the ‘nots’; the verses’ simile of the master of illusion rests its weight on ‘craving’ — the illusionist displays his images not in order to cheat, but men crave of themselves and so are cheated; the world is like an illusion and sentient beings suffer, and the suffering is not in the illusion but in the craving. The verses have further four clauses — he delivers sentient beings and causes them to know that dharmas are like an illusion; sentient beings are not other than the illusion, and when the illusion is penetrated there are no sentient beings to be found — which buckle delivering and being-like-an-illusion together: those delivered are themselves within the illusion, and when the illusion is penetrated there is no real sentient being delivered by me. This is just the verse answering to the prose’s ‘though he delivers sentient beings, he understands clearly that the Dharma realm is level.’ There is also ‘entering into the limit of what is like an illusion, he depends upon them in nothing’ and ‘thus he gains skillfulness, quiescent and without frivolous talk, and dwelling in the ground of non-obstruction he displays everywhere his great awesome power’ — being like an illusion is not the terminus; dwelling in the ground of non-obstruction and displaying awesome power everywhere is. The misunderstanding to be guarded against: reading ‘in the end there is nothing gained at all’ as a counsel of passivity. The very next clause of the verses is ‘he displays everywhere his great awesome power’ — nothing gained and great awesome power are two faces of one thing.
The Forbearance of What Is Like a Heat-Haze: The World Dwells Within Conceiving
The fifth forbearance is the shortest and the sharpest. Its sense is set up as knowing that all worlds are the same as a heat-haze; and the simile is: it is just as with a heat-haze, which has no quarter or place, is not within, not without, not existent, not nonexistent, not cut off, not lasting, not a single color, not manifold colors, nor yet without color, and is displayed only according to the speech of the world. It comes to rest on that last clause — a heat-haze ‘is’ only by force of speech and of looking from afar, and the world ‘is’ in just the same way. The scriptural text then gathers it in a single clause: thus does the bodhisattva contemplate in accordance with reality, understanding dharmas clearly, realizing all things on the spot, and causing all to be brought to fullness. The verses spread this forbearance wider than the prose does, and name its core word besides: the false conceiving of sentient beings is like a heat-haze, and causes them to understand invertedly; the world is like a heat-haze, and by conceiving there are differences; knowing that the world dwells within conceiving, one departs far from the three inversions. And again: it is just as with the heat-haze in the hot season, which men of the world see and take to be water, while the water in truth is nothing at all, and the wise man ought not to go seeking it. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is reading the forbearance of what is like a heat-haze as ‘the world does not exist’ — the appearance of the heat-haze truly is there, only that appearance is not water. The appearance of the world is truly there too, only that appearance is not real. Where it comes down: when an affliction rises, ask one question — is this water, or is it the haze of the hot season? The difference is not in the object but in one’s own conceiving.
The Forbearance of What Is Like a Dream: The Substance of a Dream Has No Arising or Ceasing
The sixth forbearance sets up its simile with a dream. The ordering of the simile is of the same pattern as the simile of the heat-haze: it is just as with a dream — not the world, not apart from the world; not the realm of desire, not the realm of form, not the formless realm; not birth, not dying away; not defiled, not pure — and yet there is display. After blocking everything it keeps one clause, ‘and yet there is display,’ and this is the clause-pattern held in common by the latter seven similes. Then come nine clauses of ‘dreamlike … therefore’: because there is no alteration, because their own-nature is dreamlike, because the clinging is dreamlike, because their being of themselves apart is dreamlike, because their root nature is dreamlike, because what they display is dreamlike, because their having no difference is dreamlike, because their being discriminated by conceiving is dreamlike, because the time of waking is dreamlike. The nine clauses run from own-nature to the time of waking, and the last is the weightiest — a dream is known for a dream only upon waking, and the world is known to be like a dream only upon awakening. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is taking ‘like a dream’ to mean that one ought here and now to deny everything before one’s eyes: a man in a dream cannot get out of the dream by denying it, but only by waking. The verses sing this forbearance thus: the substance of a dream has no arising and no ceasing, nor has it any quarter or place; the three realms are all of them just so, and he who sees this gains liberation of mind; and again, he who dwells in the samādhi of the dream penetrates that the world is altogether like a dream — it is not the same, nor yet is it other; it is not one, nor yet is it manifold; and it closes with, this is called the forbearance of what is like a dream, and thereby he penetrates the dharmas of the world, swiftly accomplishes unobstructed wisdom, and delivers at large the multitudes of beings — being like a dream is not a fleeing away, it is the road to ‘swiftly accomplishing unobstructed wisdom.’ Where it comes down: the most real thing in a dream is the feeling, and the first thing to scatter on waking is the feeling too — and this much one can use now.
The Forbearance of What Is Like an Echo: The Mechanism of Declaring with Nothing Declared
The seventh forbearance speaks of sound. Its sense is set up in two layers: first, knowing that all sounds are altogether the same as an echo, with no coming and no going; second, contemplating the Tathāgata’s voice as not issuing from within, not issuing from without, nor issuing from the two together. The second layer is the hard place — the Tathāgata declared the Dharma for forty-nine years; where in the end did that voice come from? The answer is that it is none of the three places, and yet ‘he is able to display skillful names and phrases and to accomplish every kind of exposition.’ The simile of the echo in a valley explains just this sense: it is just as with the echo in a valley, which arises from conditions and yet does not go against the nature of dharmas, and which causes sentient beings, each according to his kind, to understand it in his own way and thereby to learn and cultivate. The echo comes neither out of the mountain nor out of the man’s mouth, but out of ‘conditions’; and so it is with the Buddha’s voice. The scriptural text then adds the simile of Śacī: the consort of Śakra, the daughter of the asuras, named Śacī, who within one sound sends forth a thousand kinds of sound, and yet has no thought in her mind that it should come forth so — the hinge is in the four words ‘has no thought in her mind’: without any intending, the thousand sounds come of themselves. Therefore the bodhisattva ‘enters the realm where there is no discriminating, and accomplishes the skillful voice that goes forth according to the kinds of sentient beings.’ The closing passage gathers it into a pair: though he knows that sound has no arising, yet he displays sound everywhere; though he knows there is nothing that can be said, yet he declares dharmas at large. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is reading ‘sound is like an echo’ as meaning that the Buddha’s declaring of the Dharma has no effect — what the scriptural text says is that it is without own-nature and yet has effect. Where it comes down: what a declarer of the Dharma has most to fear is taking himself for the source of the voice; once that is there, each kind understanding in its own way turns into forcing others to be like oneself.
The Forbearance of What Is Like a Reflection: Displayed and Yet Undefiled, Difference Is Itself Not Difference
The eighth forbearance sets up its simile with a reflection, and puts first nine rounds (eighteen rubrics) of ‘not’: not born in the world, not dying away in the world; not within the world, not outside the world; not travelling in the world, not failing to travel in the world; not the same, not other; not going, not failing to go; not resting, not failing to rest; not a worldly dharma, not a world-transcending dharma; not practicing the bodhisattva practice, not forsaking the great vow; not real, not unreal. These eighteen rubrics block off entirely the relation between the bodhisattva and the world, and there follows at once a clause of positive statement: though he constantly upholds all the Buddha’s teachings, he is able to bring to completion all the affairs of the world; he is not carried along in the current of the world, nor does he come to a stop within the current of the Dharma — that he does not rest even in the current of the Dharma is a very weighty clause. The simile of the reflection then follows: the sun and moon, men and women, houses, mountains and forests, rivers and springs, display their reflections within oil, water, a body, a jewel, a bright mirror and other pure things; the reflection and the oil and the rest are not one, not other, not apart, not joined; within a running stream it is not washed away, within a pool or a well it does not sink, and though displayed therein it is nowhere defiled. Three sentences say the whole of ‘being inside a thing without belonging to it.’ The scriptural text then adds two layers: though things far and near can all display reflections, the reflection does not become far or near according as the thing is far or near; and, as within a seed there is no root, sprout, stem, joint, branch or leaf, and yet such things as these can arise from it — the former breaks the grasping at space, the latter displays the skillfulness of discriminating two marks within a dharma that has no two. The misunderstanding to be cleared away: a reflection is not another name for a false appearance; it is the very sample of ‘arising in dependence upon another, and displayed without being defiled.’ After this forbearance concludes its name there is a further passage on the virtue of accomplishing it, and its weightiest clause is this — this difference is right there not difference, and being other and not being other obstruct one another in nothing: difference, in its very substance, is not difference. Where it comes down: for entering the world and doing its work without being stained by it, a reflection is the aptest image a man can have of himself.
The Verses on the Forbearance of What Is Like a Reflection: The Reflection in Water, Neither Within Nor Without
When the verses sing this forbearance, clause after clause buckles upon ‘neither within nor without’: it is just as with a reflection in water, which is neither within nor without; the bodhisattva, taking hold of awakening, penetrates that the world is not a world at all; and again: he neither dwells in the world nor goes forth from it, because the world cannot be spoken; nor is he within or without, but like a reflection is displayed within the world. The prose blocks it off entirely with nine rounds (eighteen rubrics) of ‘not’; the verses gather it into the single pair ‘neither within nor without’ — and this is the convention of the verses: what the prose has already taught, the verses only answer to. What the verses alone have is a section on the conduct of mind after entering this forbearance: entering into this profound sense, apart from defilement and wholly clear through, he does not cast away the mind of his original vow, and everywhere he shines the lamp of wisdom; the world has no boundary, and his wisdom enters and is wholly level with it; everywhere he transforms the multitudes of beings and causes them to cast off their manifold clingings. Note ‘he does not cast away the mind of his original vow’ — the prose said ‘not practicing the bodhisattva practice, not forsaking the great vow,’ and the verses bring the second half out into the open on the positive side: what is blocked is the grasping, not the vow itself. Where it comes down: for the man who reads ‘not practicing the bodhisattva practice’ and feels his heart draw back, this clause of the verses is the remedy.
The Forbearance of What Is Like a Transformation: The Ten Transformations, the Seven Knowings, and the Man of Transformation
The ninth forbearance gathers everything under ‘transformation.’ First it lists ten kinds of transformation: the mental deeds of sentient beings are a transformation (arising from conceiving and thinking); the manifold practices of the worlds are a transformation (arising from discriminating); inverted views of pleasure and pain are a transformation (arising from false grasping); unreal dharmas are a transformation (displayed by speech); afflictions and discriminations are a transformation (arising from thought and conception); purification and taming are a transformation (displayed by non-discrimination); not being carried along in the three times is a transformation (no arising and levelness); the power of the bodhisattva’s vows is a transformation (brought about by vast cultivation); the great compassion of the Tathāgata is a transformation (displayed by skillful means); the skillful means of turning the wheel of the Dharma is a transformation (declared by wisdom, fearlessness and eloquence). The first five are on the defiled side, the latter five on the pure — and that even the Tathāgata’s great compassion and the turning of the wheel of the Dharma are counted as transformation is the fiercest stroke in this forbearance: not one corner is left where one may say ‘this one is real.’ Next it lists six knowings: a knowing that realizes it before him, a vast knowing, a boundless knowing, a knowing according to the thing itself, a sovereign knowing, a truly real knowing, together with ‘not something that the views of falsity can shake.’ Then comes the simile of transformation, with more than twenty pairs of ‘not’ in a row — not arising from mind, not undergoing the fruit of deeds, not dwelling long and not dwelling for a moment, not ordinary and not holy, not defiled and not pure, not wise and not foolish, not birth-and-death and not nirvāṇa, not existent and not nonexistent. The misunderstanding to be cleared away: reading ‘the Tathāgata’s great compassion too is a transformation’ as a belittling of the Buddha — the scriptural text’s meaning is that the Buddha’s compassion and his declaring of the Dharma are alike without own-nature, and therefore can answer everywhere without ever running dry. After the name is concluded there follow the simile of the man of transformation and the five names (one who is liberated, one who is tamed, one of spiritual penetration, one who does not fall back, one who is unobstructed), which fix the virtue of accomplishing this forbearance. Where it comes down: put the good deed you prize most into ‘transformation’ and look at it once — the place where you find yourself unwilling is the place where the grasping still is.
The Verses on the Forbearance of What Is Like a Transformation: By the Strength of Transformation He Declares the Dharma
When the verses sing this forbearance, their weightiest clauses are: all the buddhas of the three times are likewise, all of them, like a transformation; upon their original vow they cultivate the several practices, and by transformation they become tathāgatas; and: the Buddha, with great loving-kindness and compassion, delivers sentient beings who are like a transformation; and the delivering too is like a transformation, and by the strength of transformation he declares the Dharma for them. The prose said that the ten transformations include the Tathāgata’s great compassion; the verses push it to the bottom: the Buddha too is like a transformation, the delivering too is like a transformation, and the very strength by which he delivers is the strength of transformation. The misunderstanding to be guarded against is reading this as nihilism — the verses say next: knowing that the world is altogether like a transformation, he does not discriminate the world; the affairs of transformation are of every kind and differ from each other, and all of them are owing to the differences of deeds. Difference still stands plain, upon deeds. The verses have also: cultivating the practice of awakening, he adorns the store of transformation, and with measureless goodness he well adorns it, as deeds make the world — cultivation is not a getting away from transformation, it is adorning within transformation. And they close with: the dharma of transformation is apart from discriminating, nor does it go about discriminating dharmas; these two are both of them quiescent — and just so is the bodhisattva’s practice; and: the ocean of transformation he penetrates by wisdom, and by the nature of transformation he seals the world — penetrating the ocean of transformation by wisdom, and sealing the world by the nature of transformation. Where it comes down: doing a good deed without feeling that one is doing a good deed is what is called practicing the practice that is like a transformation; and the words ‘in the end he never forsakes it’ are the guarantee that this will not slide into doing nothing at all.
The Forbearance of What Is Like Space: The Nine Clauses of Being Like Space
The tenth forbearance is the utmost of the whole chapter. It opens with nine clauses laid down in one breath: the whole Dharma realm is like space, because it is markless; all world-systems are like space, because there is no rising; all dharmas are like space, because there is no duality; the practice of all sentient beings is like space, because there is nothing practiced; all buddhas are like space, because there is no discriminating; all the powers of the buddhas are like space, because there is no difference; all concentrations are like space, because the three limits are level; all the dharmas that are declared are like space, because they cannot be spoken; the bodies of all buddhas are like space, because there is no attachment and no obstruction. The order of the nine clauses counts from the Dharma realm all the way to the bodies of the buddhas, gathering into space that which is depended upon (the realm, the world-systems, dharmas), that which practices (the practice of sentient beings), and that toward which all tends (the buddhas, their powers, the concentrations, the dharmas declared, the buddha-bodies). Each clause brings its own reason with it — it is not a matter of saying ‘they are all empty’ and having done, but of giving item by item the wherefore: markless, no rising, no duality, nothing practiced, no discriminating, no difference, the three limits level, cannot be spoken, no attachment and no obstruction. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is taking ‘like space’ for empty of everything — space can serve as a simile precisely because it is markless and can therefore contain, not because it is nothing whatever. The closing clause says: by a skillful means that is like space he understands clearly that all dharmas are wholly without anything whatever — and the words ‘skillful means’ are the important ones: space is the method, not the conclusion. Where it comes down: these nine clauses can serve as a checklist gone through item by item, to see which item one is still guarding as a thing with marks.
The Forbearance of What Is Like Space: The Eleven Rounds of Contemplating in Pairs, ‘It Is Just as with Space’
What comes next is the most evenly ordered passage in the chapter: eleven rounds of ‘it is just as with space … so likewise is the bodhisattva-mahāsattva.’ Space is what all dharmas depend upon and yet neither arises nor dies away; the bodhisattva’s dharma-body of all dharmas neither arises nor dies away. Space cannot be destroyed; the bodhisattva’s wisdom and powers cannot be destroyed. Space is what the world depends upon while itself depending upon nothing; the bodhisattva is what dharmas depend upon while himself depending upon nothing. Space has no arising and no ceasing and yet sustains the arising and ceasing of the world; the bodhisattva has no turning toward and no gaining and yet can reveal turning toward and gaining. Space has no quarter and no corner and yet displays boundless quarters and corners; the bodhisattva has no deeds and no fruits of deeds and yet reveals every kind of deed and fruit. Space is neither travelling nor resting and yet displays every deportment; the bodhisattva is neither travelling nor resting and yet discriminates all practices. Space is neither form nor non-form and yet displays every kind of form; the bodhisattva is neither worldly form nor world-transcending form and yet displays all forms. Space is neither far nor near and yet abides long and displays all things; the bodhisattva too is neither far nor near and yet abides long and reveals the practices that bodhisattvas practice. Space is neither pure nor foul and is not apart from purity and foulness; the bodhisattva is neither obstructed nor unobstructed and is not apart from obstruction and non-obstruction. Before space all worlds appear, while it does not appear before the world; before the bodhisattva all dharmas appear, while he does not appear before dharmas. Space enters everywhere into all and has no boundary; the bodhisattva enters everywhere into dharmas and his mind has no boundary. The formula of the eleven rounds is one and the same: on the side of space a ‘no’ is set up, and on the side of practice an ‘able’ — being able because there is no. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is reading the two sides as a rhetoric of contradiction: it is not ‘though there is nothing, yet he is able,’ but ‘because there is nothing, therefore he is able.’ Where it comes down: when a thing will not move, it is generally because a mark was already there in the mind first; take the mark away and the ability comes out of itself.
The Forbearance of What Is Like Space: Why Is This — One Substance, One Savor, One Kind
After the eleven rounds of contemplating in pairs, the scriptural text sets itself a question: why is this? And it answers: because what the bodhisattva does is like space. It then spreads out the reason: all his cultivating, all his adorning and purifying, all his accomplishing are wholly level, of one substance, of one savor, of one kind, of a measure like space, pure and pervading everywhere. The six words ‘of one substance, of one savor, of one kind’ are the eye of this passage — cultivating, adorning-and-purifying and accomplishing look to an ordinary man like three different pieces of work, and here they are three names for one and the same thing. There follow eleven clauses of positive statement about what is thus accomplished: he realizes and knows all dharmas while making no discrimination toward any dharma; he adorns and purifies all the buddha-lands; he brings to fullness every body that depends upon nothing; he understands all quarters without confusion; he is possessed of all powers that cannot be broken down; he brings to fullness all boundless merit; he has reached the place of all the profoundest dharmas; he penetrates the way of all the perfections; he sits everywhere upon all the adamantine seats; he sends forth everywhere all voices that go according to kind; he turns the wheel of the Dharma for all worlds without ever missing its time. The last clause, ‘without ever missing its time,’ is the most worth turning over: no discriminating, and yet never wrong about the season. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is reading ‘no discriminating’ as a failure to tell what suits the occasion — the scriptural text places ‘without ever missing its time’ precisely after ‘no discriminating,’ which shows that non-discrimination is the most exact sense of measure there is. After this passage the name is concluded as the tenth, the forbearance of what is like space. Where it comes down: one supposes that one must first discriminate clearly in order not to miss the moment; the scriptural text says the reverse — the less the discriminating, the truer the timing.
The Fruit of the Forbearance of What Is Like Space: Twenty Kinds of Body
For one who has accomplished the forbearance of what is like space, the scriptural text lists twenty bodies, each body carrying a reason closed with ‘because,’ and the reasons of the latter ten all fastened upon ‘like space’: the body without coming (because there is no going), the body without arising (because there is no ceasing), the body without motion (because there is no breaking down), the body that is not real (because it is apart from what is false), the body of one mark (because it is markless), the measureless body (because the powers of the buddhas are measureless), the level body (because it is the same as the mark of suchness), the body without difference (because he contemplates the three times as level), the body that reaches everywhere (because his pure eye beholds levelly without obstruction), the body at the limit of separation from craving (because he knows dharmas have no joining and no scattering), the body boundless as space (because his store of merit is inexhaustible like space), the body of eloquence unbroken and unexhausted and level with the nature of dharmas, the body of measureless and unobstructed voice, the body possessed of every skillful and pure bodhisattva practice, the body wherein the ocean of all the Buddha’s teachings follows on in due order, the body that within all buddha-fields displays measureless buddha-fields, the body that displays all sovereign dharmas without resting, the body of all indestructible and firm strength, the body whose faculties are bright and keen, firm and indestructible as adamant, the body that sustains the strength of all worlds. The twenty bodies begin from ‘without coming’ and end with ‘sustaining the strength of all worlds’ — walking from the emptiest sense to the most sustaining function, and the order is itself doctrine. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is taking these twenty bodies for a spreading out of the names of spiritual powers: every one of them is given a reason — the first ten with such reasons as ‘because there is no going’ and ‘because it is apart from what is false,’ and the latter ten fastened one by one upon ‘like space’ — which shows that this is not a table of functions but twenty facets of one and the same sense of emptiness. When the verses sing this forbearance they say: wisdom and voice, and the bodhisattva’s body — their nature is like space, and all of them are wholly quiescent, gathering body, speech and mind together into the nature of emptiness. Where it comes down: what one cultivates to at the last is not a heap of new abilities, but the losing of one partition between the grasper and the grasped.
The Conclusion: Why It Must Be Told Out to Ten
The last sentence of the prose is a single line: Sons of the Buddha! These are called the bodhisattva-mahāsattva’s ten kinds of forbearance. The end of the verses is the same: that the bodhisattva is able to accomplish these ten kinds of forbearance — his wisdom and the practice he practices, sentient beings have no power to fathom. Two conclusions, one long and one short, look ordinary enough, and yet they answer the raising of the number at the opening. Fazang, explaining this chapter’s name, says that ‘ten’ is the perfect number, without exhausting; Chengguan says that lodging them in the perfect he displays ten — in the Huayan ‘ten’ is not a counting but a betokening of the inexhaustible. So the ten forbearances are not ten steps of a stair but one and the same illumining wisdom appearing ten times over upon ten kinds of object: upon sound, upon dharmas, upon arising and ceasing, upon illusion, heat-haze, dream, echo, reflection, transformation and space. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is reading the ten forbearances as a table of stages that must be filled out one grade at a time — the scriptural text never says that the first forbearance must be finished before the second can begin; rather, each forbearance says of itself, complete in itself, ‘this is called the such-and-such forbearance.’ The verses’ last words, ‘his wisdom and the practice he practices, sentient beings have no power to fathom,’ carry on from the clause before them, ‘sentient beings and the dust motes of the fields — the number of these may yet be known; but the manifold merits of the bodhisattva — there is no one who can fathom their limit’: the number of dust motes may be reckoned, this virtue cannot be measured. Where it comes down: what one ought most to carry away from reading the ten forbearances is not ten technical names but one sentence — the look of the world is settled by the eyes that look at it.
Lineage
The ‘forbearance’ of this chapter and the ‘forbearance’ of the consciousness-only line share a name but differ in their opening and combining. The Yuqie shidi lun and the Cheng weishi lun both gather the perfection of forbearance under three forbearances — the forbearance that bears with the harm done by foes, the forbearance that accepts suffering with equanimity, the forbearance that examines dharmas with discernment; this chapter opens ten gates, the first three in terms of dharmas and the latter seven in terms of similes, and the two do not gather one another in. Again, the one name ‘the forbearance of the non-arising of dharmas’ is used by both axes: this chapter lists it as the third forbearance and attaches it to no station of the grounds, while the Yuqie attaches it to the abiding of the eighth, the Immovable Ground, that is without exertion, without effort and without marks. The name is the same and the station attached to it is not the same; each follows the judgement of its own house, and it is recorded without adjudication. On the side of the treatises of the Huayan house, in the whole of Fazang’s Huayan yisheng jiaoyi fenqi zhang the term ‘the ten forbearances’ does not occur, and there are only two places with ‘the forbearance of the non-arising of dharmas,’ both belonging to the sense of the stations of the five teachings and the vehicles they are lodged in, and not an explanation of this chapter passage by passage. As to the one question, at what station the ten forbearances belong, three sayings of the ancient masters run side by side: Chengguan sets it up by ‘lodging them in the perfect, he displays ten’; Fazang divides two judgements, the gradual teaching (lodged in the station of equal awakening after the ten grounds) and the perfect teaching (running through all five stations everywhere); Li Tongxuan, by ‘setting up the name according to practice,’ runs it from the first mind of the ten abidings as far as the skillful means of benefiting beings after the fruit of buddhahood. As to the number of the gate of forbearance, Fazang records the unmatched openings and combinings of the several houses — one forbearance (the forbearance of non-arising), two forbearances (the forbearance of the two selflessnesses), the forbearance of the three non-natures, three forbearances (faith, conformity, non-arising), the four kinds of non-arising, five forbearances; and Chengguan, in the passage of listing the names, also records the differing matchings of the similes by four houses, Guangtong, the ancient masters, the Shedacheng lun and Master Yuan, of which Master Yuan’s taking of the simile of space as a simile for the unconditioned dharma is appraised by Chengguan as ‘not that there is no principle in it, but it goes against the sūtra below.’ These are settled sayings of the several houses; they are recorded side by side, without judging which is higher and which lower.
品三十 阿僧祇品Asaṃkhyeya
全文五層 →Full five layers →為什麼一部經要停下來講算術
一部講佛境界的經,忽然用一整品來排數字,這是不是離題?心王菩薩問的正是這件事:佛在前面諸品裡動不動就說「阿僧祇」「不可說不可說」,這些字到底是什麼意思?他一口氣把十個數名牒出來——阿僧祇、無量、無邊、無等、不可數、不可稱、不可思、不可量、不可說、不可說不可說——然後只問一句:云何。誤讀是把這一問看成好奇心,以為佛要教一套算法。澄觀釋此云,心王之所以來問,是「表數不離心,數與非數皆自在故」;《演義鈔》更把「心王」二字拆開釋:心者統攝諸法,一切最勝;王者統御四海,為最勝。法藏亦以心王為「表數法依心」。三家同指一處:數不是外面的東西,是心量的刻度。落地:這一品不是算術課,是拿數字量心量。
為什麼只問十個,卻不問中間那一百多個
心王牒了十個名,前面那一百多重數名一個沒問。這是漏了嗎?澄觀釋此云「舉後攝初,顯無盡故」——問最後的,前面的自然都攝在裡面;何況經文說的是「如來演說」,但問這本數,就已把「轉」等一併攝了。誤讀是以為十個名是十件事,其實是一條線上的十個刻度,而每一個刻度後面還跟著一個「轉」,所以十門實有二十名。落地:讀一串數名不必逐個追究,看它往哪個方向走就夠了——它一路往『說不出來』那邊走。
佛為什麼親自答,而不叫菩薩答
華嚴一經,多半是菩薩承佛神力而說;這一品卻是佛親口答。何以如此?三家所答同歸一處而各出其詞:澄觀釋此云「所以佛自答者,正表難思故」,又說此品統說因位終德,故佛說之;法藏以為「唯佛所知無極之數,故佛自說」;李通玄則問得更直白——此品何故如來自說,因為「此數法廣大,下位智所不及,唯佛能究竟故」。誤讀是把說主看成體例小事。說主是判斷難易的第一個線索:由誰說,就標出這法在誰的境界裡。落地:看見佛自說,就該把讀的力氣調到最重。
一百二十三重:倍倍相乘是怎麼一回事
佛答的第一句是「一百洛叉為一俱胝」,此後全用同一個格式:某某某某為一某某。這是什麼算法?關鍵在「以所數等於能數」——不是十倍十倍地加上去,而是把前一個數自己乘自己一遍。所以第二重是俱胝乘俱胝,第三重是阿庾多乘阿庾多,如此一百二十三重。誤讀是把它讀成十進位的大數表。李通玄釋此云,此方算法有下、中、上三等,「其下者十十變之,中者萬萬變之,上者億億變之」,而本品用的是上等數法。落地:這串數不是變長,是每一步都把自己整個翻一次——所以走不了幾步,已經沒有語言可以承載。
這些梵音名字要不要一一去解
數名之中大半是音寫:阿庾多、那由他、頻婆羅、矜羯羅、毘攞伽、達攞步陀……讀者容易起一個念頭:這些名字各有什麼深意?澄觀在這裡替後人省了大力氣,直接判云「其中多存梵音,但是數名,更無別理」。李通玄於此段所出的也只是反切注音,不是義解。誤讀是把數名當成法數去參。落地:名字只是門牌號碼,該用力的地方在它排出來的那條線,不在門牌本身。
洛叉是萬還是億:古德所配不同
同一個「洛叉」,澄觀說「洛叉是萬,俱胝是億」,李通玄卻說「一洛叉此云一億,一俱胝此云一兆」。到底哪個對?這裡不必急著取捨——澄觀自己已誌一種異配:若依《俱舍》以洛叉為億,則俱胝當兆。可見漢地本無定譯,所配隨所依之論而異。誤讀是以為經有一個唯一正確的換算表。落地:換算表是為了讓人有感覺,不是為了核帳;感覺一到,表就可以放下。
為什麼最後要用「此又」兩個字
數列末尾,經文說「此又不可說不可說為一不可說不可說轉」。為什麼忽然冒出「此又」二字?澄觀釋此云,若照前面的格式具足牒出,此處要連寫四個「不可說不可說」,譯家用兩個字替掉一組,是「為譯之巧」。《演義鈔》把所省的四個一一還原,並誌前人有破此二字為冗長者。誤讀是把它看成譯筆疏漏。落地:語言到這裡已經扛不住了——譯家的省筆,本身就是這一品要說的事。
頌的第一步:把「不可說」再積一次
長行已經數到頭了,頌為什麼還要重數?頌一開口就是「不可言說不可說,充滿一切不可說」——把那個已經是終點的數,再拿來充滿另一個終點。澄觀科此頌之積數凡有十重,並說明何以只取「不可說」而不取最後的「不可說不可說轉」:一則取言之易,二則表言所不及之數。誤讀是覺得頌只是把長行複述一遍。頌做的是長行做不到的事:長行給出一條有終點的階梯,頌把終點拿來當新的起點。落地:真正的無盡不在階梯的最高一階,在『最高一階還可以再乘一次』這件事上。
剎碎為塵,塵中有剎:兩個方向同時走
頌接著說:不可說的佛剎全碎成微塵,一粒塵中又有不可說的剎;而且是一念之間碎盡,念念相續,窮盡不可說劫恆常如此;碎出來的塵中之剎再碎為塵,要說就更難。這是在堆砌嗎?看它的方向就明白:一邊往小處碎,一邊往大處含,兩個方向同時走,所以永遠合不攏。誤讀是把它當文學誇張。澄觀已把這幾步逐一科出——三是諸不可說一一是剎皆碎為塵,四是一一塵有不可說剎,五是諸塵中剎一念遍碎為塵,六是念念碎塵復盡多劫,七八是所碎之塵復有多剎、多剎復碎為塵。落地:這是算式,不是修辭;每一句都是上一句的乘數。
一位普賢,讚不完
前面積了那麼大的數,是要拿來做什麼?答案在這一偈:「以此諸塵數諸劫,一塵十萬不可說,爾劫稱讚一普賢,無能盡其功德量。」原來全部的積數只是分母,用來襯一件事——讚一位普賢都讚不完。澄觀於此誌所數之廣有三重:以上諸劫讚一普賢不盡、一塵中有多普賢、遍法界塵皆有多普賢;並且下了一句重話:若不以稱性之心思之,心惑狂亂。誤讀是把它讀成讚美詞。落地:這數不是給頭腦算的,是給心量撐的——用思量去追,只會亂;把心放到與法界同大,才接得住。
一毛端有不可說的普賢
「於一微細毛端處,有不可說諸普賢」——一根毛尖上怎麼站得下?這一問的答案不在空間,在「毛端」二字是拿來做什麼用的。經文緊接著說「一切毛端悉亦爾,如是乃至遍法界」:毛端是最小的單位,法界是最大的範圍,而兩者裝的東西一樣多。誤讀是想像一幅擠滿人的圖。落地:這裡要換的不是想像力,是度量衡——一旦承認最小處也能容無盡,大小這把尺就失效了。
毛端上的剎土:同類與異類,淨與莊嚴
接下來三偈把毛端所含的剎細說一遍:一毛端處所有的剎其數無量,盡虛空所有的毛端處處如此;那些國土以無量種類差別而住,有不可說的異類剎,也有不可說的同類剎;一切毛端處都有淨剎、都有種種莊嚴奇妙。為什麼要分同類異類?因為若只說「無量」,讀者容易讀成一團模糊;分出同異,才知道無量之中還各各分明。誤讀是以為多到一起就分不清了。落地:無盡不等於混沌——這是本品一路要守住的分寸。
毛端演佛名,佛身現毛孔
「於彼一一毛端處,演不可說諸佛名,一一名有諸如來」——毛端裡出來的不只是剎土,還有佛名,名下還有如來;而一一諸佛身上又現不可說毛孔,毛孔中現眾色相。這是不是繞回去了?正是要繞回去:從毛端到佛,再從佛身回到毛孔,一圈套一圈。澄觀科此段云「依中現正」——依報的境界中現出正報的佛身。誤讀是把它讀成兩件事的並列。落地:依正之間沒有一道牆,這一頌就是把牆拆給你看。
光、蓮華、葉、月、日:層層相生
從「不可言說諸毛孔,咸放光明」起,經文一連數偈:光中現蓮華,華中有眾葉,葉中現色相,色中復現葉,葉中有光,光中有色,色中現光,光中現月,月復現月,月中現光,光中現日,日中現色,色中又現光明。這是在炫技嗎?澄觀科此段為「正中現依」——正報身上出依報之境,境上復出境。誤讀是想一層一層數清楚。落地:這一段本來就不是要你數清楚,是要你在數不清的時候,把『一個一個算』的習慣鬆開。
師子座與如須彌的妙寶
層層相生之後,經文落到兩個具體的東西上:光明之內現不可說師子座,嚴具與光明各各不可說;光中妙色、色中淨光互出不已,種種光明之內各現妙寶大如須彌;一一寶中所現之寶又不可說,那如須彌的一顆妙寶又現出眾多剎土。為什麼忽然出現座與寶?因為座是說法之處,寶是莊嚴之極——無盡若只是空轉,就沒有落腳點;有了座,就有人在那裡說法。落地:讀到這裡可以鬆一口氣——重重無盡的盡頭,是有人正在說法。
寶盡、剎末為塵、塵相出光
「盡須彌寶無有餘,示現剎土皆如是」——把那些如須彌的寶用盡,所現剎土也都如此;再把一個剎土末為微塵,一塵的色相不可說;眾剎為塵,塵塵有相,種種塵相皆出光明。為什麼要「盡」?因為前面一直在「生」,這裡忽然說用盡,是要顯示:即使窮盡了能舉的例子,所顯的事仍舊沒有窮盡。誤讀是以為「盡」就是收尾。落地:這裡的「盡」是把手上的材料都交出去,而不是把話說完。
光中現佛說法,聞偈得解
塵相所出的光明裡現出佛來,佛所說的法不可說,法中的妙偈不可說,聞偈得解的人也不可說;在這不可說的開解、念念之中,所顯了的真諦不可說,並且示現未來一切佛常演說法無有窮盡;一一佛法不可說,種種清淨、妙音、法輪也各各不可說。為什麼要把『聽懂的人』也算進去?因為法若無人得解,無盡就只是景觀。澄觀科此為「依中現正說法」。落地:這一段把「無盡」從風景改寫成了教學——說的人不可說,聽懂的人也不可說。
法輪裡的修多羅,修多羅裡的法門
接著是全品最整齊的一組推衍:一一法輪中演修多羅不可說,一一修多羅中分別法門不可說,一一法門中又說諸法不可說,一一諸法中調伏眾生不可說。四層一路收到「調伏眾生」。這是不是又在堆疊?看它收在哪裡就知道不是:前三層是法的展開,第四層是人的得度。誤讀是只看見層數。落地:法門開得再多,最後一格填的是有人因此被調伏——這是本品的秤,秤的不是量,是益。
一毛端住不可說劫
「或復於一毛端處,不可說劫常安住」——前面說的是空間之含,這裡忽然說時間之住:在一毛端上安住不可說劫,其餘毛端亦然。為什麼要補這一句?因為若只講空間,容易讀成一張靜止的圖。澄觀科此一偈為「明現時常住」。誤讀是把它當成前文的重複。落地:無盡不是一瞬間的奇觀,是可以住下來的——住得久,才談得上做事。
心無礙,化佛復化
住下來之後做什麼?「其心無礙不可說,變化諸佛不可說,一一變化諸如來,復現於化不可說」——變化出來的佛,還能再變化。接著法身、分身、莊嚴、往詣十方、周行國土、觀察眾生、清淨眾生、調伏眾生一路排下來;再接莊嚴、神力、自在、神變;再接神通、境界、加持、住世。澄觀科這一大段為「明自在調生」。誤讀是把這些詞當成同義反覆。它們其實有次第:先有無礙之心,才有變化;先有變化之身,才有周行、觀察、清淨、調伏。落地:神通在這一品裡從來不是表演,是為了把人一個一個接住。
清淨實相與那個「決定」
第二輪推衍與前一輪幾乎同形,只多了一格:一一法門中又說諸法,一一諸法中「所有決定」不可說,一一決定中調伏眾生不可說。多出來的「決定」是什麼?是法說到究竟處那一錘定音——沒有這一格,法門再多也只是說法而已。接著又列同類法、同類心、異類法、異類心、異類根、異類語,念念於諸所行處調伏眾生。誤讀是把兩輪推衍看成重複之筆。落地:兩輪之差就在「決定」二字——法要能定得下來,才調伏得了人。
菩薩能分別說,明算的人辨不出來
這一品到此,忽然插進一句對照:「菩薩悉能分別說,諸明算者莫能辨。」為什麼要拿算數家來比?因為前面一路是數,讀者難免以為這是算得出來的事。經文在此劃線:善算之人辨不出來,菩薩卻能一一分別。緊接著又說一毛端處的大剎小剎、雜染清淨、麁細之剎,如是一切不可說,而「一一明了可分別」。誤讀是把菩薩之知看成算得更快。落地:那不是算力之勝,是根本換了一種知——算是一個一個數過去,明見是一時全在眼前。
塵數之剎共集毛端,而毛端不增大
「以一國土碎為塵,其塵無量不可說,如是塵數無邊剎,俱來共集一毛端」——然後是全品最要緊的一句:「共集毛端無迫隘,不使毛端有增大,而彼國土俱來集。」不擠、不脹,而確實都來了。這怎麼可能?澄觀釋此云,是「稱法性之一毛」故受多剎而無外,「不壞相之多剎」故各住其相;《演義鈔》更申其緣起之義:由不即故有能所入,由不離故得相入。經文自己也補了一句:其中國土形相如本無雜亂,如一國土不亂餘,一切國土皆如是。誤讀是把它想成空間壓縮。落地:一邊稱性所以無外,一邊不壞相所以分明——華嚴講相入,講的一直是這兩句同時成立。
虛空布滿毛端,菩薩一念能說
「虛空境界無邊際,悉布毛端使充滿,如是毛端諸國土,菩薩一念皆能說。」前面說的是容得下,這裡說的是說得出。為什麼要補「一念皆能說」?因為若只說境界無盡而無人能說,這一品就答不了心王的問——心王問的正是「云何」。誤讀是把這句讀成讚歎。落地:無盡之境要有一個能說之人立在旁邊,這一品才算把問題答完。
毛孔能受諸剎,諸剎不能遍毛孔
「於一微細毛孔中,不可說剎次第入,毛孔能受彼諸剎,諸剎不能遍毛孔。」這句話乍看不對稱:既然裝得下,為什麼裝不滿?澄觀所釋的「稱法性之一毛」正解此處——毛上取的是稱性義,故如法性之無外;剎上取的是不壞相義,故不能遍那無外之毛。接著又說入時、受時的劫數不可說,行列安住之時一切諸劫無能說。誤讀是把「不能遍」讀成剎小毛大。落地:不是大小之別,是性相之別——這一句是本品最精細的一格,讀懂它,前面所有的重重無盡才不是誇張。
攝受安住之後:從方便到知眾生的每一件事
安住之後所作為何?經文用四十對句一路排下:入時方便、入已所作、意根明了、遊歷諸方、勇猛精進、自在神變、所有思惟、所有大願、所有境界、一切通達;身語意三業清淨、信解清淨、妙智妙慧清淨;了諸實相、斷諸疑惑、出離生死、超昇正位、甚深三昧、了達一切;再落到眾生身上——知眾生身、心樂、業果、意解、品類、種性、受身、生處、正生、生已、解了、趣向、言語、作業。澄觀科此為「三業勤勇行」及「應器攝生行」。為什麼列這麼細?因為「不可說」若不落到一件一件事上,就是空話。誤讀是快速掃過這一大段。落地:這一段是把無盡拆成清單——而清單的最後十四項全是『知眾生的什麼』。
大慈悲的十度大行
最長的一段從「菩薩如是大慈悲,利益一切諸世間」起:普現其身、入諸佛剎、見諸菩薩、發生智慧、請問正法、敷揚佛教;現身詣土、示現神通、普遍十方、分身親近;作諸供具、清淨眾寶、上妙蓮華、最勝香鬘、供養如來;清淨信心、最勝悟解、增上志樂、恭敬諸佛;然後是十度——修行於施、有求皆施、一切悉施;持戒清淨、心意清淨;成就諸忍、無生法忍;起大精進、不退轉心、不傾動心;一切定藏、寂然在定、了達諸禪;智慧通達、三昧自在、了達諸法、明見諸佛……一路到光網現色、普照佛剎,到清淨三業、成就智寶、深入法界,到稱歎諸佛、讚揚無盡,到三世如空、成就菩提,到廣演正法、哀愍世間。澄觀於此科出游方供佛行、廣修十度行、游剎自在行、調伏眾生行、三業深淨行、願智自在行諸目。誤讀是被長度嚇退而略讀。落地:這一段是全品唯一一處把「不可說」全部換算成菩薩的日常功課——一句一件事,件件做得。
劫可盡,德不可盡
長段之後,經文用一偈收束:「不可言說一切劫,讚不可說諸功德,不可說劫猶可盡,不可說德不可盡。」這裡出現全品第一個「可盡」。為什麼忽然說可盡?因為要有一個可盡的東西,才襯得出不可盡的那個。澄觀科此一偈為「結德無盡」。誤讀是把「劫猶可盡」讀成經文自相矛盾。落地:時間再長也是量,功德不是量——這一句把兩者第一次分開。
舌根歎佛:一身、一頭、一舌、一聲
接著把這件事推到極端:不可說的如來、不可說的舌根,歎佛不可說的德,不可說劫也說不盡;十方眾生同時成正覺,其中一佛能普現不可說一切身;而這不可說中的一身現不可說頭,一頭現不可說舌,一舌現不可說聲,一聲住劫不可說;如一如是一切佛、一切身、一切頭、一切舌、一切聲,不可說劫恆常讚佛,劫猶可盡而歎佛功德無能盡。為什麼要把讚歎的器官也乘上去?因為前面乘的是所讚之德,這裡乘的是能讚之口——兩邊都乘到盡頭,還是不盡。落地:讀這一段不必想像那個畫面,只要記住結論——能說的一邊先耗盡,所說的一邊還在。
賢首如來與蓮華世界
「一微塵中能悉有,不可言說蓮華界,一一蓮華世界中,賢首如來不可說」——這是全頌唯一舉出佛名的地方。接著說乃至法界周遍,其中所有微塵,世界若成若住若壞其數無量;一微塵處無邊際,無量諸剎普來入,十方差別、剎海分布皆不可說。為什麼在這裡舉一個名字?因為通篇都是「不可說」,讀者容易失去著落;舉一佛名,是給無盡一個可以稱呼的臉。落地:無盡之中要有名有姓的一位,才不致變成空談。
一一剎中有如來
「一一剎中有如來,壽命劫數不可說」——然後是諸佛所行、甚深妙法、神通大力、無障礙智、入於毛孔、毛孔因緣、成就十力、覺悟菩提、入淨法界、獲深智藏,各各不可說。為什麼把「毛孔因緣」也列進佛德?因為前面講了那麼多毛孔容剎,總要交代那不是巧術,是因緣。誤讀是把這一串讀成佛德的清單而已。落地:這一段是把前面所有的『毛端奇觀』歸到佛的智與力上——奇觀有主,才不是幻術。
因德趣入:從了知數量到往詣諸佛
頌的最後一段轉到菩薩:種種數量不可說而一切悉了知,種種形量不可說而無不通達;種種三昧不可說而能經劫住其中,於不可說諸佛所所行清淨;得不可說無礙心,往詣十方、神力示現、所行無際、往詣眾剎、了達諸佛、精進勇猛、智慧通達,各各不可說。前面問的是『有多少』,這裡答的是『他都知道、都去得了』。澄觀科此段為因德趣入之自分行。誤讀是把它當成前文的縮寫。落地:一品講到最後,重點從『境有多大』轉成『人到得了』。
於法非行非不行
「於法非行非不行,入諸境界不可說」——這一句忽然不像前面任何一句。它在說什麼?前面全是『做了多少』,這裡卻說:於法不是有所行、也不是無所行。誤讀是把它讀成消極。它是把前面所有的行放回無所得上——若有一個『我在行』,這無盡的行門立刻變成無盡的負擔。接著方便智慧、真實智慧、神通智慧、念念示現各各不可說;於不可說諸佛法一一了知,而「能於一時證菩提,或種種時而證入」。落地:能一時證、也能種種時證——時間在這裡也鬆開了。
毛端佛剎皆往詣,通達一實
「毛端佛剎不可說,塵中佛剎不可說,如是佛剎皆往詣,見諸如來不可說」;「通達一實不可說,善入佛種不可說,諸佛國土不可說,悉能往詣成菩提」。為什麼在數的盡頭放上「一實」?因為一路乘上去的是「多」,而多的底子是一。誤讀是把「一實」讀成又一個數。落地:從一百洛叉數到不可說不可說轉,數的終點不是更大的數,是不再是數的那個一。
體性差別不可說,菩薩一切皆明見
全品末偈:「國土眾生及諸佛,體性差別不可說,如是三世無有邊,菩薩一切皆明見。」問題回到心王一開始的那一問——云何不可說。答案不在數列裡,在最後這五個字:皆明見。差別不可說,而見得明白;三世無有邊,而一時在目。誤讀是把「不可說」讀成『不可知』。落地:不可說是就語言說的,不是就見說的——這一品從頭到尾在做的一件事,就是把『說不出來』與『看不見』拆開。
承衍
本品之來意與科判,古德所繫各異,並錄不判。澄觀繫之於等覺深奧,以此下三品分明勝德無數、盡一切時、遍一切處,而以本品居首;法藏則明言此品「非答前問」,其來意在校量行德分齊,兼釋成前諸品所有數量;李通玄另立一軌,以自此品至如來出現品共八品同明佛果三業廣大自在,本品明如來心業廣大自在。數之總持亦異:澄觀就八十本云百二十四數,法藏就六十本云百二十轉,李通玄就八十本云百二十大數;頌數則澄觀判為百二十偈,法藏就六十本判為一百二十二頌半。洛叉俱胝所配漢數,澄觀作萬與億,李通玄作億與兆。四端各承其本、各依其軌,誌錄之而不判高下。
異譯方面,六十華嚴此品題作〈心王菩薩問阿僧祇品〉,多「心王菩薩問」五字;澄觀已誌其為人法雙舉之例。二本場景全同——同是心王發問、佛親許說、列數名、說長頌——而數名用字系統全異,六十本作「百千百千名一拘梨」,八十本作「一百洛叉為一俱胝」,故二本之對讀當取場景結構,不當以八十之數名逐字搜六十。
本品所立之『毛端容剎而不迫隘』『毛孔能受諸剎而諸剎不能遍毛孔』二義,經澄觀以稱性與不壞相二門釋之,《演義鈔》復以「由不即故有能所入,由不離故故得相入」申其緣起,遂為華嚴一宗相入之義的品內經據;澄觀於頌中因位善窮之首段科為帝網身土,亦以此品為重重無盡之喻所自出。至於本品數名列與小乘六十數之對照,澄觀、法藏、李通玄三家釋此品時皆援《俱舍論》所引《解脫經》六十數為反照,以顯本品之數非小乘所及——三家所援同而所判之教門各異,亦誌錄不判。
Why Should a Sūtra Stop and Talk About Arithmetic
A sūtra that speaks of the realm of a buddha suddenly gives over a whole chapter to setting out numbers — is this not off the subject? What Mind-King Bodhisattva asks about is precisely this matter: throughout the earlier chapters the Buddha has been saying, at every turn, “asaṃkhyeya” and “unspeakably unspeakable” — what do these words actually mean? In one breath he cites out ten of the number-names — asaṃkhyeya, measureless, boundless, unequalled, uncountable, unnameable, unthinkable, immeasurable, unspeakable, unspeakably unspeakable — and then asks only one thing: what are they? The misreading is to take this question for curiosity, as though the Buddha were about to teach a system of calculation. Chengguan glosses this by saying that the reason Mind-King is the one who comes to ask is that he “symbolizes that number is not apart from mind, and that number and non-number are alike unimpeded”; the Yanyi chao takes the two words “Mind-King” apart and explains them further: the mind is what gathers and holds all dharmas, most excellent among all things; the king is what governs the four seas, and is therefore most excellent. Fazang likewise takes Mind-King to “symbolize that the dharma of number depends upon mind.” The three point to one and the same place: number is not something outside; it is the graduation-mark of the measure of mind. Brought down to use: this chapter is not a lesson in arithmetic, it is the taking of numbers to measure the capacity of a mind.
Why Ask About Only Ten, and Not About the Hundred and More in Between
Mind-King cites ten names and asks about not one of the hundred and more rungs that precede them. Is this an omission? Chengguan glosses this by saying that it is a case of “raising the later so as to take in the earlier, thereby showing the inexhaustible” — ask about the last, and all that comes before is of itself contained within; and besides, what the sūtra says is “what the Tathāgatas expound,” so that in asking about these root numbers he has already taken in the “turned” forms and the rest along with them. The misreading is to suppose that the ten names are ten separate matters, when in fact they are ten graduation-marks along one single line, and every mark has a “turned” following after it, so that ten gates are in truth twenty names. Brought down to use: in reading a string of number-names one need not chase after each one; it is enough to see which way the string is going — and it goes the whole way toward ‘what cannot be said.’
Why Does the Buddha Answer in Person Instead of Having a Bodhisattva Answer
In the Avataṃsaka, for the most part it is bodhisattvas who speak, sustained by the Buddha’s spiritual power; in this chapter, however, the Buddha answers with his own mouth. Why so? The three commentators answer to one and the same point, each in his own words. Chengguan glosses this by saying, “the reason the Buddha answers in person is precisely to show that it is beyond thought,” and says further that this chapter states in summary the final virtues of the causal stages, and so the Buddha speaks it; Fazang holds that “this is a number of no limit, known to buddhas alone, and therefore the Buddha speaks it himself”; Li Tongxuan puts the question more bluntly still — why does the Tathāgata speak this chapter himself? Because “this dharma of number is vast, beyond the reach of the wisdom of the lower positions, and only a buddha can exhaust it.” The misreading is to treat who-speaks as a small matter of format. Who speaks is the first clue to how hard a thing is: by whose mouth it is spoken, there is marked out whose realm this dharma lies in. Brought down to use: when you see the Buddha speaking in person, set your reading strength to its heaviest.
One Hundred and Twenty-Three Rungs: What Multiplying by Itself Actually Means
The first sentence of the Buddha’s answer is “a hundred lakṣas make one koṭi,” and thereafter one single format is used throughout: such-and-such such-and-suches make one so-and-so. What kind of calculation is this? The key lies in “the number counted is equal to the number counting” — it is not a matter of adding on by tens, but of taking the previous number and multiplying it once by itself. So the second rung is koṭi times koṭi, the third is ayuduo times ayuduo, and thus for one hundred and twenty-three rungs. The misreading is to read it as a decimal table of large numbers. Li Tongxuan glosses this by saying that in this land there are three grades of calculation, lower, middle, and upper — “the lower changes by tens, the middle changes by ten-thousands, the upper changes by hundred-millions” — and that the present chapter uses the upper grade. Brought down to use: this string of numbers does not grow longer, it turns itself over whole at every step — and so within a very few steps there is no longer any language able to carry it.
Do These Sanskrit-Sounding Names Have to Be Explained One by One
Most of the number-names are transcriptions of sound: ayuduo, nayuta, pinpoluo, jinjieluo, piluoga, daluobutuo… A reader easily conceives the thought that each of these names must carry some profound sense. Chengguan here spares his successors a great deal of labor, judging outright that “among them many preserve the Sanskrit sound, but they are merely names of numbers and have no separate principle.” What Li Tongxuan supplies at this passage is likewise only fanqie phonetic notation, not an explanation of meaning. The misreading is to take number-names for doctrinal categories and try to fathom them. Brought down to use: the names are no more than house numbers; the place to spend one’s strength is the line they lay out, not the numbering on the doors.
Is a Lakṣa Ten Thousand or a Hundred Million: The Ancient Worthies Assign Them Differently
Of the one word “lakṣa,” Chengguan says “a lakṣa is ten thousand, a koṭi is a hundred million,” while Li Tongxuan says “one lakṣa means here one hundred million, one koṭi means here one trillion.” Which then is right? There is no need to hurry to a choice here — Chengguan has himself recorded one alternative assignment: if one follows the Abhidharmakośa in taking the lakṣa as a hundred million, then the koṭi answers to a trillion. Clearly there was in the Han lands no fixed rendering, and the assignment varied with the treatise one followed. The misreading is to suppose that the sūtra has one uniquely correct table of conversions. Brought down to use: a conversion table is there to give a person a feel for the thing, not to balance an account; once the feel has come, the table may be set down.
Why the Two Words “Once More” at the Very End
At the end of the series the sūtra says, “this again, unspeakably unspeakable unspeakably-unspeakables, makes one unspeakably unspeakable-turned.” Why do the words “this again” suddenly appear? Chengguan glosses this by saying that if the earlier format were followed and the terms cited out in full, four occurrences of “unspeakably unspeakable” would have to be written here in a row, and that the translator’s using two words to stand in place of one set is “the deftness of the translating.” The Yanyi chao restores one by one the four occurrences that were left out, and records that an earlier writer had faulted these two words as prolix. The misreading is to take it for a slip of the translator’s brush. Brought down to use: language can no longer bear the weight at this point — the translator’s abbreviation is itself the very thing this chapter is about.
The First Step of the Verses: Piling Up “Unspeakable” Once More
The prose section has already counted to the end; why do the verses count again? The verses open with “the unspeakable unspeakable fills full every unspeakable” — taking the number that was already the terminus and using it to fill another terminus. Chengguan divides the piling up of numbers in these verses into ten stages, and explains why it is “unspeakable” that is taken up rather than the final “unspeakably unspeakable-turned”: first, because it is the easier to say; second, because it stands for the number beyond the reach of speech. The misreading is to feel that the verses merely restate the prose. What the verses do is what the prose cannot do: the prose gives a ladder that has a topmost rung, and the verses take that topmost rung and make it the new first step. Brought down to use: true inexhaustibility does not lie in the highest rung of the ladder, but in the fact that ‘the highest rung can be multiplied once again.’
Lands Ground to Dust, Dust Holding Lands: Two Directions at Once
The verses go on: unspeakably many buddha-lands are all ground into dust motes, and within a single dust mote there are again unspeakably many lands; and this grinding happens wholly within a single thought, thought after thought in succession, so through unspeakably many kalpas without end; and the lands within the dust so ground are ground into dust again, which is harder still to speak of. Is this mere heaping up? Look at the direction and it becomes plain: on one side it is ground toward the small, on the other it contains toward the great, both directions travelled at once, so that the two can never be brought to meet. The misreading is to take it for literary exaggeration. Chengguan has already set out these steps one by one in his outline — the third, that all these unspeakably many lands are every one ground to dust; the fourth, that in every single dust mote there are unspeakably many lands; the fifth, that the lands within all those dust motes are ground to dust everywhere in one thought; the sixth, that the grinding thought after thought exhausts many kalpas; the seventh and eighth, that the dust so ground has again many lands, and those many lands are again ground to dust. Brought down to use: this is a calculation, not a figure of speech; every line is the multiplier of the line before it.
One Samantabhadra, and the Praise Cannot Be Finished
All that number was piled up in front — to what use is it to be put? The answer is in this verse: “taking these dust motes as the count of kalpas, one dust mote a hundred thousand unspeakables; through such kalpas to laud one Samantabhadra, none could exhaust the measure of his merit.” It turns out that the whole accumulation is only a denominator, set there to set off one thing — that to praise a single Samantabhadra is more than can be finished. Chengguan here records three stages in the breadth of what is counted: that the kalpas above do not suffice to praise one Samantabhadra; that within one dust mote there are many Samantabhadras; that in the dust motes filling the Dharma realm there are many of them everywhere. And he adds a hard saying: if one does not consider it with a mind that accords with the nature, the mind is confounded and runs wild. The misreading is to read it as a passage of praise. Brought down to use: this number is not for the head to reckon, it is for the measure of the mind to bear up under — chase it with thinking and there will only be confusion; put the mind out to the size of the Dharma realm and it can be received.
Unspeakably Many Samantabhadras at One Hair-Tip
“At the place of one fine hair-tip there are unspeakably many Samantabhadras” — how can they stand upon the point of a hair? The answer to this question does not lie in space, but in what the two words “hair-tip” are being used for. The sūtra goes straight on to say, “so likewise at every hair-tip, and thus on to filling the whole Dharma realm”: the hair-tip is the smallest unit and the Dharma realm is the largest compass, and what the two of them hold is the same in amount. The misreading is to picture a crowd packed into a picture. Brought down to use: what has to be changed here is not the imagination but the system of measurement — once it is granted that the smallest place too can hold the inexhaustible, the ruler of great-and-small has failed.
The Lands upon the Hair-Tip: Of a Kind and Not of a Kind, Pure and Adorned
The next three verses set out in detail the lands the hair-tip holds: the lands at the place of one hair-tip are measureless in number, and so it is at every hair-tip throughout the whole of space; those lands dwell there in measureless differences of kind, and there are unspeakably many lands not of a kind and unspeakably many lands of a kind; at every hair-tip there are pure lands and every sort of adornment and rare marvel. Why distinguish those of a kind from those not of a kind? Because if only “measureless” were said, the reader would easily read it as one indistinct mass; only when same and different are set apart is it known that within the measureless each is still distinctly itself. The misreading is to suppose that so many together can no longer be told apart. Brought down to use: inexhaustible does not mean chaotic — this is the proportion this chapter keeps hold of all the way through.
The Hair-Tip Expounds Buddha-Names, the Buddha-Body Manifests Pores
“At every one of those hair-tips are expounded unspeakably many names of buddhas, and under every single name there are Tathāgatas” — what comes forth from the hair-tip is not lands only but the names of buddhas, and under the names there are Tathāgatas; and upon the body of every one of those buddhas there appear again unspeakably many pores, and within the pores appear manifold colors and forms. Is this not going back on itself? Going back on itself is exactly the point: from hair-tip to buddha, and from the buddha-body back again to the pores, one round enclosed within another. Chengguan’s outline names this passage “within the dependent there appears the proper” — within the realm of the dependent recompense there appears the buddha-body of the proper recompense. The misreading is to read it as two matters set side by side. Brought down to use: there is no wall between the proper and the dependent, and this verse is the pulling down of the wall before your eyes.
Light, Lotus, Petal, Moon, Sun: Generated Layer upon Layer
From “unspeakably many pores all send forth light” the sūtra runs on through several verses in a row: within the light appear lotus flowers, within the flowers are manifold petals, within the petals appear colors and forms, within the colors appear petals again, within the petals is light, within the light are colors, within the colors appears light, within the light appears the moon, within the moon appears the moon again, within the moon appears light, within the light appears the sun, within the sun appear colors, within the colors appears light once more. Is this a display of skill? Chengguan’s outline names this passage “within the proper there appears the dependent” — upon the body of the proper recompense come forth the realms of the dependent, and upon those realms come forth realms again. The misreading is to try to count the layers through one by one. Brought down to use: this passage was never meant for you to count clearly; it is meant so that, at the point where the counting fails, you may loosen your grip on the habit of ‘taking them one at a time.’
The Lion Throne and the Wondrous Jewel Great as Sumeru
After the layer-upon-layer generating, the sūtra comes down upon two concrete things: within the light appear unspeakably many lion thrones, with unspeakably many ornaments and unspeakably many lights to each; wondrous colors within the light and pure light within the colors come forth from one another without ceasing, and within each sort of light there appears a wondrous jewel as great as Sumeru; the jewels appearing within each single jewel are again unspeakably many, and that one wondrous jewel like Sumeru manifests a multitude of lands. Why do a throne and a jewel suddenly appear? Because the throne is the place where the Dharma is spoken and the jewel is adornment at its height — if inexhaustibility only spins in the void, there is nowhere to set one’s foot; once there is a throne, someone is there speaking the Dharma. Brought down to use: here one may draw a breath of relief — at the end of endless mutual containment, there is someone speaking the Dharma.
Jewels Exhausted, Lands Ground to Dust, Dust-Marks Sending Forth Light
“Exhausting those Sumeru-like jewels with none remaining, so are all the lands they manifest” — take those jewels like Sumeru and use them up, and the lands they manifest are all thus; then take one land and grind it into dust motes, and the colors and forms of one dust mote are unspeakably many; the many lands become dust, every dust mote has its mark, and all the manifold dust-marks send forth light. Why should there be an “exhausting”? Because up to here everything has been generating, and now suddenly it says used up — which is to show that even when the examples that can be raised are exhausted, the matter shown is still not exhausted. The misreading is to suppose that “exhausted” means the closing of the passage. Brought down to use: the “exhausting” here is the handing over of all the material in hand, not the finishing of what there is to say.
Within the Light Buddhas Appear and Speak the Dharma; Hearing the Verses, Understanding Is Gained
Within the light sent forth by the dust-marks buddhas appear, and the dharmas those buddhas speak are unspeakably many, the wondrous verses within the dharmas unspeakably many, and those who hear the verses and gain understanding unspeakably many as well; and within those unspeakably many understandings, thought after thought, the true truths made manifest are unspeakably many, and there is shown besides how all the buddhas of the future constantly expound the Dharma without end; every single buddha-dharma is unspeakably many, and the manifold purities, the wondrous sounds, and the wheels of Dharma are each unspeakably many too. Why should ‘those who understood’ also be counted in? Because if the Dharma has no one who gains understanding of it, the inexhaustible is nothing but scenery. Chengguan’s outline names this “within the dependent there appears the proper, speaking the Dharma.” Brought down to use: this passage rewrites “inexhaustible” from a landscape into a teaching — those who speak are unspeakably many, and those who understand are unspeakably many too.
The Sūtras within the Wheel of Dharma, and the Dharma-Gates within the Sūtras
Next comes the most orderly set of derivations in the whole chapter: within every wheel of Dharma unspeakably many sūtras are expounded; within every sūtra unspeakably many dharma-gates are distinguished; within every dharma-gate unspeakably many dharmas are again spoken; within every dharma unspeakably many sentient beings are tamed. The four layers come down the whole way to “taming sentient beings.” Is this heaping up again? See where it comes to rest and you will know it is not: the first three layers are the unfolding of the Dharma, and the fourth is the deliverance of persons. The misreading is to see only the number of layers. Brought down to use: however many dharma-gates are opened, what fills the last square is that someone has been tamed by them — this is the scale of this chapter, and what it weighs is not quantity but benefit.
Dwelling at One Hair-Tip for Unspeakably Many Kalpas
“Or again, at the place of one hair-tip, constantly dwelling for unspeakably many kalpas” — what came before spoke of containment in space, and here it suddenly speaks of abiding in time: at one hair-tip he abides for unspeakably many kalpas, and so it is at all the other hair-tips. Why add this line? Because if only space were spoken of, it would be easily read as a motionless picture. Chengguan’s outline names this single verse “making clear the constant abiding in what is manifested.” The misreading is to take it for a repetition of what has gone before. Brought down to use: the inexhaustible is not a wonder lasting an instant, it is something one can settle into — and only what is settled into long can be worked with.
The Mind Unobstructed, Emanated Buddhas Emanating Again
Once settled in, what is done? “His mind unobstructed, unspeakably many; the buddhas he emanates, unspeakably many; and every single emanated Tathāgata manifests emanations again, unspeakably many” — the buddhas emanated can emanate once more. Then come the dharma-body, the divided bodies, the adornments, the going to the ten directions, the coursing everywhere through the lands, the observing of sentient beings, the purifying of sentient beings, the taming of sentient beings, set out one after another; then adornments, spiritual powers, masteries, spiritual transformations; then the penetrations, the realms, the sustaining power, and the abiding in the world. Chengguan’s outline names this whole passage “making clear the taming of beings in mastery.” The misreading is to take these words for synonyms said over again. They have in fact their sequence: only when there is an unobstructed mind are there emanations; only when there is an emanated body are there the coursing, the observing, the purifying, and the taming. Brought down to use: spiritual power in this chapter is never a performance, it is for catching people up one by one.
Pure Real Marks, and That One Word “Settled”
The second round of derivation is of nearly the same shape as the first, except that it has one square more: within every dharma-gate dharmas are again spoken, within every dharma “all that is settled” is unspeakably many, and within every settled thing the sentient beings tamed are unspeakably many. What is this added “settled”? It is the stroke that fixes the matter where the Dharma has been spoken all the way through — without this square, however many dharma-gates there are, it is only speaking of the Dharma. Then are listed dharmas of a kind, minds of a kind, dharmas not of a kind, minds not of a kind, faculties not of a kind, and speech not of a kind, taming sentient beings thought after thought in every place of practice. The misreading is to take the two rounds of derivation for a repetition of the brush. Brought down to use: the difference between the two rounds lies in that one word “settled” — only what the Dharma can settle can tame a person.
The Bodhisattva Can Set It Out Distinctly, and the Clever Reckoner Cannot Make It Out
At this point in the chapter a line of contrast is suddenly inserted: “the bodhisattva is able to set them all out distinctly, and the clever reckoners can none of them make them out.” Why bring in the men of calculation for comparison? Because everything up to here has been number, and the reader can hardly help supposing this to be a matter that can be reckoned out. The sūtra draws a line here: the man skilled at calculation cannot make it out, whereas the bodhisattva can set out each one distinctly. It goes straight on to say that at the place of one hair-tip there are great lands and small lands, defiled and pure lands, coarse and fine lands, all such things unspeakably many, and yet “every one is clearly made out and set apart.” The misreading is to take the bodhisattva’s knowing for a faster reckoning. Brought down to use: that is no superiority of computing power, it is a wholly different kind of knowing — reckoning goes through them one by one, while clear seeing has them all at once before the eye.
Lands as Many as Dust Motes Gathered on a Hair-Tip, and the Hair-Tip Grows No Larger
“Taking one land and grinding it to dust, those dust motes are measureless, unspeakably many; boundless lands as many as those dust motes come together and gather upon one hair-tip” — and then the most important line in the whole chapter: “gathered on the hair-tip, they are not pressed for room; it does not make the hair-tip any larger, and yet those lands do all come and gather.” Not crowded, not swollen, and yet they really have all come. How can this be? Chengguan glosses this by saying that it is “the one hair that accords with the nature of dharmas” and therefore receives many lands with nothing left outside, and “the many lands whose marks are not destroyed” and therefore each abides in its own mark; the Yanyi chao takes the sense of dependent arising further: because they are not identical, there is that which enters and that which is entered; because they are not apart, mutual entering is obtained. The sūtra itself adds a line: the lands within it keep their shapes and marks as they were, without confusion, and as one land does not disorder the rest, so it is with all lands. The misreading is to imagine it as a compression of space. Brought down to use: on the one side, according with the nature, therefore nothing outside; on the other, marks not destroyed, therefore distinct — when the Huayan speaks of mutual entering, what it speaks of has always been these two statements holding good at once.
Space Filled with Hair-Tips, and the Bodhisattva Can Speak Them in One Thought
“The realm of space is without bound; spread hair-tips throughout it and fill it full; the lands upon such hair-tips the bodhisattva can speak them all in one thought.” Before, it was that they can be held; here, it is that they can be spoken. Why add “can speak them all in one thought”? Because if it were only said that the realm is inexhaustible while no one is able to speak it, this chapter would not have answered Mind-King’s question — what Mind-King asked was precisely “what are they?” The misreading is to read this line as praise. Brought down to use: the inexhaustible realm needs someone standing beside it able to speak it, and only then has this chapter finished answering the question.
The Pore Can Receive the Lands, and the Lands Cannot Fill the Pore
“Within one fine pore, unspeakably many lands enter in due order; the pore is able to receive those lands, and those lands are not able to fill that pore.” At first sight the statement looks unbalanced: if they can be held, why can they not fill it? What Chengguan explains as “the one hair that accords with the nature of dharmas” is just what resolves this place — of the hair, the sense of according with the nature is taken, and so it is like the nature of dharmas with nothing outside it; of the lands, the sense of marks not destroyed is taken, and so they cannot fill that hair which has nothing outside it. It goes on to say that the kalpas of the entering and the kalpas of the receiving are unspeakably many, and that at the time of their standing ranged and abiding, none can speak all the kalpas. The misreading is to read “cannot fill” as the lands being small and the hair large. Brought down to use: it is not a difference of great and small, it is a difference of nature and mark — this line is the finest square in the chapter, and only when it is understood do all the endless mutual containments before it cease to be exaggeration.
After the Taking In and the Abiding: Everything from Skillful Means to Knowing Sentient Beings
Once he has settled in, what is done? The sūtra sets out forty paired clauses one after another: the skillful means at the time of entering, what is done after entering, the clarity of the faculty of mind, the ranging through the quarters, valorous vigor, mastery in spiritual transformation, all his thinking, all his great vows, all his realms, his penetration of everything; the purity of the three karmas of body, speech, and mind, the purity of faith and understanding, the purity of wondrous knowledge and wondrous wisdom; the fathoming of the real marks of things, the cutting off of doubts, the leaving behind of birth-and-death, the ascending to the position of a noble one, the profound samādhis, the fathoming of all; and then it comes down upon sentient beings — knowing the bodies of sentient beings, what their minds delight in, their karmic fruits, their understandings, their classes, their lineages, the bodies they receive, their places of birth, their being born, their having been born, their comprehension, their courses, their speech, and the karma they do. Chengguan’s outline names this “the practice of vigor in the three karmas” and “the practice of gathering in beings according to their vessels.” Why list it out so finely? Because if “unspeakable” does not come down upon one matter and then another, it is an empty word. The misreading is to skim quickly through this long stretch. Brought down to use: this passage takes the inexhaustible apart into a list of items — and the last fourteen items in the list are all ‘knowing what about sentient beings.’
The Ten Perfections of Great Compassion
The longest stretch begins from “the bodhisattva, with great compassion such as this, benefits all the worlds”: manifesting his body everywhere, entering the buddha-lands, seeing the bodhisattvas, giving rise to wisdom, asking after the true Dharma, spreading and setting forth the Buddha’s teaching; manifesting bodies and going to lands, showing forth spiritual penetrations, reaching everywhere through the ten directions, dividing his body and drawing near; making offering-implements, pure jewels, lotuses fine and rare, garlands of the most excellent fragrance, and making offerings to the Tathāgatas; pure faith, the most excellent understanding, surpassing aspiration and delight, reverence for the buddhas; and then the ten perfections — practising giving, giving to all who ask, giving away everything; purity in the precepts, purity of thought; the accomplishing of the forbearances, the forbearance of the non-arising of dharmas; rousing great vigor, the non-retrogressive mind, the unshakable mind; all the treasuries of concentration, being still within concentration, fathoming the meditations; penetration in wisdom, mastery in samādhi, fathoming the dharmas, clearly seeing the buddhas… and so on to the nets of light manifesting colors and illumining the buddha-lands everywhere, to the purity of the three karmas, the accomplishing of the jewel of wisdom, and the deep entering of the Dharma realm, to the lauding of the buddhas and the praise without end, to the three times being like space and the accomplishing of awakening, to the wide expounding of the true Dharma and the pity taken upon the world. Chengguan here sets out in his outline the practice of going to the quarters and making offerings to the buddhas, the practice of widely cultivating the ten perfections, the practice of mastery in ranging the lands, the practice of taming sentient beings, the practice of deep purity in the three karmas, and the practice of mastery in vow and wisdom. The misreading is to be daunted by the length and read it lightly. Brought down to use: this stretch is the one place in the whole chapter where “unspeakable” is converted, all of it, into the daily work of a bodhisattva — one line to a matter, and every one of them can be done.
Kalpas May Be Exhausted, Virtue Cannot
After the long stretch the sūtra draws to a close with one verse: “through unspeakably many of all the kalpas, praising unspeakably many merits: unspeakably many kalpas may yet be exhausted, but unspeakably much virtue cannot be exhausted.” Here appears the first “may be exhausted” in the whole chapter. Why speak suddenly of what may be exhausted? Because there must be something exhaustible for the inexhaustible to be set off against. Chengguan’s outline names this one verse “concluding that the virtues are inexhaustible.” The misreading is to take “the kalpas may yet be exhausted” as the sūtra contradicting itself. Brought down to use: however long time is, it is still a quantity, and merit is not a quantity — this line divides the two for the first time.
Tongues That Praise the Buddha: One Body, One Head, One Tongue, One Voice
Next the matter is pressed to its extreme: unspeakably many Tathāgatas, unspeakably many tongues, praising the Buddha’s unspeakably many virtues, and through unspeakably many kalpas the praise still cannot be finished; all the sentient beings of the ten directions accomplish right awakening at one and the same time, and among them one buddha can manifest everywhere unspeakably many bodies of every kind; and of these unspeakably many, one body manifests unspeakably many heads, one head manifests unspeakably many tongues, one tongue manifests unspeakably many voices, and one voice abides through unspeakably many kalpas; and as with one, so with all buddhas, all bodies, all heads, all tongues, all voices, praising the Buddha constantly through unspeakably many kalpas — the kalpas may yet be exhausted, and the praising of the Buddha’s merit can by none be exhausted. Why should the organs of praising also be multiplied? Because what was multiplied before was the virtue praised, and what is multiplied here is the mouth that praises — both sides multiplied to their limit, and still there is no exhausting. Brought down to use: in reading this passage there is no need to picture the scene; it is enough to keep the conclusion — the side that can speak runs out first, and the side that is spoken of is still there.
The Tathāgata Chief in Goodness and the Lotus Worlds
“Within one dust mote there can be contained entirely unspeakably many lotus worlds, and within every single lotus world the Tathāgatas Chief in Goodness are unspeakably many” — this is the one place in the whole set of verses where the name of a buddha is given. It goes on to say that reaching everywhere through the Dharma realm, among all the dust motes therein, the worlds forming, abiding, or decaying are measureless in number; that the place of one dust mote is without bound, that measureless lands all come and enter it, and that the differences of the ten directions and the spread of the ocean of lands are alike unspeakable. Why give a name at this point? Because everything through the chapter is “unspeakable,” and the reader easily loses his footing; the raising of one buddha-name gives the inexhaustible a face that can be addressed. Brought down to use: within the inexhaustible there must be one who has a name, or it turns into empty talk.
Within Every Single Land There Is a Tathāgata
“Within every single land there is a Tathāgata, the kalpas of whose life-span are unspeakably many” — and then the buddhas’ practices, the profound and wondrous dharmas, the great strength of spiritual penetration, the unobstructed wisdom, the entering into pores, the causes and conditions of the pores, the accomplishing of the ten powers, the awakening to bodhi, the entering into the pure Dharma realm, and the gaining of the profound treasury of wisdom, each of them unspeakably many. Why should “the causes and conditions of the pores” be listed among the virtues of a buddha? Because after so much has been said about pores holding lands, some account must be given that this is not a clever trick but a matter of causes and conditions. The misreading is to read this string as no more than a list of buddha-virtues. Brought down to use: this passage brings all the ‘wonders of the hair-tip’ that went before home to the wisdom and the power of a buddha — a wonder that has an owner is not a conjuring trick.
Entering by the Virtues of the Cause: From Knowing the Numbers to Going to the Buddhas
The last stretch of the verses turns to the bodhisattva: the manifold quantities are unspeakably many and he knows them all; the manifold measures of shape are unspeakably many and there is none he does not penetrate; the manifold samādhis are unspeakably many and he can abide within them through kalpas; and in the presence of unspeakably many buddhas his practice is pure. He gains unspeakably many unobstructed minds; and the going to the ten directions, the showing forth by spiritual power, the practice without bound, the going to the manifold lands, the fathoming of the buddhas, the vigor and valor, and the penetration of wisdom are each unspeakably many. Before, what was asked was ‘how many’; here what is answered is ‘he knows them all, and he can get to them all.’ Chengguan’s outline names this passage the practice of one’s own portion in entering by the virtues of the cause. The misreading is to take it for an abridgement of what has gone before. Brought down to use: at the end of the chapter the weight shifts from ‘how large the realm is’ to ‘the person can get there.’
Neither Practising nor Not Practising with Regard to Dharmas
“With regard to dharmas neither practising nor not practising, the realms he enters unspeakably many” — this line is suddenly unlike any line before it. What is it saying? Everything before has been ‘how much has been done,’ and here it says: with regard to dharmas it is not that there is something practised, nor that there is nothing practised. The misreading is to read this as a withdrawal. It is the setting of all the practice before it back upon the ground of nothing attained — for if there were an ‘I who am practising,’ these inexhaustible gates of practice would at once become an inexhaustible burden. Then the wisdom of skillful means, the wisdom of the real, the wisdom of spiritual penetration, and the manifesting thought after thought are each unspeakably many; and of unspeakably many buddha-dharmas he knows each one, unspeakably many, and yet “he can realize awakening at one time, or enter into realization at manifold times.” Brought down to use: he can realize it at one time and he can realize it at manifold times — time too is loosened here.
Going to All the Buddha-Lands of the Hair-Tip, Penetrating the One Real
“The buddha-lands of the hair-tip unspeakably many, the buddha-lands within the dust unspeakably many; to all such buddha-lands he goes, seeing the Tathāgatas unspeakably many”; “penetrating the one real, unspeakably many; well entering the buddha-lineage, unspeakably many; the lands of the buddhas unspeakably many, and to all of them he can go and accomplish awakening.” Why set “the one real” at the end of the counting? Because what has been multiplied all the way up is the many, and the ground of the many is the one. The misreading is to read “the one real” as yet another number. Brought down to use: counting from a hundred lakṣas to the unspeakably unspeakable-turned, the terminus of number is not a larger number, it is that one which is no longer a number.
The Differences of Substance Cannot Be Spoken, and the Bodhisattva Sees Them All with Clarity
The last verse of the chapter: “lands, sentient beings, and all the buddhas — the differences of their very substance cannot be spoken; the three times such as these are without bound, and the bodhisattva sees them all with clarity.” The question returns to the one Mind-King asked at the beginning — what is the unspeakable? The answer is not in the series of numbers, it is in these last words: sees them all with clarity. The differences cannot be spoken, and yet they are seen plainly; the three times are without bound, and yet they are all at once before the eye. The misreading is to read “cannot be spoken” as ‘cannot be known.’ Brought down to use: unspeakable is said with respect to language, not with respect to seeing — and the one thing this chapter has been doing from beginning to end is to pull ‘cannot be said’ apart from ‘cannot be seen.’
Lineage
The reason for this chapter’s coming and its place in the outline are tied differently by each of the ancient worthies, and they are recorded here without adjudication. Chengguan ties it to the profundity of the stage of equal awakening, taking the three chapters from here on as setting forth respectively the numberlessness of surpassing virtue, the exhausting of all time, and the pervading of all places, with this chapter standing first; Fazang states plainly that this chapter is “not an answer to the earlier question,” its reason for coming lying in the comparing of the measure of the virtues of practice, and in explaining as well the quantities found in all the earlier chapters; Li Tongxuan sets up another track, taking the eight chapters from this one to the Chapter on the Appearance of the Tathāgata as together setting forth the vastness and mastery of the three karmas of the fruit of buddhahood, this chapter setting forth the vastness and mastery of the Tathāgata’s karma of mind. The totals of the numbers differ as well: Chengguan, going by the eighty-fascicle text, says a hundred and twenty-four numbers; Fazang, going by the sixty-fascicle text, says a hundred and twenty turns; Li Tongxuan, going by the eighty-fascicle text, says a hundred and twenty great numbers. As for the count of the verses, Chengguan judges a hundred and twenty verses, while Fazang, going by the sixty-fascicle text, judges a hundred and twenty-two and a half. For the Chinese numbers assigned to the lakṣa and the koṭi, Chengguan gives ten thousand and a hundred million, and Li Tongxuan a hundred million and a trillion. Each of the four items follows its own text and its own track; they are recorded and not adjudicated.
As to the parallel translations, the sixty-fascicle Avataṃsaka titles this chapter “The Chapter on Mind-King Bodhisattva’s Question about the Asaṃkhyeya,” with the five words “Mind-King Bodhisattva’s Question” in addition; Chengguan has already recorded this as a case of raising both the person and the dharma. The scene in the two texts is entirely the same — Mind-King asks, the Buddha assents in person, the number-names are listed, the long verses are spoken — while the systems of graphs used for the number-names are wholly different, the sixty-fascicle text reading “a hundred thousand hundred thousands are named one juli” and the eighty-fascicle text “a hundred lakṣas make one koṭi”; the reading of the two texts against each other should therefore be taken by the structure of the scene, and the number-names of the eighty ought not to be searched for graph by graph in the sixty.
The two senses this chapter establishes — that a hair-tip holds lands without being pressed for room, and that a pore can receive the lands while the lands cannot fill the pore — were explained by Chengguan through the two gates of according with the nature and of marks not destroyed, and the Yanyi chao set out their dependent arising further with “because they are not identical, there is that which enters and that which is entered; because they are not apart, mutual entering is obtained”; they thus became the scriptural ground within this chapter for the Huayan school’s doctrine of mutual entering. Chengguan’s outline also names the opening stretch of the verses on the thorough exhausting of the causal position as the bodies and lands of Indra’s net, so that this chapter is likewise the source of the figure for endless mutual containment. As for the setting of this chapter’s series of number-names against the sixty numbers of the Lesser Vehicle, Chengguan, Fazang, and Li Tongxuan all alike, in explaining this chapter, cite the sixty numbers of the Sūtra of Liberation quoted in the Abhidharmakośa as the foil, so as to show that the numbers of this chapter are beyond the reach of the Lesser Vehicle — the three cite the same thing while each judges its own gate of teaching, and this too is recorded without adjudication.
品三十一 壽量品The Span of Life
全文五層 →Full five layers →這一品在問什麼——壽與量
佛有多長的壽命?這問題聽起來像在問年歲,其實不是。澄觀釋這一品的名字,只用兩句話就把方向撥正了:「壽謂報命,量即分限。」壽,是這一期受報之命;量,是分限——是被劃出來的界線。他接著說,這是「染淨土之報壽,隨機見之分限」,用它來顯出「無盡之命、無限之量」。
要排掉一個常見的誤讀:這一品不是說佛的壽命有長有短,也不是說極樂的佛比娑婆的佛活得久。長短是眾生所見的分限,不是佛自身的分限。法藏釋六十本的品名說得更貼近字面:往業所引的報果叫壽,任持色心不斷叫命。可他隨即在宗趣門裡分出佛命三義——約德、就實、就權:就實則命根無盡、盡於未來;就權才是「隨機所感現脩短」。李通玄一句話收得最狠:如來實無長短壽命,性無生滅故。
所以讀這一品,眼睛要放在「量」字上,不放在「壽」字上。它要教的是:你所見的時間刻度,本身就是你所在位置的標記。
為什麼是心王菩薩來說
這一品全文只有一位說法者,心王菩薩摩訶薩,於大眾會中告諸菩薩。沒有如來加持,沒有請問,沒有重頌——一人獨白到底。為什麼是他?
三家古德各給了一個理由,方向一致而入手不同。澄觀說:「以領旨故,佛壽自在故」——心王能領佛旨,而佛壽本自在,故以他說之。法藏說:心王菩薩說者,「顯世識自在故,有劫數也」——世間的時劫本是識所安立,識若自在,劫數之長短便隨之而轉。李通玄則從表法直取:以心王菩薩說者,明佛壽量以心為體,以心王表命自在故。
排一個誤解:這裡不是說『心王菩薩比別人懂壽命』,而是說法者本身就是義理的一部分。時劫的伸縮不由外物決定,由心決定;所以講時劫伸縮的這一品,交給名為「心王」的菩薩來說。落到修行上,這句話的分量是:你覺得日子長還是短,從來不是日曆的事。
第一重:娑婆一劫,是極樂的一晝夜
第一句就把尺度掀了:「此娑婆世界釋迦牟尼佛剎一劫,於極樂世界阿彌陀佛剎為一日一夜」我們這個堪忍世界的一整劫——長到眾生數不清、佛經要用比喻才說得動的一段時間——在極樂世界那裡,只是天亮到天黑再到天亮。
要小心一個誤讀:這不是說極樂的人『過得慢』。劫與日夜是同一段時間在兩處的不同刻度,不是同一刻度下的不同長度。晉譯六十本此處作「安樂世界」,與八十本「極樂世界」同指阿彌陀佛剎,是譯名之異,誌之。
法藏在此設了一問:安樂等世界拿什麼當晝夜?他出二釋:一是以蓮花的開與合分晝夜,一開一合便當娑婆一劫;二是把娑婆一劫中所有的日夜總數拿來,以此數再數一劫為一日夜。這是疏家所設的算例,經文並無此文,讀時要記得繫在法藏名下。
落地處在這裡:同一段光陰,在不同的心量裡是不同的單位。你覺得漫長難捱的一段人生,換一個位置看,可能還不到一個白天。
第二重:極樂一劫,是袈裟幢的一晝夜
「極樂世界一劫,於袈裟幢世界金剛堅佛剎為一日一夜」第一重已經讓人吃驚,第二重把吃驚本身再壓縮一次:剛才那個作為『一晝夜』的極樂世界,它自己的一整劫,到袈裟幢世界又只是一晝夜。
這裡要排掉的誤解是『加法』。十重不是把時間一段段接起來,是一層層作為底數再乘上去。所以澄觀說「以劫為日,未歷十重,則劫不可說」——還沒走完十重,數目已經到了說不出來的地步。
袈裟幢,是以袈裟為幢幡而立名的佛土;佛號金剛堅,堅固不壞之義。六十本此重作「聖服幢世界金剛佛」,界名佛名擇字皆異而所指一,並錄不判。
落地處:修行人最容易在第一重就滿足——『原來還有比我大得多的尺度』。這一品不許你停在第一重。它要你在剛剛被震動之處,再被震動一次。
第三重:袈裟幢一劫,是不退轉音聲輪的一晝夜
「袈裟幢世界一劫,於不退轉音聲輪世界善勝光明蓮華開敷佛剎為一日一夜」
這一重的界名值得停一下:不退轉音聲輪。輪,是轉而不停;音聲之輪不退轉,說的是這個佛土中法音相續、無有斷絕。佛號善勝光明蓮華開敷——以蓮華之開敷表法之顯了。六十本作「善樂光明清淨開敷佛」,「善勝」與「善樂」、「蓮華」與「清淨」互出,誌錄不判。
要排的誤讀是:這些名字不是裝飾。經文在同一句式裡換的只有兩樣東西——世界名與佛名——名字就是這一重的全部內容。既然句式恆定,讀者的注意力自然被逼到名相所表之德上去。
落地處:一個法音不退轉的地方,它的一晝夜要抵前一重的整整一劫。這在說:法相續不斷之處,時間才真正『密』得起來。斷斷續續的修行,過的是稀薄的時間。
第四重:不退轉音聲輪一劫,是離垢的一晝夜
「不退轉音聲輪世界一劫,於離垢世界法幢佛剎為一日一夜」
離垢,垢染已離;佛號法幢,以法為幢,高建而眾所歸仰。這一重的界名佛名,八十本與六十本完全相同——十重之中,界名佛名俱同者唯第四、第五兩重,餘皆有異(第八重佛名六十作「一切明光明」、八十作「一切神通光明」)。這是對勘上一個乾淨的事實,誌之。
要排的誤解是:讀到這裡容易生出『愈後面愈高級』的階級想像。但澄觀在宗趣門已先下了一個限:就同教說,這是「積劣之勝」;若就別教,則「修短圓融」——長短本身就是圓融的,不是排成一列的高低。法藏「顯次第」門三判亦然:約漸教、約同教、約別教三種讀法各成一軌,並錄不判。
落地處:「離垢」被安在中段,不在末位。乾淨不是終點,只是能進一步的條件。
第五重:離垢一劫,是善燈的一晝夜
「離垢世界一劫,於善燈世界師子佛剎為一日一夜」
善燈——燈者破暗;師子佛——師子吼者無畏說法。此重界名佛名亦是兩本全同。
到第五重,正好走完一半。這裡要排一個心理上的誤讀:讀者往往在此開始『麻木』,覺得句子在重複。可經文的重複正是它的方法。澄觀把這一整段判為「初別舉十剎相望」——相望二字是眼目:不是十個世界各自被介紹,是一個挨一個地互相對看,每一次對看都把上一次的結果整個吞掉。麻木恰恰是被吞掉的感覺尚未到位。
落地處:燈破一室之暗,師子吼破一眾之疑。這一重把『破暗』放在中途,是說黑暗不是一次破盡的——破了一層,才看得見下一層的暗。
第六重:善燈一劫,是妙光明的一晝夜
「善燈世界一劫,於妙光明世界光明藏佛剎為一日一夜」
從善燈到妙光明,從一燈到光明之藏:燈是一處之明,藏是含攝無盡之明。六十本此重作「善光明世界盧舍那藏佛」——以盧舍那為佛名,八十本作「光明藏」,正是盧舍那之義譯所在。兩本互出,誌錄不判。
要排的誤讀是把「光明」讀成譬喻性的形容。在這一品的體例裡,佛名即是這一重時劫之所以更密的理由:光明成藏之處,一晝夜自然抵得住前一重的一劫。
落地處:修行上的「燈」是一次一次點的,「藏」是點到不必再點。從燈到藏的距離,就是一劫到一日的距離。
第七重:妙光明一劫,是難超過的一晝夜
「妙光明世界一劫,於難超過世界法光明蓮華開敷佛剎為一日一夜」
界名忽然變了口氣:難超過。前六重的名字都在說這個佛土『是什麼』,這一個在說它『難以被越過』。佛號法光明蓮華開敷,法之光明如蓮華開敷而顯。六十本作「超出世界法光明清淨開敷蓮華佛」——六十本從「超出」立名,八十本從「難超過」立名,語勢一正一反,並錄不判。
要排的誤解:「難超過」不等於『不可超過』。經文緊接著仍有第八、第九重,可見仍被超過。它標的是接近極處時的坡度——愈近極位,每一重的跨越愈難。
落地處:修行到後段,長進看起來變慢了,其實是刻度變密了。慢,是因為你在一個一晝夜抵前一劫的地方。
第八重:難超過一劫,是莊嚴慧的一晝夜
「難超過世界一劫,於莊嚴慧世界一切神通光明佛剎為一日一夜」
莊嚴慧——以慧為莊嚴,不以他物為飾;佛號一切神通光明。六十本界名亦作「莊嚴慧」,全同;佛名作「一切明光明佛」,與八十本「一切神通光明」互出。
這一重要教的是位次上的一件事:到了名為「慧」的世界,前面所有的光明、破暗、開敷才有所歸。要排的誤解是把神通讀成異能——經文把神通與光明連為一名,安在「莊嚴慧」的世界裡,其義自明:神通是慧的光,不是慧以外的本事。
落地處:一個人若把神異當成進境的指標,這一重會令他難堪——連神通都只是慧的莊嚴之一。
第九重:莊嚴慧一劫,是鏡光明的一晝夜
「莊嚴慧世界一劫,於鏡光明世界月智佛剎為一日一夜」
十重相望的最後一組具名者。鏡光明——鏡之為明,不是自己發光,是照而現物;佛號月智,月之智清涼而遍映。六十本作「覺月佛」,與八十本「月智」互出,誌錄不判。
這裡有一個要緊的排誤:走了九重,愈往後名字愈不像『更強』,反而愈像『更靜』——從燈、從光明藏,到鏡、到月。愈近極位,愈不是加法而是減法:鏡不自明,月不自熱。這與澄觀所說「修短圓融」的別教讀法相應——到極處不是最長,是長短不再對立。
落地處:修行的高處不長成一個更亮的東西,長成一面更乾淨的鏡子。
舉略顯廣:如是次第,乃至過百萬阿僧祇世界
具名者到第九重就停了。經文接著說:「佛子!如是次第,乃至過百萬阿僧祇世界,最後世界一劫,於勝蓮華世界賢勝佛剎為一日一夜」澄觀判此為「舉略顯廣」——舉出十重之略,顯出百萬阿僧祇之廣。
要排的誤讀是以為經文『省略了』。它不是省略,是移交:前十重是讓你親手把尺度換算九次,換到手感成立;手感一成立,「百萬阿僧祇」四字才真正有重量。澄觀說「且如以劫為日,未歷十重,則劫不可說」,正是這個次序——不先歷十重,說再大的數也只是數字。法藏亦推此算:至最後世界之一劫,回望最初世界,當是不可說不可說劫。
還要排一個字面的事:六十本作「乃至百萬阿僧祇世界」,八十本多一「過」字,作「乃至過百萬阿僧祇世界」,並錄不判。
落地處:信心不是被大數字說服的,是被親手換算過的比例說服的。
舉玄極:普賢菩薩及諸同行大菩薩等充滿其中
全品最後一句,忽然不說時間,改說人:「普賢菩薩及諸同行大菩薩等充滿其中。」澄觀判此為「舉其玄極」,並釋:「舉普賢等充滿,明極位所居。」
為什麼校量到第十重就停?澄觀給的理由是「沈百萬僧祇則最後之剎,已隣剎海平等故」。法藏說:「至賢首剎已後,則剎海平等,無有優劣」——再往上沒有『更長』可比,因為刻度本身消失了。所以第十重不是最大的一級,是最後一級:過此即入平等。法藏又釋何以獨舉普賢:以望下最極故;以普賢為量,望上猶在數中故不說。
要排的誤解:這句不是在給極樂淨土之外再添一個更好的去處。經文以『誰住在那裡』代替『那裡有多長』,是把量的問題收在人上——極位不是一段更長的時間,是一種行。六十本作「普賢菩薩等諸大菩薩充滿其中」,八十本明出「同行」二字,誌錄不判。
落地處:一品講盡了時劫的深不可測,末了只給你一個可以效法的東西——普賢之行。時間你追不上,行你今天就能起。
承衍
本品之義,前後有繫。澄觀判其來意,繫於前一品:前品〈阿僧祇品〉「上品彰其實德」,此品則辨隨機所見之分限——一實一機,相形而顯。法藏同判此近意,並把後一品也繫上:〈住處品〉別辨菩薩法用,約機明住處差別;佛德言畢,次言菩薩之所住。李通玄則只取次第之便:前品既是阿僧祇,此即合便有壽量。三家所繫不同,並錄不判。
法藏又出一遠意:此品為遠答普光明殿十頂之問,以十重相望各為終極、得名為頂。他並誌古釋以此品答佛壽命之問,而自云「文勢不順」,理由是壽命問在十地等前,不合答在此處——古德自有之判語,逐字誌之,不加評騭。
本品之別行單本,古德兩處誌之:澄觀云別行經名無邊佛土,經即以處顯人;法藏云玄奘法師別翻一卷,名顯無邊佛土經,是此品也,並記《大佛名經》中亦說唯佛充滿此諸世界。本編誌錄其名,未取為校本。
至於華嚴宗之六相、十玄,本品經文並無直文;世親《十地經論》為十地品專釋,亦不涉此品——皆據實標闕,不以他品之文充之。這一品所留下的,是一個極樸素而極難忘的算法:一劫作一日,十重相望,過此則剎海平等。
What This Chapter Is Asking — Life, and Measure
How long is the Buddha's life? The question sounds as though it were asking after years, but it is not. Chengguan, explaining the name of this chapter, sets the direction straight in two clauses: “life means the life of recompense; measure is the allotted bound.” Life is the life received as recompense within one span; measure is the allotted bound — the line that has been drawn. He goes on to say that this is “the life of recompense in a defiled or a pure land, the allotted bound seen according to capacity,” and that it is used to display “the life without end, the measure without limit.”
One common misreading must be cleared away: this chapter is not saying that the Buddha's life is long in one place and short in another, nor that the buddha of Ultimate Bliss lives longer than the buddha of the Sahā world. Length and shortness are the bound allotted to what sentient beings see; they are not a bound upon the Buddha himself. Fazang, explaining the name of the chapter in the sixty-fascicle text, keeps closer to the letter: the fruit of recompense drawn on by past deeds is called life, and the holding on of form and mind without break is called the living. Yet under the gate of tenet and aim he at once divides the buddhas' life into three senses — with respect to virtue, with respect to the real, with respect to the provisional: with respect to the real, the faculty of life is without end and exhausts the whole of the future; only with respect to the provisional is it “shown long or short according to what capacities call forth.” Li Tongxuan closes the matter most sharply of all in a single clause: in truth the Tathāgata has no long or short life, for the nature is without birth and cessation.
So in reading this chapter the eye is to be set on the word ‘measure,’ not on the word ‘life.’ What it means to teach is this: the scale of time you see is itself the mark of the place where you stand.
Why It Is Mind-King Bodhisattva Who Speaks
This chapter has only one speaker throughout — Mind-King Bodhisattva-Mahāsattva, addressing the bodhisattvas in the midst of the great assembly. There is no empowerment by the Tathāgata, no one who asks, no repeated verses: one voice from beginning to end. Why should it be he?
Three of the ancient masters each give a reason, agreeing in direction and differing in the door by which they enter. Chengguan says: “because he apprehends the purport, and because the Buddha's life-span is sovereign” — Mind-King can apprehend the Buddha's purport, and the Buddha's life-span is of itself sovereign, and so it is he who speaks it. Fazang says that Mind-King Bodhisattva speaks it because it “displays the sovereignty of the consciousness of the world, and hence there are numbers of kalpas” — the times and kalpas of the world are set up by consciousness, and if consciousness is sovereign, the length and shortness of kalpas turns with it. Li Tongxuan takes it straight from the symbolizing of dharmas: that Mind-King Bodhisattva speaks it makes clear that the Buddha's span of life has mind for its substance, and that the mind-king symbolizes the sovereignty of life.
Set out one misunderstanding: this is not saying that Mind-King Bodhisattva understands life-spans better than others do. It is saying that the speaker is himself a part of the doctrine. The stretching and shrinking of times and kalpas is not settled by anything outside; it is settled by mind — and therefore the chapter that speaks of that stretching and shrinking is given to a bodhisattva whose name is Mind-King. Brought down to practice, the weight of this is: whether your days feel long or short has never been a matter of the calendar.
The First Layer: One Kalpa of the Sahā World Is One Day and Night of Ultimate Bliss
The very first clause overturns the scale: “one kalpa in the land of Śākyamuni Buddha in this Sahā world is one day and one night in the land of Amitābha Buddha in the world Ultimate Bliss.” One entire kalpa of this world of ours that bears with suffering — a stretch of time so long that sentient beings cannot count it and the scriptures must move it by simile — is over there, in Ultimate Bliss, only daybreak to dusk and back to dawn.
Be careful of one misreading here: this is not saying that the people of Ultimate Bliss ‘pass their time more slowly.’ Kalpa and day-and-night are two different scales laid on one and the same stretch of time; they are not two different lengths under one scale. The Jin rendering, the sixty-fascicle text, has here the world Peace and Bliss, which with the eighty-fascicle text's world Ultimate Bliss points to the one land of Amitābha Buddha; the difference is one of rendered names, and it is set down.
Fazang sets a question at this point: what do the world Peace and Bliss and the rest take for their day and night? He gives two explanations: one, that the opening and closing of the lotus marks off day from night, one opening and one closing answering to a kalpa of the Sahā world; two, that one takes the whole sum of days and nights within one kalpa of the Sahā world, and counts by that number, taking one kalpa as one day and night. This is a reckoning set up by a commentator; the scriptural text has no such passage, and in reading it one must remember to tie it to Fazang's name.
Where it comes home is here: one and the same stretch of light and shade is a different unit within a different measure of mind. A stretch of your life that you feel to be long and hard to bear may, seen from another position, not amount to a single day.
The Second Layer: One Kalpa of Ultimate Bliss Is One Day and Night of Kāṣāya Banner
“One kalpa of the world Ultimate Bliss is one day and one night in the land of the Buddha Vajra-Firm in the world Kāṣāya Banner.” The first layer was already startling; the second compresses the startlement itself once more: that world Ultimate Bliss which was just now serving as ‘one day and night’ has an entire kalpa of its own, and in the world Kāṣāya Banner that kalpa is again only one day and night.
What must be cleared away here is the idea of ‘addition.’ The ten layers are not stretches of time joined end to end; they are layer upon layer taken as a base and multiplied up again. This is why Chengguan says “taking a kalpa for a day, before one has passed through the ten layers, the kalpas are already unspeakable” — the ten layers are not yet walked and the number has already gone past all saying.
Kāṣāya Banner is a buddha-land named from a monastic robe raised as a banner; the buddha's name, Vajra-Firm, means firm and indestructible. The sixty-fascicle text has at this layer the world Holy Robe Banner and the Buddha Vajra; the choice of graphs differs in both world-name and buddha-name while the thing pointed to is one, and both are recorded without adjudication.
Where it comes home: a practitioner is most easily satisfied at the first layer — ‘so there is a scale far larger than mine.’ This chapter will not let you stop at the first layer. It means to shake you a second time at the very place where you have just been shaken.
The Third Layer: One Kalpa of Kāṣāya Banner Is One Day and Night of the Wheel of the Non-Retrogressive Sound
“One kalpa of the world Kāṣāya Banner is one day and one night in the land of the Buddha Excellent and Supreme Light, Lotus Blossoming Open, in the world Wheel of the Non-Retrogressive Sound.”
The world-name of this layer is worth pausing over: the Wheel of the Non-Retrogressive Sound. A wheel is what turns without stopping; that the wheel of sound does not fall back says that in this buddha-land the sound of the Dharma continues on without any break. The buddha's name, Excellent and Supreme Light, Lotus Blossoming Open, displays the manifesting of the Dharma by the blossoming open of the lotus. The sixty-fascicle text has the Buddha Good and Joyful Light, Pure Blossoming Open; ‘excellent and supreme’ and ‘good and joyful,’ ‘lotus’ and ‘pure,’ stand over against each other, and both are recorded without adjudication.
The misreading to be set out is this: these names are not decoration. Within one and the same sentence-pattern the scripture changes only two things — the name of the world and the name of the buddha — and the names are the entire content of the layer. Since the pattern holds constant, the reader's attention is driven of necessity onto the virtue that the names symbolize.
Where it comes home: in a place where the sound of the Dharma does not fall back, one day and night is worth the whole kalpa of the layer before. This is saying that only where the Dharma continues unbroken does time become truly ‘dense.’ Practice taken up and dropped and taken up again passes through thin time.
The Fourth Layer: One Kalpa of the Wheel of the Non-Retrogressive Sound Is One Day and Night of Stainless
“One kalpa of the world Wheel of the Non-Retrogressive Sound is one day and one night in the land of the Buddha Dharma Banner in the world Stainless.”
Stainless: the defilement of stain has been left behind. The buddha's name, Dharma Banner, takes the Dharma for a banner, raised high so that the multitude looks up to it. At this layer the world-name and the buddha-name are wholly the same in the eighty-fascicle and the sixty-fascicle texts — among the ten layers, the only two in which both world-name and buddha-name agree are the fourth and the fifth, all the rest differing (at the eighth layer the sixty has the buddha-name Light of All Clarity, the eighty Light of All Spiritual Penetrations). This is one clean fact of the collation, and it is set down.
The misunderstanding to be set out is this: reading thus far, one easily conceives a picture of rank, ‘the further on, the higher the grade.’ But Chengguan has already set a limit under the gate of tenet and aim: with respect to the common teaching, this is “a heaping of the lesser toward the greater”; with respect to the distinct teaching, then “length and shortness are fused in perfect roundness” — length and shortness are of themselves fused, not ranged in a file of high and low. Fazang's gate of ‘displaying the order’ is likewise threefold: with respect to the gradual teaching, to the common teaching, to the distinct teaching, each reading forms its own track, and all are recorded without adjudication.
Where it comes home: ‘Stainless’ is set in the middle stretch and not at the last place. Cleanness is not the end; it is only the condition of being able to go further.
The Fifth Layer: One Kalpa of Stainless Is One Day and Night of Good Lamp
“One kalpa of the world Stainless is one day and one night in the land of the Buddha Lion in the world Good Lamp.”
Good Lamp — a lamp breaks the dark; the Buddha Lion — the lion's roar is the fearless preaching of the Dharma. At this layer too the world-name and buddha-name are wholly the same in both recensions.
At the fifth layer one has come exactly halfway. Here a misreading of a psychological kind must be set out: readers often begin at this point to go numb, feeling that the sentences are repeating. But the scripture's repetition is precisely its method. Chengguan judges this whole passage to be “severally raising the ten lands in mutual regard” — the two words ‘mutual regard’ are the eye of it: it is not that ten worlds are each introduced in turn, but that one after another they look upon each other, and each looking swallows the result of the last one whole. The numbness is exactly the feeling of being swallowed before it has fully arrived.
Where it comes home: a lamp breaks the dark of one room, the lion's roar breaks the doubt of one assembly. That this layer sets ‘breaking the dark’ midway is to say that darkness is not broken through all at once — one layer broken, and only then does the dark of the next become visible.
The Sixth Layer: One Kalpa of Good Lamp Is One Day and Night of Wondrous Light
“One kalpa of the world Good Lamp is one day and one night in the land of the Buddha Treasury of Light in the world Wondrous Light.”
From Good Lamp to Wondrous Light, from one lamp to a treasury of light: a lamp is the brightness of one place, a treasury is a brightness that gathers in without end. The sixty-fascicle text has at this layer the world Good Light and the Buddha Rocana Treasury — taking Rocana for the buddha-name, where the eighty-fascicle text has Treasury of Light, which is just the rendering of the sense of Rocana. The two recensions stand over against each other, and both are recorded without adjudication.
The misreading to be set out is that of taking ‘light’ for a figure of speech. In the pattern of this chapter the buddha's name is itself the reason why the times and kalpas of this layer are denser: where light has become a treasury, one day and night naturally holds up against a whole kalpa of the layer before.
Where it comes home: the ‘lamp’ of practice is lit one time and one time again; the ‘treasury’ is what is lit once and needs no further lighting. The distance from lamp to treasury is the distance from a kalpa to a day.
The Seventh Layer: One Kalpa of Wondrous Light Is One Day and Night of Hard to Surpass
“One kalpa of the world Wondrous Light is one day and one night in the land of the Buddha Light of the Dharma, Lotus Blossoming Open, in the world Hard to Surpass.”
The world-name suddenly changes its tone: Hard to Surpass. The names of the first six layers all said what that buddha-land is; this one says that it is hard to get past. The buddha's name, Light of the Dharma, Lotus Blossoming Open, means that the light of the Dharma manifests as a lotus blossoming open. The sixty-fascicle text has the world Surpassing Beyond and the Buddha Light of the Dharma, Pure Blossoming Open, Lotus — the sixty names it from ‘surpassing beyond,’ the eighty from ‘hard to surpass,’ the one turn of speech positive and the other negative, and both are recorded without adjudication.
The misunderstanding to set out: ‘hard to surpass’ does not amount to ‘cannot be surpassed.’ The scripture goes straight on to an eighth and a ninth layer, so it is plainly surpassed. What the name marks is the steepness near the utmost place — the closer to the utmost station, the harder the crossing of each layer.
Where it comes home: in the later stretch of practice, progress looks as though it had slowed; in fact the scale has grown dense. It is slow because you are in a place where one day and night is worth the whole kalpa before.
The Eighth Layer: One Kalpa of Hard to Surpass Is One Day and Night of Adorned Wisdom
“One kalpa of the world Hard to Surpass is one day and one night in the land of the Buddha Light of All Spiritual Penetrations in the world Adorned Wisdom.”
Adorned Wisdom — adorned with wisdom, and not decked out with anything else; the buddha's name is Light of All Spiritual Penetrations. The sixty-fascicle text has the same world-name, Adorned Wisdom, wholly agreeing; its buddha-name is the Buddha Light of All Clarity, standing over against the eighty's Light of All Spiritual Penetrations.
What this layer means to teach is a matter of order of station: on reaching a world named for wisdom, all the light and dark-breaking and blossoming that came before at last has somewhere to belong. The misunderstanding to set out is the reading of spiritual penetration as a strange ability — the scripture joins penetration and light into one name and sets it within a world named Adorned Wisdom, and its sense is plain: spiritual penetration is the light of wisdom, not some accomplishment outside wisdom.
Where it comes home: anyone who takes marvels for the index of his progress will be put to shame by this layer — even spiritual penetration is only one of the adornments of wisdom.
The Ninth Layer: One Kalpa of Adorned Wisdom Is One Day and Night of Mirror Light
“One kalpa of the world Adorned Wisdom is one day and one night in the land of the Buddha Moon Wisdom in the world Mirror Light.”
The last of the named members of the ten in mutual regard. Mirror Light — a mirror's being bright is not its shining of itself, but its reflecting and displaying of things; the buddha's name, Moon Wisdom, is a wisdom cool as the moon and reflected everywhere. The sixty-fascicle text has the Buddha Awakened Moon, standing over against the eighty's Moon Wisdom, and both are recorded without adjudication.
There is an important error to set out here: having gone through nine layers, the names look less and less like ‘stronger’ the further on they go, and more and more like ‘stiller’ — from lamp, from treasury of light, to mirror, to moon. The nearer the utmost station, the less it is addition and the more it is subtraction: a mirror is not bright of itself, a moon is not hot of itself. This answers to the reading of the distinct teaching that Chengguan called “length and shortness fused in perfect roundness” — at the utmost place it is not the longest, but the place where long and short no longer stand opposed.
Where it comes home: the high ground of practice does not grow into a brighter thing; it grows into a cleaner mirror.
Raising the Brief to Display the Vast: In This Order, on to Passing Beyond a Million Asaṃkhyeya Worlds
The named members stop at the ninth layer. The scripture then says: “Sons of the Buddha! In this order, on to passing beyond a million asaṃkhyeya worlds, one kalpa of the last world is one day and one night in the land of the Buddha Worthy and Supreme in the world Supreme Lotus.” Chengguan judges this to be “raising the brief to display the vast” — raising the brief of the ten layers so as to display the vastness of a million asaṃkhyeyas.
The misreading to be set out is the supposition that the scripture has ‘left something out.’ It has not left out; it has handed over. The first ten layers make you convert the scale nine times with your own hands, until the feel of it stands; and only once that feel stands do the words ‘a million asaṃkhyeyas’ carry any real weight. Chengguan's saying that “taking a kalpa for a day, before one has passed through the ten layers, the kalpas are already unspeakable” is exactly this order — without first passing through the ten layers, any larger number spoken is only a figure. Fazang carries the reckoning on as well: one kalpa of the last world, looked back upon from the first world, answers to unspeakably unspeakable kalpas.
One matter of the letter is also to be set out: the sixty-fascicle text has ‘on to a million asaṃkhyeya worlds,’ while the eighty has one graph more, ‘passing,’ giving ‘on to passing beyond a million asaṃkhyeya worlds’; both are recorded without adjudication.
Where it comes home: faith is not persuaded by a large number, but by a ratio one has converted with one's own hands.
Raising the Profound Ultimate: Samantabhadra Bodhisattva and the Great Bodhisattvas Who Practise Along with Him Fill the Whole of It
The last clause of the chapter suddenly stops speaking of time and speaks instead of persons: “Samantabhadra Bodhisattva together with the great bodhisattvas who practise along with him fill the whole of it.” Chengguan judges this to be “raising its profound ultimate,” and explains: “raising the filling by Samantabhadra and the rest makes clear what the utmost station dwells in.”
Why does the comparison halt at the tenth layer? The reason Chengguan gives is that, “sunk through a million asaṃkhyeyas, the last of the lands already borders upon the sameness of the ocean of lands.” Fazang says: “after the land of Worthy Head, the ocean of lands is the same, and there is neither better nor worse” — beyond this there is no ‘longer’ left to compare, because the scale itself has gone. So the tenth layer is not the largest grade; it is the last grade: past it one enters sameness. Fazang further explains why Samantabhadra alone is raised: because, looked at from below, he is the utmost; and taking Samantabhadra as the measure, looked at from above he is still within number, and so it is not spoken of.
The misunderstanding to be set out: this clause is not adding one still better place to go, over and above the Pure Land of Ultimate Bliss. By putting ‘who lives there’ in place of ‘how long it is there,’ the scripture gathers the question of measure up into a person — the utmost station is not a longer stretch of time but a kind of practice. The sixty-fascicle text has ‘Samantabhadra Bodhisattva and the great bodhisattvas fill the whole of it,’ while the eighty brings out the two graphs ‘practising along with him’; both are recorded without adjudication.
Where it comes home: a whole chapter has spoken out the unfathomable depth of times and kalpas, and at the end it gives you only one thing you can imitate — the practice of Samantabhadra. Time you will never overtake; practice you can begin today.
Lineage
The sense of this chapter is tied to what comes before and after. Chengguan judges the reason for its coming and ties it to the chapter before: the preceding Chapter on Asaṃkhyeya “displayed its real virtue,” while this chapter sets forth the allotted bound seen according to capacity — the one the real, the other the capacity, each displayed by contrast with the other. Fazang judges this same near intent, and ties on the chapter after as well: the Chapter on the Dwelling Places severally sets forth the bodhisattvas' use of the Dharma, making clear with respect to capacity the differences among their dwelling places; the Buddha's virtue having been spoken, next comes what the bodhisattvas dwell in. Li Tongxuan takes only the convenience of the order: the preceding chapter being Asaṃkhyeya, it is fitting that here there should follow the span of life. The three houses tie it differently, and all are recorded without adjudication.
Fazang further gives a far intent: this chapter answers from afar the question about the ten summits in the Hall of Universal Light, since the ten layers in mutual regard are each an utmost end and so get the name of summit. He also records the ancients' explanation, which took this chapter to answer the question about the Buddha's life-span, and says of it himself that “the momentum of the text does not go that way,” his reason being that the question about the life-span stands before the ten grounds and the rest, and it is not fitting that the answer should come in this place — a judgement the ancient masters made of themselves, recorded verbatim without any appraisal added.
A single separately circulating scripture of this chapter is set down by the ancient masters in two places: Chengguan says that the separately circulating scripture is named Boundless Buddha-Lands, and that the scripture thus displays the persons by the place; Fazang says that the Dharma-master Xuanzang separately rendered one fascicle named the Scripture of the Displaying of Boundless Buddha-Lands, which is this chapter, and records as well that it is also said in the Da foming jing that the buddhas alone fill these worlds. This edition records their names, and has not taken them as witnesses.
As for the six aspects and the ten profound gates of the Huayan house, the scriptural text of this chapter has no direct passage on them; and Vasubandhu's Shidi jing lun is an explanation devoted to the Chapter on the Ten Grounds and does not touch upon this chapter either — in both cases the lack is set down as the facts stand, without filling it from the text of other chapters. What this chapter leaves behind is a reckoning of the utmost plainness and the utmost unforgettableness: one kalpa taken as one day, ten layers in mutual regard, and past this the ocean of lands is the same.
品三十二 諸菩薩住處品The Dwelling Places of the Bodhisattvas
全文五層 →Full five layers →為什麼經要指出『哪裡有菩薩』
一部講法界無盡的經,忽然開出一張地名表——東方哪座山、南方哪座山、哪個國、哪座城——讀者第一反應多半是:這也算法義嗎?經文自己給了品名的答案:諸菩薩住處。澄觀釋這個品名說,菩薩以大悲隨機而住,能住的人不只一位、所住的處也不只一方,所以稱之為『諸』;諸位菩薩的住處,就是這一品的題目。
要排掉的誤會是:這不是佛教地理志。澄觀在品首把兩層話說清楚了——若按實而談,法界中一毛端之處都有無量普賢,何必指方?但眾生的心要有個著落,所以隨順機緣,指出有方所之處,使人生起欣慕、翹首有歸。指處,是為了那些還需要一個方向才肯起心的人;而一旦你知道能住的菩薩毛含剎海、所住之處塵納無邊,就會明白沒有哪一方不是菩薩住處。
所以這張表的用法是:先讓你信『真的有』,再讓你懂『無處不有』。落到自己身上便是——不必先問哪裡有聖者,先問自己肯不肯朝那個方向翹起心來。
說話的人:心王菩薩
這一品的說者不是普賢,也不是法慧,而是心王菩薩摩訶薩,他在大眾會中告訴諸菩薩。為什麼是他?
古德三家所繫一致。澄觀說,之所以也由心王來說,是因為凡有所統攝者皆得自在,也表示心隨智而住、無有障礙。法藏說,是因為對「處」這件事,識已得自在,所以由心王說。李通玄說,菩薩攝化住持之行,正是心王自在隨智之行,所以令心王菩薩說這一品住處。
要排掉的誤會是:以為說者只是換個人報幕。經家安排誰說法,本身就是義。這一品講的是「處」,而處之所以能住、能遍、能無礙,繫在心。心若不自在,走到哪裡都是牢籠;心得自在,則隨智所住無往不安。這就是為什麼一張地名表要由心王來念。
落到自己身上:讀這一品時,不要只用眼睛找地圖,要順著說者回看自己的心——你此刻所在之處,是心王住著,還是煩惱住著?
東方·仙人山
第一處在東方,名叫仙人山。經文的句式在這裡定型,後面八處都照這個模子:某方有某處,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾就在其中止住;現在也有某位菩薩,帶著多少眷屬,常在其中演說佛法;其餘十三處則只說「於中止住」。此處現住的是金剛勝菩薩,眷屬三百人。
先問:為什麼要先說「從昔已來」?因為這一句是在講傳承的久遠——不是今天才有人在那裡修行,而是一代一代不斷。菩薩的住處不是誰的私產,是接力。再問:三百人是多是少?經文對九處各給眷屬數目(三百·五百·三百·三千·一萬·一千二百·一千·三千·五千),數目本身不是排名,是顯各處攝化的機宜不同。
要排掉的誤會是:以為「仙人山」是外道仙人所居而與佛法無關。澄觀相傳此山即是東海蓬萊山,若如此則亦兼海——名字借用世間舊稱,所住的是菩薩。落地一句:不要因為一個地方的舊名而輕忽它現在是誰在那裡說法。
南方·勝峯山
第二處在南方,名叫勝峯山,現住的是法慧菩薩,眷屬五百人,常在其中演說佛法。
先問:法慧這個名字為何眼熟?前面十住諸品正是法慧菩薩承佛威神所說。經在此處把一位曾經登座說法的大士,安放回一座具體的山中——說法的人不是只在法會的高座上,法會散了,他仍在某座山裡日日說法。這一筆最能破除『佛法只在盛會中』的錯覺。
要排掉的誤會是:以為「勝峯」只是形容詞式的美名。澄觀繫此處即德雲比丘所住之山,晉譯本作樓閣山,即婆施羅所居——也就是善財童子參學路上的實地。經中的名、疏中的考、行者的腳步,是同一條線。
落到自己身上:善財所參的處所,就在這張表上;表不是給人臥遊的,是給人走的。
西方·金剛焰山
第三處在西方,名叫金剛焰山,現住的是精進無畏行菩薩,眷屬三百人,常在其中演說佛法。
先問:山名為什麼疊用「金剛」與「焰」?金剛表堅不可壞,焰表照破幽暗;兩義相合,正對現住菩薩之名——精進無畏行。精進是不壞,無畏是不暗。名與人相稱,這是本品一再出現的體例:處以表德,人以顯行。
要排掉的誤會是:以為菩薩的名號只是個代號。在這一品裡,處名與菩薩名往往互相發明,讀時不妨對著看一眼。澄觀於此處只作方位之繫,說金剛焰在西海之濱,不多添義。古德不強解,我們也不強解。
落到自己身上:精進而怯,是空忙;無畏而懈,是空談。此處立的是精進與無畏合為一行。
北方·香積山
第四處在北方,名叫香積山,現住的是香象菩薩,眷屬三千人,常在其中演說佛法。
先問:香積是什麼意思?直解就是香氣積聚之山。澄觀誌舊說以為應是雪山之北的香山。名為香,是以香喻德——德之熏人,如香之遠聞。而現住者名香象:象是力大而行穩的譬類,香象合稱,是德香與行力兼備。
要排掉的誤會是:以為這些山名的解釋是後人附會。古德在此用語極謹慎,澄觀只說「昔云應是」,是傳而不斷。經名可考者考之、不可考者存之,這是讀考據該有的分寸。
落到自己身上:香不必自說,行不必自誇;此處菩薩與三千眷屬常在,說法不斷,正是德香積久而自然聚人。
東北方·清涼山
第五處在東北方,名叫清涼山,現住的是文殊師利菩薩,眷屬一萬人,常在其中演說佛法。
先問:這一處與前四處有何不同?兩點最顯——一是現住者為文殊師利,即諸大菩薩中表智之首;二是眷屬一萬人,為全品二十二處中最多。經文在此不加一字讚歎,只以人與數自然顯出分量。
再問:為什麼叫清涼?澄觀釋此名,是因為那裡積冰經歲、盛夏猶飛雪,不曾有炎暑,所以名為清涼。清涼在佛法中從來不只是氣候:熱惱是煩惱之相,清涼是離熱之德。文殊住清涼,是智慧住在無熱惱處。
要排掉的誤會是:把「東北方」讀成含糊的方位詞而滑過去。澄觀正是覺得單說東北方其言猶漫,才引經廣證此山之所在——那一段長考證屬諸家所繫,本文置於〈承衍〉誌錄,不在此判。
落到自己身上:求智慧的人先要肯離熱惱;心裡一團火時,文殊不在那裡說法。
海中·金剛山
第六處不在陸上八方,而在海中,名叫金剛山,現住的是法起菩薩,眷屬一千二百人,常在其中演說佛法。
先問:為何前十處中要插一個海中之山?澄觀於科文自注:這十處裡,第六是海中之山,第十是海中之窟,其餘都是山。可見經文有意讓山海兼具。他釋前十處之表法說,山海能包能藏,是仁者智者棲止之地,表大智之高深,也表能止能照。山表高深,海表包藏;能止是定,能照是慧。
要排掉的誤會是:以為海中無可住處,故此句是虛設。經文說得極平實——從往昔以來就有諸菩薩眾在其中止住。菩薩的住處不揀地形,揀的是能不能止、能不能照。
落到自己身上:法起之名最堪玩味——在海中而法起,正是於動盪處而法能生起。
東南方·支提山
第七處在東南方,名叫支提山,現住的是天冠菩薩,眷屬一千人,常在其中演說佛法。
先問:支提是何義?此名是音譯,古德所傳之義有兩說,並見〈承衍〉誌錄不判。就經文本身可讀的是:此山既以支提為名,而現住者名天冠——冠是頂上之飾,支提之類亦是眾所瞻仰而在高處者,名與名相映。
要排掉的誤會是:以為音譯之名沒有義理可講,於是跳過。凡音譯處,正是古德用力最多之處;讀者不必自行猜義,但該知道古德已為此爭過、考過。
落到自己身上:菩薩與一千眷屬常在其中而演說法——不論山名如何解,說法未曾斷,這才是經文要你記住的。
西南方·光明山
第八處在西南方,名叫光明山,現住的是賢勝菩薩,眷屬三千人,常在其中演說佛法。
先問:光明二字在此表什麼?前有清涼表離熱,此有光明表破闇;一離熱、一破闇,正是煩惱障與所知障之相對治在處名上的投影。而現住者名賢勝:賢是德行之稱,勝是超出之義,德行超出者住在光明山中,人與處又是一義。
要排掉的誤會是:以為光明只是形容山勢明朗。此品處處以名表德,若只作風景讀,便讀薄了。但也不可過度:古德於此山未多釋,我們就止於名義相映,不代古德立說。
落到自己身上:菩薩與三千眷屬常在其中而說法——光明不是照給山看的,是照給人走路用的。
西北方·香風山
第九處在西北方,名叫香風山,現住的是香光菩薩,眷屬五千人,常在其中演說佛法。
先問:香風與前面的香積有何不同?香積是積聚而厚,香風是流動而遠。德之厚在積,德之被在流。經文以二山遙相對舉,一靜一動,德之體用兩面都說到了。澄觀於此山只作一句推測,疑是香山的西畔,語極審慎。
要排掉的誤會是:以為「疑是」二字表示古德不用心。恰恰相反——能考則考、可疑則存疑,這是疏家的規矩。讀者若把「疑是」讀成定說,反而壞了古德的分寸。
落到自己身上:菩薩與五千眷屬常在此而說法。香風之教,是讓法香吹到聽不見經聲的地方去。
大海之中·莊嚴窟
第十處在大海之中,名叫莊嚴窟。經文到這裡句式忽然變了:只說從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住,不再說現有某菩薩、不再說眷屬多少、不再說常在其中而演說法。
先問:句式為何忽略?澄觀提示了一個線索:莊嚴窟是對著上面第六處的海中而言,所以經文用了「復有」二字——大海之中「又」有一處。前九處是逐方點名,此處是就海再補一處,語勢自然轉為簡略;而自此以下十二處城邑,也都只說止住。
要排掉的誤會是:以為不說現住菩薩就等於那裡沒有菩薩、或菩薩較劣。經文明說諸菩薩眾於中止住,只是不列名數而已。不列名,恰恰更近本品之宗:不是要你記住幾位名人,是要你知道處處有人。
落到自己身上:真正撐住這世間的,多半是不列名的那些。
城邑一·毘舍離南·善住根
自此以下十二處,經文從山海轉入城邑。第一處是毘舍離城的南邊,名叫善住根,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住。
先問:為何從山海轉入城邑?澄觀科此後十二處為城邑雜居,並釋其意:曲盡眾生的機宜,表大悲無所遺漏,由此可知菩薩無處不在。前十處住山海,表大智高深;後十二處住城邑,表大悲不捨。智與悲,一上一下,合起來才是菩薩的住處。
要排掉的誤會是:以為住城邑者不如住山者清高。經文與疏家都不作此判——山海是能止能照,城邑是曲盡物機,是兩種行,不是兩個等級。
至於處名善住根:善住是安住得穩,根是所依之本。落到自己身上——住在人堆裡而根不動,這比躲進山裡難得多。
城邑二·摩度羅城·滿足窟
第二處在摩度羅城,有一住處名叫滿足窟,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住。
先問:摩度羅是什麼地方?李通玄釋此城名說,此云孔雀城,也叫密蓋,都是因為古來的事跡而立名。這提醒我們:經中所列都是當時實有的城邑,不是虛擬的地名。
再問:滿足窟之名何義?窟是山洞石室,是修行者棲身之所;而名為滿足,是就所成之德說——住在最簡陋處而心無所缺。經文於此不加解釋,我們也不代它多說。
要排掉的誤會是:以為「窟」代表清苦而可憐。以窟為住而名滿足,正是把世間對貧富的判斷整個翻過來。
落到自己身上:所住之處能不能滿足,不在處,在住的人。
城邑三·俱珍那城·法座
第三處在俱珍那城,有一住處名叫法座,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住。
先問:此城名何來?李通玄釋云,此城亦名俱陳那,俱陳者此云大盆;相傳古時有人於大盆中蓄水如池,常在盆側修習仙法,常為人解說護淨與養生之經,後學之徒都以師法為姓,這座城因此得名。古德把一個地名的來歷說得這樣細,是要人知道:菩薩所住之處,往往就是人間有故事、有師承的地方。
再問:處名為何叫法座?法座是說法之座。一座城裡有一處名為法座而諸菩薩久住,意思很直白——這裡的說法沒有斷過。
要排掉的誤會是:以為法座必在寺院大殿。經文把法座安在城中一處住處上;有人肯說、有人肯聽,那裡就是法座。
城邑四·清淨彼岸城·目真隣陀窟
第四處在清淨彼岸城,有一住處名叫目真隣陀窟,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住。
先問:目真隣陀是什麼?李通玄釋此名說,目真隣陀此云解脫,是龍名;隣陀此云處,因為有龍在此處聞法得解脫,所以以此為名。一條龍在此聞法而得解脫,這個地名就成了紀念碑。
再問:城名清淨彼岸與此窟名相稱嗎?彼岸是度過生死之義,解脫正是到彼岸之果;城名與窟名一因一果,遙遙相對。
要排掉的誤會是:以為龍得解脫是神異故事而與己無關。古德記此,是要說明聞法之益不揀類——連龍尚且如此,何況人。
落到自己身上:一個地方值得被記住,往往因為有人在那裡真的轉身了。
城邑五·摩蘭陀國·無礙龍王建立
第五處在摩蘭陀國,有一住處名叫無礙龍王建立,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住。
先問:摩蘭陀國在何處?李通玄於此逐字誌云未翻——古德自己標明此名尚未譯出,不代為擬。這一筆最見疏家的誠實:能釋則釋,不能釋則據實說不知。
再問:處名何以繫龍王?此處名為無礙龍王建立,是說此住處由一位名為無礙的龍王所營造。前一處是龍聞法得解脫,此處是龍建立道場——龍在本品中兩度出現,一為受法者,一為護法者。
要排掉的誤會是:以為龍王建立就非菩薩所住。經文明說諸菩薩眾於中止住;誰造的是一事,誰住的是另一事。
落到自己身上:成就道場者未必是說法者,兩種功德都算數。
城邑六·甘菩遮國·出生慈
第六處在甘菩遮國,有一住處名叫出生慈,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住。
先問:此國名可解嗎?李通玄同樣誌為未翻。連續兩處未翻,古德不以為窘——不知道就說不知道,這是可靠的態度。
再問:處名出生慈是何義?出生是生起,慈是與樂之心。以「出生慈」名一處住處,是說這裡是慈心生起之地。前面諸處多以山勢、形貌、故事得名,此處直以德名,格外醒目。
要排掉的誤會是:以為慈只是溫和的性情。慈在此被說成需要「出生」的——它不是本來就有的情緒,是要被生起、被長養的行。
落到自己身上:問自己的住處是否出生慈,比問它在地圖哪一點要緊得多。
城邑七·震旦國·那羅延窟
第七處在震旦國,有一住處名叫那羅延窟,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住。
先問:震旦是哪裡?李通玄釋得極明白:震旦或說支那,也說真丹,此翻為思慮;因為這個國家的人多思慮計度,所以以此為名——就是漢地。經文在這裡指到了讀者自己腳下的土地。
再問:那羅延是何義?李通玄釋云,那羅延此云堅牢。堅牢之窟,在思慮之國——一個以思慮多為名的地方,所立的住處偏偏名為堅牢。名與名之間有一種對治的意味。
要排掉的誤會是:以為華嚴所說的聖境都在遙遠的西方。經文明列震旦,古德明釋為漢地:這張表上有我們這一方。
落到自己身上:思慮多不是罪,但思慮多的人尤其需要一個堅牢處安住。
城邑八·䟽勒國·牛頭山
第八處在䟽勒國,有一住處名叫牛頭山,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住。
先問:䟽勒之名如何?李通玄釋云,正確的音應作佉路數怛勒,漢地存其略而只稱疏勒。古德在此做的是還原音譯的工作,讓後人知道通行的簡稱從何而來。
再問:牛頭山之名何義?經文與所引古德於此山未別立釋義,本文即止於此,不代為說。名之可考者考之,不可考者不湊——這是本品讀法的一貫分寸。
要排掉的誤會是:以為每個名字都必須解出義理才算讀懂。二十二處中有可解者、有未翻者、有存疑者,經文一律以同一句式平等對待:從昔已來,諸菩薩眾於中止住。
落到自己身上:可解與不可解都不妨礙那裡有人在修行。
城邑九·迦葉彌羅國·次第
第九處在迦葉彌羅國,有一住處名叫次第,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住。
先問:迦葉彌羅是哪裡?李通玄釋云,舊稱罽賓國,此翻為何誰入;並記其立國之由——昔時此地未立國時有大龍池,人不敢近,後有一位羅漢見此地形勝宜於人居,便向龍乞求容一膝之地;龍答應了,羅漢化身令大,膝漸漸滿於池中,龍守信而去,羅漢以神力使池水乾竭,令百姓居住建立屋宅,眾人都說若不是因為聖師,何人能入此處——國名就從這句話立。
再問:處名「次第」何義?次第是有序不亂。古德於此未別釋,就名讀之,是說修行有其次序。
要排掉的誤會是:把古事讀成神話而略過其義。這則記事的骨在「乞容一膝」——聖者取的極少,成就的是眾人居止之地。
城邑十·增長歡喜城·尊者窟
第十處在增長歡喜城,有一住處名叫尊者窟,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住。
先問:城名與處名各表什麼?城名增長歡喜,是就所生之益說;處名尊者窟,是就所住之人說。一處住處以尊者為名,是因為曾有可敬者住在其中;而其所在之城名為增長歡喜——有尊者住的地方,一城人的歡喜會增長。
要排掉的誤會是:以為歡喜由境物而來。此城之歡喜繫於有人住在那個窟裡;人使地生歡喜,不是地使人生歡喜。
再問:這與前品所說有何相接?前面〈如來壽量品〉說時間之長,此品說處所之遍;而一城之歡喜能否增長,正落在有沒有人肯久住其中。
落到自己身上:你所在之處若有人的歡喜因你而增長,那裡就有一個尊者窟。
城邑十一·菴浮梨摩國·見億藏光明
第十一處在菴浮梨摩國,有一住處名叫見億藏光明,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住。
先問:此處名為何如此長?見億藏光明五字,是全品最繁的處名。見是見到,億藏是無量之藏,光明是所現之相——合起來是:於此可見無量寶藏之光明。二十二處中多數以形貌或故事得名,此處直以所見之境得名。
要排掉的誤會是:以為所見之光明是外在的異相。名中先說「見」,可見所重在能見;能見者不淨,億藏當前亦不成光明。
再問:古德於此有釋嗎?所引諸家於此國此處未別立釋義,本文據實不代為說。
落到自己身上:一生能不能見到那個藏,取決於眼,不取決於藏。
城邑十二·乾陀羅國·苫婆羅窟
第十二處也是全品最後一處,在乾陀羅國,有一住處名叫苫婆羅窟,從往昔以來諸菩薩眾於中止住。
先問:乾陀羅之名何義?李通玄釋云,此云持地,因為此國多有賢聖居住其中,不被他國所侵害;又一說乾陀是香、羅謂陀羅此云遍,是說此國之內多生香氣而遍布。持地而不受侵、香氣而遍——兩義都好。
再問:苫婆羅是什麼?李通玄釋云,苫婆羅是香華樹的名字,這座窟的旁邊多生此樹,因此得名。全品以一座長滿香花樹的石窟收尾。
要排掉的誤會是:以為經文到此戛然而止是脫落之憾。此處的收束方式屬諸家所議,見〈承衍〉誌錄。就經文本身讀:二十二處說完,不作結歎、不作總收,正如這張表本來就沒有窮盡的一天。
落到自己身上:讀完最後一處,該問的不是還有沒有第二十三處,而是自己此刻站的地方,算不算一處。
承衍
遠答何問——澄觀以本品遠答前〈如來壽量品〉之壽量海問,因為菩薩隨機而住、壽命有異,並明指舊說以此品遠答第二會初十句問者,義意既不同、文次亦不相接。法藏則以本品有二來意,一為遠答普光明殿隨喜心等十句之問,二為近顯菩薩應機之所在。二造所繫之問不同,各有其科次之據,並錄不判。
清涼山之考——澄觀於此處立全品最長的一段考證:繫清涼山即代州雁門郡之五臺山,其中現有清涼寺,因積冰經歲、盛夏飛雪、不曾炎暑而名清涼;又因五峯聳出、頂上無林木、狀如壘土之臺而名五臺,並以五臺表五智已圓、五眼已淨。他以為經文單說東北方其言猶漫,遂引《寶藏陀羅尼經》所說贍部洲東北方有國名大振那、其中有山號為五頂、文殊師利童子游行居住為諸菩薩眾說法之文為證,斷曰斯言審矣;復自述幼年尋此典、每讀至此掩卷長歎,遂不遠萬里棲託聖境十載。法藏亦繫清涼山即代州五臺山,其中現有古清涼寺,以冬夏積雪而得名,並指此山及文殊靈應別有傳記三卷。二說並錄,誌錄不判。
支提山名義——法藏勘梵本,以為此名正當作制多山,此云歸宗,是塔之類;李通玄則釋支提山此云淨信,因為見此山者能生淨信。二釋並錄不判。
勝峯山所繫——澄觀繫此山即德雲所住,晉譯本名樓閣山,即婆施羅所居;法藏則繫為下文南海岸樓閣城側自在海師所住之處,並云勘梵本應名勝峰山。二繫並錄不判。
二本異文與處數——晉譯六十華嚴同有此品,說者同為心王菩薩。八方山名與現住菩薩多同而譯字互異(如仙人起山對仙人山、香聚山對香積山、枝堅固對支提山、無畏師子行對精進無畏行);海中一處,八十本作金剛山、現住法起、眷屬千二百,六十本則作四大海中之枳怛、現住曇無竭、眷屬萬二千,處次亦異;城邑處八十本十二而六十本十三,六十本多出巴連弗邑金燈僧伽藍一處。澄觀科八十本為前十後十二共二十二處,法藏就六十本科為八方、四海、諸國十三所。全錄不判,異本取捨屬譯者。
品末不結——澄觀誌云此文之終都無結束,或是經來不盡;並言閻浮既然如此,其餘諸方諸界異類界等都可以比照,法界身雲則無在不在。法藏於六十本末誌云上來所明是此閻浮之菩薩住處,其餘四天下可以准之,乃至餘須彌世界及樹形等世界都准此而無盡無盡。李通玄則云此一品大意在明菩薩攝生住持不斷三寶之行,只舉此一閻浮提,即表十方剎土及一切閻浮提總是准此。三造並錄,誌錄不判。
本品之外——世親《十地經論》與華嚴宗綱領諸書於本品皆查無引釋(機械全查零命中),據實標闕,不代為繫。
Why the Sūtra Points Out ‘Where There Are Bodhisattvas’
A sūtra that speaks of the Dharma realm without end suddenly opens out a list of place-names — which mountain in the east, which mountain in the south, which land, which city — and the reader’s first reaction is mostly this: does that even count as doctrine? The sūtra gives its own answer in the chapter’s name: the dwelling places of the bodhisattvas. Chengguan, explaining that name, says that bodhisattvas dwell out of great compassion according to the capacities they meet, and that those who can dwell are not one alone and the places dwelt in are not one quarter alone, and so they are called ‘the many’; the dwelling places of the many bodhisattvas — that is the title of this chapter.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: that the chapter is a Buddhist geography. Chengguan, at the head of the chapter, has already made two layers plain — if it be spoken as it really is, at every hair-tip in the Dharma realm there are measureless Samantabhadras, so why point to a quarter at all? But the minds of sentient beings must have somewhere to come to rest, and so, following what suits their conditions, quarters and places are pointed out, that men may raise up longing and lift their heads toward a home. To point to a place is for the sake of those who still need a direction before they will rouse their minds; and once you know that the bodhisattvas who dwell hold oceans of lands within a hair and that the places they dwell in take in the boundless within a mote of dust, you will understand that there is no quarter which is not a dwelling place of bodhisattvas.
So the use of this list is this: first it lets you believe that there really are such; then it lets you understand that there is nowhere they are not. Brought down to oneself, it comes to this — do not first ask where the noble ones are; ask first whether you are willing to raise your own mind toward that direction.
The One Who Speaks: the Bodhisattva Mind King
The speaker of this chapter is not Samantabhadra, nor Dharma Wisdom, but the bodhisattva-mahāsattva Mind King, who within the great assembly tells the bodhisattvas. Why is it he?
The three ancient masters tie it in one way. Chengguan says that the reason it is also the Mind King who speaks is that whatever governs and rules is thereby sovereign, and that it also displays how mind dwells in accordance with wisdom and has no obstruction. Fazang says it is because, as regards ‘place,’ consciousness has attained sovereignty, and so it is the Mind King who speaks. Li Tongxuan says that the bodhisattva’s practice of gathering in, transforming, and upholding is precisely the Mind King’s practice of being sovereign and following wisdom, and so the bodhisattva Mind King is made to speak this chapter of dwelling places.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to take the speaker for a mere change of announcer. Whom the compilers of the sūtra appoint to speak is itself doctrine. What this chapter speaks of is ‘place,’ and the reason a place can be dwelt in, can be pervaded, can be unobstructed, is tied to mind. If the mind is not sovereign, then wherever one goes is a cage; if the mind attains sovereignty, then wherever it dwells according to wisdom there is no going without ease. That is why a list of place-names must be recited by the Mind King.
Brought down to oneself: in reading this chapter, do not use the eyes alone to hunt for a map; follow the speaker back and look at your own mind — in the place where you stand at this moment, is it the mind-king that dwells there, or the afflictions?
The East · Mount of the Seers
The first place is in the east, named Mount of the Seers. The sūtra’s sentence pattern is fixed here, and the eight places that follow are all cast in this mould: in such a quarter there is such a place, and from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt therein; and now too there is such a bodhisattva, with a retinue of so many, ever within it expounding the Buddha’s Dharma; while the remaining thirteen places say only “dwelling therein.” The one now dwelling here is the bodhisattva Vajra Excellence, with a retinue of three hundred.
First ask: why does it begin by saying “from of old”? Because this clause speaks of the antiquity of the transmission — it is not that someone has only today begun to practise there, but that generation upon generation has gone on unbroken. A bodhisattva’s dwelling place is nobody’s private property; it is a relay. Ask again: are three hundred many or few? The sūtra gives a number of retinue for each of nine places (three hundred · five hundred · three hundred · three thousand · ten thousand · one thousand two hundred · one thousand · three thousand · five thousand), and the numbers themselves are not a ranking; they display that the fitness of what each place gathers in and transforms is different.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to take “Mount of the Seers” for the abode of non-Buddhist seers and so unrelated to the Buddha’s Dharma. Chengguan reports the tradition that this mountain is Mount Penglai in the eastern sea, and that if so, then it takes in the sea as well — the name is borrowed from an old worldly usage, but the ones dwelling there are bodhisattvas. To bring it home in a sentence: do not slight a place on account of its old name, when the question is who is expounding the Dharma there now.
The South · Mount Excellent Peak
The second place is in the south, named Mount Excellent Peak; the one now dwelling there is the bodhisattva Dharma Wisdom, with a retinue of five hundred, ever within it expounding the Buddha’s Dharma.
First ask: why does the name Dharma Wisdom look familiar? The chapters of the ten abodes earlier on were spoken by the bodhisattva Dharma Wisdom, upheld by the Buddha’s awesome spiritual power. Here the sūtra sets a great being who once mounted the seat and expounded the Dharma back into a particular mountain — the one who expounds is not only upon the high seat of a Dharma assembly; when the assembly disperses, he is still in some mountain expounding day after day. This one stroke is the best undoing of the illusion that ‘the Buddha’s Dharma is only in the great gatherings.’
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to take “Excellent Peak” for a merely ornamental epithet. Chengguan ties this place to the mountain where Cloud of Virtue dwelt, which in the Jin recension is named Mount Tower-Pavilion, the abode of Poshiluo — that is, actual ground upon the road of the youth Sudhana’s study. The name in the sūtra, the investigation in the commentary, and the footsteps of the practitioner are one and the same line.
Brought down to oneself: the places where Sudhana studied are on this very list; and the list is not for roaming over from one’s couch, but for walking.
The West · Mount Vajra Flame
The third place is in the west, named Mount Vajra Flame; the one now dwelling there is the bodhisattva Fearless Practice of Vigor, with a retinue of three hundred, ever within it expounding the Buddha’s Dharma.
First ask: why does the mountain’s name pile ‘vajra’ upon ‘flame’? The vajra displays what is firm and cannot be broken; the flame displays the breaking through of what is dim and dark. The two senses joined answer exactly to the name of the bodhisattva now dwelling there — Fearless Practice of Vigor. Vigor is the unbreakable; fearlessness is the undimmed. Name and person answer to one another, and this is a formal usage that appears again and again in this chapter: the place displays a virtue, the person shows forth a practice.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to take a bodhisattva’s name for a mere label. In this chapter the name of the place and the name of the bodhisattva often illuminate each other, and in reading it does no harm to glance from one to the other. Chengguan here only ties the quarter, saying that Vajra Flame is on the shore of the western sea, and adds no further sense. The ancient masters do not force an explanation, and neither do we.
Brought down to oneself: vigor that quails is empty bustle; fearlessness that slackens is empty talk. What is set up here is vigor and fearlessness joined into one practice.
The North · Mount Heaped Fragrance
The fourth place is in the north, named Mount Heaped Fragrance; the one now dwelling there is the bodhisattva Fragrant Elephant, with a retinue of three thousand, ever within it expounding the Buddha’s Dharma.
First ask: what does ‘heaped fragrance’ mean? Read plainly, it is the mountain where fragrance is heaped and gathered. Chengguan sets down the old saying that it ought to be the Fragrant Mountain north of the Snow Mountains. To be named for fragrance is to use fragrance as a simile for virtue — virtue perfumes men as fragrance is smelt from afar. And the one now dwelling there is named Fragrant Elephant: the elephant is the sort of creature great in strength and steady in gait, and ‘fragrant elephant’ together is the fragrance of virtue and the strength of practice held both at once.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to take these explanations of mountain names for the far-fetchings of later men. The ancient masters are extremely careful in their wording here; Chengguan says only “the old saying is that it ought to be,” which is to transmit without deciding. What can be investigated in a name, investigate; what cannot, leave standing — this is the measure that reading an apparatus ought to have.
Brought down to oneself: fragrance need not proclaim itself, nor practice praise itself; that a bodhisattva with three thousand of retinue is ever here and the expounding never breaks off is just the fragrance of virtue heaped up long until of itself it gathers men.
The Northeast · Mount Clear and Cool
The fifth place is in the northeast, named Mount Clear and Cool; the one now dwelling there is the bodhisattva Mañjuśrī, with a retinue of ten thousand, ever within it expounding the Buddha’s Dharma.
First ask: how does this place differ from the four before it? Two things are most evident — first, that the one now dwelling there is Mañjuśrī, foremost among the great bodhisattvas in displaying wisdom; second, that the retinue is ten thousand, the greatest of all the twenty-two places in the chapter. The sūtra adds not one word of praise here, and lets the person and the number show forth the weight of it of themselves.
Ask again: why is it called Clear and Cool? Chengguan explains the name: because ice lies there heaped through the years and snow still flies in high summer, and there has never been sweltering heat, it is named Clear and Cool. In the Buddha’s Dharma, coolness has never been merely a matter of climate: heat and vexation are the marks of affliction, and coolness is the virtue of being apart from heat. That Mañjuśrī dwells in Clear and Cool is wisdom dwelling where there is no heat of affliction.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to read “the northeast” as a vague word for a quarter and slide past it. Chengguan felt precisely that to say only ‘the northeast’ left the wording still too loose, and therefore cited a scripture to attest at length where this mountain lies — that long passage of investigation belongs to what the several masters tie, and this text places it under Lineage as a record, and does not adjudicate it here.
Brought down to oneself: whoever seeks wisdom must first be willing to depart from heat and vexation; while there is a fire burning inside, Mañjuśrī is not expounding the Dharma there.
In the Sea · Mount Vajra
The sixth place is not upon land in the eight quarters but in the sea, named Mount Vajra; the one now dwelling there is the bodhisattva Dharma Arising, with a retinue of one thousand two hundred, ever within it expounding the Buddha’s Dharma.
First ask: why insert a mountain in the sea among the first ten places? Chengguan notes it himself in his outline: among these ten, the sixth is a mountain in the sea and the tenth is a cave in the sea, and the rest are all mountains. Plainly the sūtra means to have mountain and sea both. Explaining what the first ten places display, he says that mountains and seas can enfold and can store, and are where the humane and the wise take their rest, displaying the height and depth of great wisdom, and displaying too that they can settle and can illumine. The mountain displays height and depth, the sea displays enfolding; to be able to settle is concentration, to be able to illumine is wisdom.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to think that there can be no dwelling place in the sea, and so this clause is a fiction. The sūtra says it with the plainest fact — from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt therein. A bodhisattva’s dwelling place does not pick and choose its terrain; what it picks is whether one can settle and whether one can illumine.
Brought down to oneself: the name Dharma Arising is the most worth turning over — that in the sea the Dharma arises is precisely that in the place of surge and unrest the Dharma is able to arise.
The Southeast · Mount Zhiti
The seventh place is in the southeast, named Mount Zhiti; the one now dwelling there is the bodhisattva Heavenly Crown, with a retinue of one thousand, ever within it expounding the Buddha’s Dharma.
First ask: what does ‘Zhiti’ mean? The name is a transcription, and the sense transmitted by the ancient masters has two readings, both of which appear under Lineage, recorded without adjudication. What can be read from the sūtra’s text itself is this: the mountain is named for Zhiti, while the one dwelling there is named Heavenly Crown — a crown is an ornament worn on the head, and a thing of the Zhiti sort is likewise something looked up to by all and set on high; the one name and the other reflect each other.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to think that a transcribed name carries no doctrine worth speaking of, and so to skip it. Wherever there is a transcription is precisely where the ancient masters spent most labour; the reader need not guess at the sense himself, but ought to know that the ancients have contended and investigated over this.
Brought down to oneself: a bodhisattva with a retinue of one thousand is ever within it expounding the Dharma — however the mountain’s name be explained, the expounding has never broken off, and that is what the sūtra would have you remember.
The Southwest · Mount Light
The eighth place is in the southwest, named Mount Light; the one now dwelling there is the bodhisattva Worthy Excellence, with a retinue of three thousand, ever within it expounding the Buddha’s Dharma.
First ask: what do the two graphs ‘light’ display here? Before there was Clear and Cool, displaying departure from heat; here there is Light, displaying the breaking of darkness; the one a departure from heat, the other a breaking of darkness — which is just the counteraction of the hindrance of affliction and the hindrance to what is to be known, cast as a shadow upon a place-name. And the one now dwelling there is named Worthy Excellence: ‘worthy’ is a designation of virtuous conduct, and ‘excellence’ is the sense of surpassing; one whose virtuous conduct surpasses dwells within Mount Light, and again person and place are one sense.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to take ‘light’ for a mere description of a bright-looking range. This chapter everywhere displays virtue by names, and to read it only as scenery is to read it thin. Yet neither may one go too far: the ancient masters have not explained much of this mountain, and so we stop at the mutual reflection of name and sense, and do not set up doctrine on the ancients’ behalf.
Brought down to oneself: a bodhisattva with a retinue of three thousand is ever within it expounding the Dharma — light is not shone for the mountain to look at, but for men to walk by.
The Northwest · Mount Fragrant Wind
The ninth place is in the northwest, named Mount Fragrant Wind; the one now dwelling there is the bodhisattva Fragrant Light, with a retinue of five thousand, ever within it expounding the Buddha’s Dharma.
First ask: how does Fragrant Wind differ from Heaped Fragrance before it? Heaped Fragrance is a gathering and thickening; Fragrant Wind is a flowing and a reaching afar. The thickness of virtue lies in its heaping, the covering of virtue in its flowing. The sūtra sets the two mountains over against each other from afar, the one still and the one moving, and so both faces of virtue, its substance and its function, are spoken of. Chengguan makes only a single conjecture about this mountain, that it may be the western side of the Fragrant Mountain, and his words are extremely careful.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to take the words “it may be” for a sign that the ancient master was careless. Quite the reverse — to investigate what can be investigated and to leave standing what is doubtful is the rule of the commentators. If the reader takes “it may be” for a settled statement, he ruins the ancients’ sense of measure.
Brought down to oneself: a bodhisattva with a retinue of five thousand is ever here expounding the Dharma. The teaching of the fragrant wind is to let the fragrance of the Dharma blow to places where the sound of the sūtra cannot be heard.
Within the Great Sea · the Cave of Adornment
The tenth place is within the great sea, named the Cave of Adornment. Here the sūtra’s sentence pattern suddenly changes: it says only that from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt therein, and no longer says that there is now such a bodhisattva, no longer says how great the retinue, no longer says that he is ever within it expounding the Dharma.
First ask: why is the pattern abridged? Chengguan offers a clue: the Cave of Adornment is spoken with reference to the sea of the sixth place above, and so the sūtra uses the words “there is yet another” — within the great sea there is ‘also’ a place. The first nine places call the roll quarter by quarter; this one adds a further place with reference to the sea, and the momentum of the wording naturally turns brief; and from here on the twelve places in cities and towns likewise say only that they are dwelt in.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to think that not naming a bodhisattva now dwelling there amounts to there being no bodhisattva, or to the bodhisattvas being inferior. The sūtra says plainly that hosts of bodhisattvas dwell therein; it merely does not list name and number. Not to list names is in fact the nearer to this chapter’s tenet: you are not being asked to remember a few celebrated persons, but to know that everywhere there are people.
Brought down to oneself: what really holds this world up is mostly those who are not on any list.
City One · South of Pishali · Well-Dwelling Root
From here on for twelve places the sūtra turns from mountains and seas into cities and towns. The first place is south of the city of Pishali, named Well-Dwelling Root, where from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt.
First ask: why the turn from mountains and seas into cities and towns? Chengguan outlines these latter twelve places as ‘dwellings mixed among cities and towns,’ and explains their sense: they exhaust to the last bend the capacities of sentient beings, displaying that great compassion leaves nothing out, whereby one may know that there is nowhere the bodhisattvas are not. The first ten places dwell in mountains and seas, displaying the height and depth of great wisdom; the latter twelve dwell in cities and towns, displaying the compassion that does not abandon. Wisdom and compassion, the one high and the other low, are together the dwelling place of a bodhisattva.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to think that those who dwell in cities and towns are less lofty than those who dwell in the mountains. Neither the sūtra nor the commentators make such a judgement — mountains and seas can settle and can illumine, cities and towns exhaust to the last bend the capacities of beings; these are two kinds of practice, not two grades.
As for the name of the place, Well-Dwelling Root: to dwell well is to abide steadily, and the root is the base upon which one relies. Brought down to oneself — to dwell in the press of people and yet have the root unmoved is far harder to come by than to hide oneself away in the mountains.
City Two · the City of Modulo · the Cave of Fulfillment
The second place is in the city of Modulo, where there is a dwelling place named the Cave of Fulfillment, in which from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt.
First ask: what sort of place is Modulo? Li Tongxuan, explaining this city’s name, says that in this land it is rendered the City of Peacocks, and is also named Secret Canopy, and that both are names set up on account of affairs of old. This reminds us that the places listed in the sūtra were all cities and towns really existing at the time, and not made-up place-names.
Ask again: what does the name Cave of Fulfillment mean? A cave is a grotto or a chamber of stone, the shelter of one who practises; and to be named Fulfillment is spoken with regard to the virtue accomplished — to dwell in the barest of places and yet have the mind lack nothing. The sūtra adds no explanation here, and neither do we say more on its behalf.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to take ‘cave’ for a mark of bitter poverty and something to be pitied. To take a cave for one’s dwelling and to name it Fulfillment is precisely to turn the world’s whole judgement of poverty and wealth upside down.
Brought down to oneself: whether the place one dwells in can be fulfilling does not lie in the place but in the one who dwells.
City Three · the City of Juzhenna · the Dharma Seat
The third place is in the city of Juzhenna, where there is a dwelling place named the Dharma Seat, in which from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt.
First ask: whence comes this city’s name? Li Tongxuan explains that this city is also named Juchenna, and that ‘juchen’ in this land is rendered ‘a great basin’; the tradition is that in ancient times a man kept water in a great basin like a pool, and beside that basin constantly practised the arts of the seers, and constantly expounded for men the books of guarding purity and nourishing life, and that those who studied under him all took their master’s method as a surname, and the city therefore got its name. That an ancient master should tell the origin of a place-name in such detail is to have men know this: the places where bodhisattvas dwell are often just those places in the human world that have a story and a line of teachers.
Ask again: why is the place named the Dharma Seat? A Dharma seat is the seat from which the Dharma is expounded. That within one city there is a place named the Dharma Seat where bodhisattvas have long dwelt says something very plain — the expounding here has never broken off.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to think that a Dharma seat must be in the great hall of a monastery. The sūtra sets the Dharma seat upon a dwelling place within a city; where there is someone willing to speak and someone willing to hear, there is the Dharma seat.
City Four · the City of the Pure Far Shore · the Cave of Muzhenlinta
The fourth place is in the city of the Pure Far Shore, where there is a dwelling place named the Cave of Muzhenlinta, in which from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt.
First ask: what is Muzhenlinta? Li Tongxuan, explaining this name, says that Muzhenlinta in this land is rendered ‘liberation,’ and is the name of a dragon; and that ‘linta’ in this land is ‘place,’ because a dragon here heard the Dharma and attained liberation, and so it was named thereby. A dragon heard the Dharma here and attained liberation, and this place-name became a monument.
Ask again: does the city’s name, the Pure Far Shore, answer to the cave’s name? The far shore is the sense of crossing over birth-and-death, and liberation is precisely the fruit of arriving at the far shore; the city’s name and the cave’s name are the one a cause and the other a fruit, answering to each other from afar.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to take a dragon’s attaining liberation for a tale of marvels with nothing to do with oneself. The ancient master records it in order to make plain that the benefit of hearing the Dharma does not pick and choose its kind — even a dragon is thus, how much more a man.
Brought down to oneself: a place is worth remembering most often because someone really turned about there.
City Five · the Land of Molanta · Established by the Unobstructed Dragon King
The fifth place is in the land of Molanta, where there is a dwelling place named Established by the Unobstructed Dragon King, in which from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt.
First ask: where is the land of Molanta? Li Tongxuan sets down word for word here that it is not rendered — the ancient master marks it himself as a name not yet translated, and does not supply a conjecture on its behalf. This one stroke shows the commentators’ honesty best: explain what can be explained, and where it cannot be explained, say according to the fact that one does not know.
Ask again: why is the place’s name tied to a dragon king? The place is named Established by the Unobstructed Dragon King, which is to say that this dwelling place was built by a dragon king named Unobstructed. The place before was a dragon hearing the Dharma and gaining liberation; this place is a dragon establishing a place of the Way — dragons appear twice in this chapter, once as a receiver of the Dharma and once as a guardian of it.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to think that what a dragon king established could not be a dwelling place of bodhisattvas. The sūtra says plainly that hosts of bodhisattvas dwell therein; who built it is one matter and who dwells in it is another.
Brought down to oneself: one who brings a place of the Way to completion need not be one who expounds the Dharma; both sorts of merit count.
City Six · the Land of Ganputuo · Producing Loving-Kindness
The sixth place is in the land of Ganputuo, where there is a dwelling place named Producing Loving-Kindness, in which from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt.
First ask: can this land’s name be explained? Li Tongxuan likewise sets it down as not rendered. Two places in succession not rendered, and the ancient master takes it for no embarrassment — not to know and to say so is a trustworthy attitude.
Ask again: what does the place-name Producing Loving-Kindness mean? To produce is to bring forth; loving-kindness is the mind that gives joy. To name a dwelling place ‘Producing Loving-Kindness’ is to say that this is a ground where the mind of loving-kindness is brought forth. Most of the places before got their names from the shape of a range, from an appearance, or from a story; this one is named straight from a virtue, and stands out for it.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to take loving-kindness for a merely mild disposition. Loving-kindness is here spoken of as needing to be ‘produced’ — it is not a feeling one has from the outset, but a practice that must be brought forth and nourished.
Brought down to oneself: to ask whether the place one dwells in produces loving-kindness matters far more than to ask at what point of the map it lies.
City Seven · the Land of Cīnasthāna · the Cave of Nārāyaṇa
The seventh place is in the land of Cīnasthāna, where there is a dwelling place named the Cave of Nārāyaṇa, in which from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt.
First ask: where is Cīnasthāna? Li Tongxuan explains it with perfect plainness: Cīnasthāna is also called Cīna, and also Zhendan, and in this land it is rendered ‘thinking and considering,’ because the people of that country think and consider and calculate much, and it was named thereby — that is to say, the land of Han. Here the sūtra points to the very soil beneath the reader’s own feet.
Ask again: what does Nārāyaṇa mean? Li Tongxuan explains that Nārāyaṇa in this land is ‘firm and solid.’ A cave of the firm and solid, in a land of thinking and considering — a place named for its much thinking has set up within it a dwelling place named for firmness and solidity. Between the one name and the other there is a certain flavour of counteraction.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to think that the holy regions the Huayan speaks of are all in the distant west. The sūtra lists Cīnasthāna plainly and the ancient master explains it plainly as the land of Han: this quarter of ours is on the list.
Brought down to oneself: to think and consider much is no crime, but one who thinks and considers much has all the more need of a firm and solid place in which to settle.
City Eight · the Land of Shule · Mount Ox-Head
The eighth place is in the land of Shule, where there is a dwelling place named Mount Ox-Head, in which from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt.
First ask: how stands the name Shule? Li Tongxuan explains that the correct sound ought to be Qielushudanle, and that this land keeps an abbreviation of it and says only Shule. What the ancient master does here is the work of restoring a transcription, so that later men may know whence the current short form came.
Ask again: what does the name Mount Ox-Head mean? Neither the sūtra nor the ancient masters cited set up any separate explanation of this mountain, and this text therefore stops here and does not speak on their behalf. What can be investigated in a name, investigate; what cannot, do not piece out — this is the consistent measure of reading this chapter.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to think that every name must yield up a doctrine before one has read it aright. Among the twenty-two places there are those that can be explained, those not rendered, and those left in doubt, and the sūtra treats them all alike with one and the same sentence pattern: from of old, hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt therein.
Brought down to oneself: whether it can be explained or not does not hinder the fact that someone is practising there.
City Nine · the Land of Jiashemiluo · In Due Order
The ninth place is in the land of Jiashemiluo, where there is a dwelling place named In Due Order, in which from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt.
First ask: where is Jiashemiluo? Li Tongxuan explains that it was anciently called the land of Jibin, and that in this land it is rendered ‘who indeed may enter’; and he records the reason its statehood was established — that in ancient times, when no state had yet been set up there, there was a great dragon pool which men dared not approach, and afterward an arhat, seeing that the lie of the land was excellent and fit for men to dwell in, begged of the dragon room enough for a single knee; the dragon consented, and the arhat transformed his body and made it large, and his knee gradually filled the pool, and the dragon kept faith and departed; the arhat then by his spiritual power made the water of the pool dry up, and had the common folk dwell there and build their houses, and all men said that but for the holy master, who indeed could have entered this place — and the country’s name was set up from that saying.
Ask again: what does the place-name “In Due Order” mean? To be in due order is to have sequence and no confusion. The ancient masters set up no separate explanation here; read from the name alone, it says that practice has its order.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to read an affair of old as a myth and pass over its sense. The bone of this record is in the “begging room enough for a single knee” — what the holy one took was the least possible, and what he accomplished was a ground for the dwelling of the many.
City Ten · the City of Increasing Joy · the Cave of the Venerable One
The tenth place is in the city of Increasing Joy, where there is a dwelling place named the Cave of the Venerable One, in which from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt.
First ask: what do the city’s name and the place’s name severally display? The city’s name, Increasing Joy, is spoken with regard to the benefit produced; the place’s name, the Cave of the Venerable One, is spoken with regard to the person dwelling there. That a dwelling place is named for a venerable one is because there was once a man worthy of reverence dwelling within it; and that the city it stands in is named Increasing Joy — where a venerable one dwells, the joy of a whole city will increase.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to think that joy comes from surroundings and things. This city’s joy is tied to there being someone dwelling in that cave; men make a place produce joy, not the place men.
Ask again: how does this join with what the preceding chapter said? The Chapter on the Span of Life of the Tathāgata before spoke of the length of time; this chapter speaks of the pervading of places; and whether the joy of a whole city can increase falls precisely upon whether there is anyone willing to dwell long within it.
Brought down to oneself: if in the place where you are there is anyone whose joy increases because of you, then there is a cave of the venerable one there.
City Eleven · the Land of Anfulimo · Seeing the Light of the Treasury of Koṭis
The eleventh place is in the land of Anfulimo, where there is a dwelling place named Seeing the Light of the Treasury of Koṭis, in which from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt.
First ask: why is this place’s name so long? Seeing, the treasury of koṭis, the light — it is the most elaborate place-name in the chapter. Seeing is to see; the treasury of koṭis is a treasury measureless in number; the light is the mark that appears — put together it is: here may be seen the light of measureless treasure. Most of the twenty-two places get their names from an appearance or a story; this one is named straight from what is seen there.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to take the light that is seen for some outward marvel. The name says ‘seeing’ first, from which it is plain that the weight lies upon the one who can see; if the one who can see is impure, then a treasury of koṭis set before him will not become light either.
Ask again: do the ancient masters have an explanation here? The several masters cited set up no separate explanation of this land and this place, and this text according to the fact does not speak on their behalf.
Brought down to oneself: whether in one lifetime a man can see that treasury depends upon the eye, not upon the treasury.
City Twelve · the Land of Qiantuoluo · the Cave of Shanpoluo
The twelfth place is also the last place in the chapter: in the land of Qiantuoluo there is a dwelling place named the Cave of Shanpoluo, in which from of old hosts of bodhisattvas have dwelt.
First ask: what does the name Qiantuoluo mean? Li Tongxuan explains that in this land it is ‘upholding the earth,’ because in that country many worthy and holy ones dwell, and it is therefore not invaded and harmed by other countries; and by another reading ‘qiantuo’ is fragrance and ‘luo’ means tuoluo, which in this land is ‘pervading,’ that is, that within that country fragrance grows abundantly and pervades. Upholding the earth and not suffering invasion; fragrance and pervading — both senses are good.
Ask again: what is Shanpoluo? Li Tongxuan explains that Shanpoluo is the name of a fragrant flowering tree, and that beside this cave such trees grow in abundance, and it was named thereby. The chapter closes with a stone cave overgrown with fragrant flowering trees.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to take the sūtra’s breaking off here as the regret of something lost. How it comes to a close is a matter the several masters have discussed, and is to be found under Lineage as a record. Read from the sūtra’s own text: the twenty-two places once spoken, it makes no closing sigh and no general gathering-up, just as this list was never going to have a day on which it was exhausted.
Brought down to oneself: having read through to the last place, what ought to be asked is not whether there is a twenty-third, but whether the place where one stands at this moment counts as one of them.
Lineage
Which question is answered from afar — Chengguan takes this chapter to answer from afar the question about the ocean of the span of life in the preceding Chapter on the Span of Life of the Tathāgata, because bodhisattvas dwell according to the capacities they meet and their life-spans differ; and he points out plainly that the old reading which took this chapter to answer from afar the ten clauses of questioning at the opening of the second assembly differs in doctrinal intent and does not join up in the order of the text either. Fazang, for his part, takes this chapter to have two reasons for its coming: one, to answer from afar the ten clauses of questioning about the mind of rejoicing and the rest in the Hall of Universal Light; two, to display more nearly where bodhisattvas are according to the capacities they meet. The questions to which the two masters tie it are different, each with its own ground in the ordering of the outline, and both are recorded without adjudication.
The investigation of Mount Clear and Cool — Chengguan sets up here the longest passage of investigation in the chapter: he ties Mount Clear and Cool to Mount Wutai in the commandery of Yanmen in Daizhou, within which there is now the Clear and Cool Monastery, named Clear and Cool because ice lies heaped through the years, snow flies in high summer, and there has never been sweltering heat; and named Five Terraces further because five peaks rise up, with no forest on their summits, in the shape of terraces of heaped earth, and he takes the five terraces as displaying that the five wisdoms are already round and the five eyes already pure. Since he held that the sūtra’s saying only ‘the northeast’ left the wording still too loose, he cited what the Baozang tuoluoni jing says — that in the northeast of the continent of Jambu there is a country named Great Zhenna, and within it a mountain called Five Peaks, where the youth Mañjuśrī roams and dwells and expounds the Dharma for hosts of bodhisattvas — as attestation, and pronounced that these words are exact; and he further tells how in his youth he sought out this text, and how, whenever he read as far as this passage, he closed the scroll and sighed long, and thereupon went ten thousand miles without counting them and committed his life to lodging in the holy region for ten years. Fazang likewise ties Mount Clear and Cool to Mount Wutai in Daizhou, within which there is now the old Clear and Cool Monastery, named from the snow heaped there winter and summer, and he points out that of this mountain and of Mañjuśrī’s numinous responses there are three fascicles of records apart. The two readings are set side by side, recorded without adjudication.
The sense of the name Mount Zhiti — Fazang, collating the Sanskrit text, holds that this name ought properly to be Mount Zhiduo, which in this land is ‘returning to the source,’ and is of the sort of a stūpa; Li Tongxuan for his part explains Mount Zhiti as in this land ‘pure faith,’ because those who see this mountain are able to produce pure faith. The two explanations are set side by side without adjudication.
What Mount Excellent Peak is tied to — Chengguan ties this mountain to the mountain where Cloud of Virtue dwelt, which in the Jin recension is named Mount Tower-Pavilion, the abode of Poshiluo; Fazang for his part ties it to the abode of the sovereign sea-master beside the city of Tower-Pavilion on the shore of the southern sea, spoken of further on, and says that on collating the Sanskrit text it ought to be named Mount Excellent Peak. The two tyings are set side by side without adjudication.
The variants of the two recensions and the number of places — the Jin rendering, the sixty-fascicle Avataṃsaka, has this same chapter, and the speaker is likewise the bodhisattva Mind King. The mountain names of the eight quarters and the bodhisattvas now dwelling there mostly agree, while the graphs of the renderings differ from one another (Mount Where the Seers Arise against Mount of the Seers, Mount Fragrance-Gathered against Mount Heaped Fragrance, Firm Branch against Mount Zhiti, Fearless Lion Practice against Fearless Practice of Vigor); for the one place in the sea, the eighty-fascicle text has Mount Vajra, with Dharma Arising now dwelling there and a retinue of one thousand two hundred, while the sixty-fascicle text has Zhida within the four great seas, with Tanwujie now dwelling there and a retinue of twelve thousand, and the position in the order differs as well; as to the places in cities and towns, the eighty-fascicle text has twelve and the sixty-fascicle text thirteen, the sixty-fascicle text having one more, the saṃghārāma of the Golden Lamp at the town of Balianfu. Chengguan outlines the eighty-fascicle text as ten before and twelve after, twenty-two places in all; Fazang, upon the sixty-fascicle text, outlines it as the eight quarters, the four seas, and thirteen places in the several countries. All is recorded in full without adjudication; the choice between recensions belongs to the translator.
The chapter’s ending without a conclusion — Chengguan sets down that at the end of this text there is no conclusion at all, and that perhaps the scripture did not come down complete; and he says that since Jambudvīpa is thus, the remaining quarters and remaining realms and the realms of other kinds may be taken after this pattern, and the body-cloud of the Dharma realm is then neither present nor absent anywhere. Fazang, at the end of the sixty-fascicle text, sets down that what has been made clear above is the dwelling places of the bodhisattvas of this Jambudvīpa, that the remaining four continents may be taken accordingly, and so on to the remaining Sumeru worlds and the tree-shaped worlds and the rest, all taken accordingly, endlessly and endlessly. Li Tongxuan for his part says that the great intent of this one chapter is to make clear the bodhisattvas’ practice of gathering in beings, upholding them, and not cutting off the Three Jewels, and that in raising only this one Jambudvīpa it displays that the lands of the ten quarters and all the Jambudvīpas are wholly to be taken after this pattern. The three are recorded side by side, without adjudication.
Outside this chapter — Vasubandhu’s Shidi jing lun and the books that are the guiding outlines of the Huayan house are alike found to have no citation or explanation of this chapter (a mechanical check of the whole yields zero hits); it is set down as lacking according to the fact, and nothing is tied on their behalf.
品三十三 佛不思議法品The Inconceivable Dharmas of the Buddhas
全文五層 →Full five layers →心裡想一想,就有人替你問了
修行講到最後,總會撞上一個問題:佛究竟是什麼樣子?這問題問不出口——因為凡是問得出口的,都已經落在言語裡了。本品開卷寫的正是這個窘境:大會中有一些菩薩「作是念」,只在心裡打了個轉,還沒有出聲,就把十件事問了個遍——國土、本願、種性、出現、身、音聲、智慧、自在、無礙、解脫,每一件都掛著同一句:怎樣不可思議。
要留意「作是念」三字。前面幾品的請問,多是有人出列、頂禮、發問;此處沒有。澄觀點出這裡的道理:不是不敢問,是因果之間隔絕,「因德尚深,果必玄妙,故念請耳」——因位之德已經深到說不清,果位必定更玄,所以只能起念,起不了言。法藏在六十本疏中把同一問設得更細:既然第二會早已問過,何必重問?他給了三重答案:相去太遠故重新發起、前諸品同是因位而今辨果法故隔位、此是「念法悕說」而非別請。三答並存,皆古德成說。
讀者由此可以先立一個準:這一品從頭到尾在講不可思議,而它的講法不是把不可思議說明白,是讓你看見三十二道門,門門都說不盡——說不盡本身,就是答案。
世尊三業加持,青蓮華藏承力而說
念既未出聲,誰來答?經文接著寫:世尊「知諸菩薩心之所念」,隨即以神力加持、智慧攝受、光明照曜、威勢充滿——澄觀判這是「三業加故」,並說第一句是總、其餘是別,分屬意、語、身。所以佛並未親口說這一品;佛做的是加持一位菩薩,讓那菩薩替他說。
為什麼是青蓮華藏菩薩?澄觀說得極美:「果德離言,藉因顯故,因果同時故。性德無染,最超勝故,一德具含一切德故。」果位之德本身離言,須借因位之人才顯得出來;青蓮出於淤泥而不染,正表性德無染。李通玄則從智上讀:青蓮華表根本智圓明清淨無染,「藏」表根本智能成差別智。二說一從表法之潔、一從智之本末,並存不判。
而青蓮華藏所告的,是蓮華藏菩薩。澄觀又點一句:「告蓮華藏者,非同佛心,無以受佛德故。」——受話的人心地要與佛相同,才接得住佛德。這句其實是給讀者的:這一品不是講給旁觀者聽的。
一 無量住:佛住在哪裡
三十二門的第一門,先答『佛住在哪裡』。經文不列十句而列九句,句句以「住」字冠首:常住大悲、住種種身作諸佛事、住平等意轉淨法輪、住四辯才說無量法……直到住能開示無有障礙究竟之法。
容易讀錯的是把「住」讀成地點。澄觀判此門「明其常住法門」,與下一門「遍住法界」相對——所以這裡的住是常住,不是住處;佛所安住的,是大悲、是佛事、是法輪、是辯才、是甚深法界。換句話說:佛沒有一個叫做『佛住的地方』的地方,佛住在他所做的事情裡。
九句排開,第一句就是「常住大悲」。這是全品的定盤星:後面三十一門講的一切神通、力、自在、莊嚴,都從這一句出。若讀完全品只記得毛孔持世界、一念遍十方,卻忘了第一句是大悲,就把果德讀成了異能。
二 普遍法界十法:六根三業都無邊際
第二門仍答同一個「國土」之問,卻換一個角度:不是佛住在哪裡,是佛遍在哪裡。經文列身、眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意、解脫、世界、行願十者,每一者都冠「無邊際」三字。
要排一個誤解:這不是說佛有一個很大的身體。經文自己補了限定——無邊際身「普入諸趣而無染著」,無邊際清淨世界「而於其中不生染著」。遍,是無所不到而無所沾滯,不是體積大。澄觀釋此門說標中「無量是事法界,無邊是理」,二者無礙,並事事無礙法界,「並為所遍」——所遍者是四種法界,不是空間。
落到讀者身上:佛的眼耳鼻舌身意都無邊際,意謂佛的六根不是六個窗口,是一個遍法界的接觸面。後面第八自在法說眼處能作耳處佛事,種子在這裡就埋下了。
三 念念出生智:一念之間走完一生
第三門起答「本願」。經文列十句,句句是「於一念中,悉能示現無量世界」——從天來下、菩薩受生、出家學道、樹下成等正覺、轉妙法輪……八相成道的整套次第,全在一念之中。
這裡最易誤讀的是把「一念」當成很快。澄觀給了一個要緊的糾正:「然願以後得智為體,從其願智生八相等,非生智也。」——所謂念念出生智,出生的是八相,不是出生智慧;智是本已成就的願智,八相是從那智裡流出來的用。所以不是佛動作神速,是佛根本不必依時間次第去走那一生。
讀者由此可懂一件事:佛示現的降生、出家、成道,對佛而言不是履歷,是對機所現之相。八相是為看的人排出來的,不是佛自己走的路。
四 十不失時:該來的時候一定來
第四門仍答本願,換說時機:成等正覺不失時、成熟有緣不失時、授菩薩記不失時,乃至調惡眾生、現不思議神通不失時。
澄觀的釋語把這門的分寸拿捏得極準:「行止在緣,根熟化現、未熟便捨,非願不周,若機熟失時便違本願。」——佛的來與不來,繫在眾生的根熟不熟,不繫在佛的願周不周。這一句排掉兩個誤解:一是以為佛久不現身是願力有缺,二是以為佛應當隨叫隨到。未熟而強化,是失時;熟而不化,也是失時。
落到修行上,這門其實是講給等待的人聽的:所謂『佛何時來』,實答是『你何時熟』。本願從未失時,失時的從來不在那一邊。
五 無比不思議境界:一裡面有一切
第五門起答「種性」。經文十句,句句從「一」字起:一跏趺坐遍滿十方、說一義句開示一切佛法、放一光明遍照一切世界、於一身中示現一切諸身、於一處中示現一切世界、於一智中決了一切諸法。
這是華嚴最核心的一種眼目——一即一切。要排的誤解是:這不是一分為多,也不是以小見大的比喻。經文末二句給了根據:「於一念中,普緣三世佛及眾生,心無雜亂」「於一念中,與去、來、今一切諸佛體同無二」。所以一之能含一切,是因為體本無二,不是因為神力把一撐大了。澄觀判此門「體相超言念,故云不思議。下位不及,故云無比」。
讀者記一句就夠用:不是佛把一坐變得很大,是「一」本來就沒有把「一切」關在外面。
六 出生十智:知道它沒有,才生得出它
第六門仍答種性,句式全品最為奇特:十句中九句作「知一切法……無……而能出生……智」,第六句作「知一切世界無有成壞,而能出生了成壞智」——知一切法無所趣向而出生迴向願智,知一切法皆無有身而出生清淨身智,知一切法本來無二而出生能覺悟智,乃至知無生滅而出生了生滅智。
最容易讀成矛盾:既然沒有,怎麼還生得出來?澄觀點破此門所答者是法身種性:「明法身為種性也。從無性中出其智慧」,並指出十句「各二句,皆上句知性,即無性之性為能生;後句出生智用」。所以上半句不是否定,是說出所知之體無自性;下半句不是加添,是無性之性所起之用。
落到讀者:這一門是全品最深的一節,也是最實用的一節——凡真正生得出用的,都是先知其無自性的。執實了反而生不出智,只生得出見。
七 十種普入法:帶著什麼才進得去
第七門起答「出現」。經文列淨妙身普入三世、三種自在普化眾生、諸陀羅尼普能受持、四種辯才普轉法輪、平等大悲恆不捨離、甚深禪定恆普觀察……十句中八句帶「普」,唯第五「恒不捨離一切眾生」、第七「調伏眾生無有休息」二句不用「普」字。
要辨清的是:普入不是無條件地進去。細看十句的結構,前半十句中九句作「皆悉具足」某德(首句作「有淨妙身」),後半才是「普」某事——具足陀羅尼才普能受持,具足大悲才恆不捨離。所以普遍不是空的普遍,是德滿之後自然的遍。澄觀判此門「明遍現常現,非有出沒,方為真現故」——真正的出現是常現,來去出沒的那個不算。
落到修行:想要『處處都在』,先問自己具足了什麼。沒有具足而想要遍在,只是散亂。
八 難信受廣大法:微塵不大、世界不小
第八門仍答出現,題名就叫「難信受」——古德不諱言這裡的話難以入信。前七句還算好懂:摧魔、降外道、調眾生、往詣一切世界、智證法界;末三句陡然轉深:一毛孔中出現諸佛與世界微塵數等;一微塵中示現眾剎、於中轉法輪教化眾生,「而微塵不大、世界不小」。
「微塵不大、世界不小」是全品最須留意的一句。它預先堵死了一個誤解:不是微塵被撐大了,也不是世界被縮小了。若靠大小的伸縮來解釋,便落在數量上,還是思議境。經文自己給了理由——「常以證智安住法界」。相入不由改變體量,由證智所安住之處本無彼此。
讀者能從此門帶走的是一個判準:凡以放大縮小去理解華嚴的相即相入者,皆未入其門。
九 大功德離過清淨:無過的十處
第九門起答「身」問,一連五門。此門十句,句句以「離過清淨」收尾:具大威德離過清淨、於三世如來家生種族調善離過清淨、盡未來際心無所住離過清淨……
須辨的是「離過」的方向。澄觀判此門為五門之首,「總顯無過,如來三業隨智慧行故」,並說「三業等事不出於身故」。所以此處講的無過,不是行為上不犯錯,是三業全隨智慧而行,根本無起過之處。末二句尤深:入涅槃後「眾生聞名獲無量福,如佛現在功德無異」;遠在不可說世界而「若有眾生一心正念則皆得見」。
落到讀者:佛之離過,落在你這邊的效驗是——念其名、正其念,功德與佛在世無異。這不是安慰語,是此門明文。
十 究竟清淨:淨到底的十處
第十門仍答身,換「究竟」二字:往昔大願、所持梵行、離世眾惑、莊嚴國土、眷屬、種族、色身相好、法身無染、一切智智、解脫自在,一一究竟清淨。
要排一個誤解:不要把這十句讀成十件已完成的事的清單。澄觀點出此門的分寸在「究竟」二字:「明過不生,揀異因淨,故云究竟,惑障諸垢永不起故。」因位的清淨是把垢淨掉,果位的究竟清淨是垢再也不起。前者是結果,後者是體性。
他又細分十句所屬:前五是功德身淨、次二是色身、次一法身、次一智身、後一意生等身淨。可見此門仍在講身——是把身分成幾層,層層說到底。
十一 一切時十種佛事:隨時都在做的十件事
第十一門仍答身,卻是全品句式最平易的一門:專心憶念則現其前、心不調順則為說法、能生淨信必令獲無量善根……乃至安住法界能遍觀察。前四句都是「若有眾生」如何如何,後六句直說佛自身之常行。
這門的教學價值在於它把前面的高遠拉回地面。澄觀判此門「即明身之業用」,並說其列多同〈出現品〉之身相。所謂佛事,不必是放光動地;「專心憶念,則現其前」就是佛事,「大悲不捨一切眾生」就是佛事。
要排的誤解是:以為「現其前」是要看見形相。細看經文的條件只有「專心憶念」四字,未說得見色身。落到讀者:這一門是全品給初學留的門,門檻只有專心二字。
十二 無盡智海法:智慧為何用不完
第十二門仍答身,以「智海」為名:無邊法身、無量佛事、佛眼境界、難思善根、普雨甘露妙法、讚佛功德、往昔願行、盡未來際恆作佛事、了知眾生心行、福智莊嚴無能過者——十者皆「無盡智海法」。
澄觀一句便釋盡:「即如來六根三業皆智慧深廣相應故,亦別廣智身可知。」所以此門仍在說身,說的是智身——六根三業無一不與深廣之智相應。
須排的誤解:智海不是儲量大。海之為喻,取其深廣而不可竭,不取其容積。經文十者中有「往昔所修種種願行」一項——可見這海不是憑空的深,是願行積成的深。落到讀者:智慧之所以會枯,多半不是想得不夠,是願發得不夠。
十三 十種常法:什麼是佛永不改的
第十三門是答身之五門的末門。九句皆以「常」字為骨:常行諸波羅蜜、於一切法常離迷惑、常具大悲、常有十力、常轉法輪、常為眾生示成正覺、常樂調伏眾生、心常正念不二之法、化眾生已常示入於無餘涅槃。
澄觀判此門「明身中意業恒常,用無斷故」。要留意最後一句的分寸:「化眾生已,常示入於無餘涅槃」——連入涅槃都在「常」的行列裡。所以涅槃不是常的終止,是常的一項。經文自注其故:「諸佛境界無邊際故。」
須排的誤解:以為佛成佛之後諸行已畢。此門明說常行波羅蜜、常轉法輪——成佛不是修行的終點,是修行成為常態。落到讀者:真正的功夫不在做過,在成常。
十四 演說無量法門:說法的門有多少
第十四門起答「音聲」。經文列眾生界門、眾生行門、眾生業果門、化眾生門、淨眾生門、菩薩行門、菩薩願門、世界成壞劫門、菩薩深心淨佛剎門、三世諸佛次第出現門,末以「一切諸佛智門」收。
值得注意的是這十門的次第:由眾生起,經菩薩,至世界與諸佛,末歸佛智。說法之門的排序,就是從聽者所在之處往上鋪的一條路。澄觀判此門「明以音聲辯說兼答普光辯問」——音聲即辯,二者名有寬狹而義旨大同。
須排的誤解:以為佛法門之多是為了應付根性之雜。細看此十門,門門都是實有其境(眾生界確有其界、成壞劫確有其劫),不是權設。落到讀者:所謂無量法門,不是把一件事說一萬遍,是這世界本來就有一萬個真實的入口。
十五 為眾生作佛事:連沈默都算
第十五門仍答音聲,卻把「說」的範圍撐開了:示現色身作佛事、出妙音聲作佛事、有所受作佛事、無所受作佛事、以地水火風作佛事、以種種名號作佛事、以佛剎境界作佛事、嚴淨佛剎作佛事——末一句最奇:「寂寞無言為眾生作佛事」。
澄觀正就此點出此門與前門之別:前門是音聲說法,此門「明種種說法,謂六塵四大舉動施為皆能顯法成益,無非佛事。非獨音聲」。他並釋受與不受的一對:受供養是為成就施者之檀度,不受供養是令他效法少欲——一對相反的行止,各有各的教。
須排的誤解:以為不說話就是沒在教。落到讀者:真正的法音不限於音,地水火風、一舉一動、乃至寂然無言,都在說。你聽不見,多半不是它沒說。
十六 最勝法:佛何以為最勝
第十六門起答「智慧」。十句所列不是神通,是心行:大願堅固不可沮壞、盡未來劫修菩薩行不生懈倦、為調伏一眾生往不可說世界、於信於毀二種眾生大悲平等、從初發心乃至成佛終不退失菩提心、積集功德皆迴向一切智性、於諸佛所修學三業唯行佛行……末句「逮十力地」。
這一門最動人的是第三句與第四句:為了調伏一個眾生,往不可說不可說世界;對於信他的與毀他的,大悲普觀、平等無異。所謂最勝,勝在這裡,不勝在能。澄觀判此門「總明權實因果之智兼答普光最勝之問,智慧最勝故」,並指結句「住十力地」兼答佛地之問。
落到讀者:若要在自己身上找一個對得上佛的地方,別找神通,找這兩句——肯為一人走遠路,肯對毀者無二心。
十七 無障礙住:住得下的十處
第十七門仍答智慧。十句皆以「無障礙住」收:能往一切世界、能住一切世界、於一切世界行住坐臥、於一切世界演說正法、於一切世界住兜率天宮、入法界一切三世、坐法界一切道場、念念觀眾生心行以三種自在教化調伏、以一身住無量佛所及一切處利益眾生、開示無量諸佛所說正法。
澄觀一語點出此門何以繫在智慧之下:「明智慧離障,以智慧所作無礙故,一切無礙。」——無礙不是力大能破障,是智慧本來離障,故無障可礙。
須排的誤解:把「無障礙」讀成克服困難。此門十句沒有一句在講克服,全在講本自能往、本自能住。落到讀者:修行上真正的關卡從來不在外面的牆,在自己認定有牆。
十八 最勝無上莊嚴:身語意光笑法身色種族與大慈
第十八門是答智慧之三門的末門,也是全品文字最富麗的一門。十種莊嚴依次是:身莊嚴(諸相隨好)、語莊嚴(六十種音,一音五百分)、意莊嚴(十力諸大三昧十八不共)、光明莊嚴、現微笑莊嚴、法身莊嚴、常妙光明莊嚴、妙色莊嚴、種族莊嚴、大慈大悲功德莊嚴。
澄觀釋此門「即智慧成益,由內具智嚴故外具諸嚴」——外面的一切莊嚴,都是裡面智慧的溢出。他於第六法身莊嚴一節開出多重:真如出纏是法性法身、智契法界是智慧法身、「雖在世間不與世雜」以下是應化法身、「了世實性」以下是功德法身、「言語道斷」即虛空法身亦實相法身。
最不可略過的是第十——大慈大悲功德莊嚴,經文以「第一福田、無上受者」作結。九種莊嚴說到最後,落腳在能受人供養而使人得福。澄觀點得極透:「既為第一田故,受施之中更無過上。」莊嚴的終點不是好看,是能承接眾生的心。
十九 自在法:十種自在的用
第十九門起答「自在」,一連八門,是全品最大的一組。此門十種自在依次為:於一切法自在(明達句身味身、辯才無礙)、教化不失時、令世界六種震動而不惱一眾生、一念普現一切世界莊嚴、為一眾生住壽不可說劫、遍往一切如來所行之處、念念成正覺而非已覺非當覺、六根互作佛事、毛孔容一切眾生、一念現微塵數佛。
澄觀判此十「全同八地之中十種自在,但深廣不次耳」,並逐一配以法自在、心自在、勝解自在、財自在、命自在、如意自在、智自在、業自在、生自在、願自在。這是一個要緊的互讀:因位第八地已有此十名,果位再說一遍,異在深廣。
須排的誤解:第三句說能令世界震動而「未曾惱害於一眾生,其中眾生不覺不知」——自在不是為所欲為,是動而不擾。第八句六根互用,澄觀又補一句:「然非改轉,一根不變,本來具故。」不是把眼改成耳,是本來就具。落到讀者:自在之為自在,在不必費力,也在不傷人。
二十 圓滿佛法:自在之上再加圓滿
第二十門仍答自在。十一句一氣呵成:一一淨相皆具百福、成就一切佛法、一切善根、一切功德、能教化一切眾生、能為眾生作主、成就清淨佛剎、成就一切智智、成就色身相好見者獲益、具諸佛平等正法、作佛事已莫不示現入於涅槃。
前門既已說十自在,何須再說圓滿?澄觀給了理由:「謂前十自在,八地容有故,顯如來十種圓滿。又無一法不自在故,方云圓滿。」——八地菩薩已可有那十種自在,所以要再立一門,顯果位之不共;而所謂圓滿,義在無一法不自在。
須排的誤解:圓滿不是數量湊齊。末句「作佛事已,莫不示現入於涅槃」——圓滿之相,落在肯收,不落在無盡地展。落到讀者:做完了肯歇,也是圓滿的一分。
二十一 善巧方便:知它空而不廢說
第二十一門仍答自在,是全品義理最密的一門。十種善巧方便,句句同一結構:知諸法離戲論而能開示善根、知一切法無所見、各各不相知、無縛無解、無所成就,而能自在到於彼岸,真實而知並無異別、永離諸相心無所住而能悉知不亂不錯、不住三世而能演說三世諸佛出現、三業無所造作而為眾法藏、知一切法不可見非一非異而不違世間諸法、於一時中知一切時而示現晝夜劫年、恆住法界而成就無畏十辯、知一切法本無名字而隨世俗種種言說、知一切法本性寂靜非色非受非想非行非識而不壞一切諸法。
澄觀一句括之:「即於法自在,皆權實等無礙故。」——善巧之所以善巧,在於實與權兩頭都不失。他並就第八「初中後善」引《瑜伽》三善為釋:初善是聽聞時生歡喜、中善是修行時遠離二邊依中道行、後善是究竟離垢。
須排的誤解:以為知空之後說法是退步、是遷就。經文的句式恰恰相反——每一句都是先立其空、後起其用,用不從空退出來,用從空裡長出來。落到讀者:真肯放下的人才說得動話;還握著的人,說什麼都是替自己說。
二十二 十種廣大佛事:一生的每一步都是佛事
第二十二門仍答自在,篇幅為全品之冠。經文以兜率受生、降神母胎、處胎誕生居宮、捨宮出家、樹下成正覺、轉不退法輪、入王都城邑、住阿蘭若、生清淨善根之藏、入涅槃為十——正是八相成道的一生,卻每一步都標作「廣大佛事」。
要看清此門的立意,須抓經文開頭的限定:這十事「一切世間諸天及人皆不能知」,連聲聞獨覺也不能知,「唯除如來威神之力」。所以這一生在旁人看來是傳記,在此門則說:那不是經歷,那是十場說法。澄觀釋此門「明神通自在」,並說「謂八相等中皆有大用,微細相容故。以此攝物,故名佛事」。
其中最堪玩味的有三處。其一,處胎一節說「如來爾時在母胎中」即已示現初生、童子、在宮、出家、成正覺、轉法輪、入般涅槃——一生的全程在胎中已現,可見次第是為看的人排的。其二,入王都城邑一節寫入城門時「盲者得眼,聾者得耳,狂者得心,裸者得衣」——佛事落到最實處,是人的苦當下被解。其三,涅槃一節寫佛滅之後碎身為舍利、起塔、令見者念佛念法念僧,末句說諸佛「雖般涅槃,仍與眾生作不思議清淨福田」——連走都是一場佛事。
落到讀者:這一門把「佛事」的定義徹底改了。不是佛在做法事,是佛的一生每一步都在教。而讀者能學的那一步,是入城門時的那一步——所到之處,人的苦少一分。
二十三 無二行自在法:說出口就不改
第二十三門仍答自在。十句皆以「決定無二」收尾:善說授記言辭決定無二、隨順眾生心念令其意滿決定無二、現覺一切法演說其義決定無二、具足三世諸佛智慧決定無二、知三世一切剎那即一剎那、知三世一切佛剎入一佛剎、知三世一切佛語即一佛語、知諸佛與所化眾生體性平等、知世法與佛法性無差別、知三世諸佛所有善根同一善根。
澄觀把「無二」與「自在」拆開釋:「於事明審,決定無疑,故云無二。不畏他難,名為自在。」——無二是自己不疑,自在是不怕人問。他並判十句之分:初四可知,次三通「以理融相」與「事事即入」二義,次二唯理,後一有同性修、互迴向、互主伴三義。
須排的誤解:前四句講的是言行不二(說了必作、答必應機),後六句卻講剎那即一剎那、佛剎入佛剎——看似兩件事。實則同是一事:因為三世本無二體,所以說出口的與作出來的也無二。落到讀者:言行之所以會二,是因為說話的那一刻與做事的那一刻,在你心裡是兩個世界。
二十四 十住·住一切法:佛的心停在哪
第二十四門仍答自在。十句皆以「住」起:住覺悟一切法界、住大悲語、住本大願、住不捨調伏眾生、住無自性法、住平等利益、住無忘失法、住無障礙心、住恒正定心、住等入一切法不違實際相。
與第一門的「無量住」相照著讀最有意思:那裡是總標,這裡是別列;那裡答國土,這裡答自在。澄觀釋此門「明三昧自在,兼答普光三昧問。如來所住無非三昧,故遍住一切」——所以此門的「住」是定:佛的一切安住都是三昧。
須排的誤解:以為住即是不動。細看十住之中有「住不捨調伏眾生」「住平等利益」——這兩住全是動。所以住不是停下來,是心有定處而事無不作。落到讀者:定的證量不在坐得久,在做事時心還在那個地方。
二十五 知一切法盡無有餘:知到沒有剩
第二十五門仍答自在。十一句一路推開:知過去、未來、現在一切法盡無有餘,知一切言語法、一切世間道、一切眾生心、一切菩薩善根上中下分位、一切佛圓滿智及善根不增不減、一切法皆從緣起、一切世界種,末句最深——「知一切法界中如因陀羅網諸差別事盡無有餘」。
澄觀判此門「明十力自在」,說「十力智慧照境無遺故」。要看重的是收尾那句:因陀羅網是帝釋天寶網,珠珠相映、影影互含。前十句是把已知之境列盡,末一句卻說連重重無盡的相映之事也盡無有餘——這是把「盡」推到了無盡上。
須排的誤解:以為「盡知」是知識完備。經文明說「知一切法皆從緣起盡無有餘」——所知者是緣起,不是事目。落到讀者:真正的知盡,不是記住一切,是看穿一切之所從來。
二十六 十力名列與那羅延幢:一標一釋,共成一門
第二十六與第二十七兩段經文,古德判為一門。經文先列十力之名——廣大力、最上力、無量力、大威德力、難獲力、不退力、堅固力、不可壞力、一切世間不思議力、一切眾生無能動力;隨後即以「十種大那羅延幢勇健法」十段作釋;末以「此一切諸佛大那羅延幢勇健法無量無邊」作結。澄觀正是這樣科的:「文中亦三:初標、次「何者」下徵釋、三結。」
十力與那羅延幢是什麼關係?澄觀說:「十力是別名,大那羅延等是總稱故。」十力是十個名,那羅延幢是總的稱呼。至於配屬,他先錄古德之說——把標中十力依次配下面十段——隨即指出其失:如此則「令別中一門不攝前十、不成百門,亦令餘門無廣大義」;他自出逆次之配(第一段配不可動力,第二段配不可思,第三段配不壞……)。二說並錄,誌之不判。
落到讀者:這裡有一個讀法的示範。名相之間的配屬本可以有多解,古德之間並不諱言異說;重要的不是誰配得對,是要看清標與釋原是一事,不可拆成兩門去讀。
二十七 那羅延幢十段:勇健之力究竟勇健在哪
十段勇健法依次是:身不可壞命不可斷、一毛孔持諸世界盡未來劫、一念起不可說步而心常在定、一坐食已結跏趺坐經前後際劫、一身化現無數頭舌轉法輪無有窮盡、德相莊嚴降魔不動、有無礙音遍十方無能為障、心無障礙同一體性、同一法身而列二十五身、等悟等修一切諸佛法。
十段之中,最須讀出眼目的有三。其一,第一段說金剛如須彌遍三千大千一時俱下而佛「乃至一毛亦不搖動」,末句卻轉到眾生身上:「若有眾生為佛所持及佛所使,尚不可害,況如來身!」——不壞之力的證據,落在被護的人身上。其二,第二段以虛空為喻:「譬如虛空普持一切遍法界中所有世界而無勞倦」——持而不勞,是因為根本不曾與所持者相對。澄觀就此說「以雖持多大山身心無勞損故」。其三,第九段列二十五身,澄觀判之:「十身圓融同一法界之身,不可配於報化,故云最上微密。」——這二十五個名字不是二十五種身,是同一法身的二十五個面。
須排的誤解:把這十段讀成佛的體能極限。經文自己給了防線——第三段說「心常在定無有散亂」,第八段說「心無障礙……了境空寂,不生妄想」。勇健之力的體是定與空寂,不是勁。落到讀者:真正壞不了的,從來不是硬,是不與之相對。
二十八 決定法:必定如此的十事
第二十八門起答「無礙」。十句皆以「定」字為骨:定從兜率壽盡下生、定示受生處胎十月、定厭世俗樂求出家、決定坐於菩提樹下成等正覺、定於一念悟一切法、定能應時轉妙法輪、定能隨所種善根應時說法授記、定能應時作佛事、定能為成就菩薩授記別、定能一念普答一切眾生所問。
澄觀在此門下了一個要緊的限:「一明所作決定無能為礙,此約一類世界故云決定,於異類界未必定然。又約佛定能為,故云決定耳。」——所謂決定,一是就同一類世界說,二是就佛必能作說;不是說十方一切世界的佛都得照這個樣子走一遍。
這是全品最容易讀死的一門,古德先替讀者鬆了扣。落到讀者:八相是決定的樣式,不是決定的鎖。凡見一種樣式便以為理當如此者,多半是把應機讀成了必然。
二十九 速疾法:見佛的人快得的十益
第二十九門仍答無礙,全門十句中八句以「若有見者,速……」為式,第六作「若已發菩提心而得見者」、第七作「若未入正位而得見者」:速得遠離一切惡趣、速得圓滿殊勝功德、速能成就廣大善根、速得往生淨妙天上、速能除斷一切疑惑、已發心者速成廣大信解永不退轉而未發心者速發菩提心、未入正位者速入正位、速能清淨世出世間一切諸根、速得除滅一切障礙、速能獲得無畏辯才。
澄觀釋此門「明令他無礙。如如意寶見速獲益,而薄福不覩」,並把十句分為五對:離惡趣與圓勝德、成善因與感樂果、除疑惑與滿大心、始入位與終清淨、淨二礙與具四辯。
須排的誤解:以為「見」是眼見。此門與第十一門「專心憶念,則現其前」相照即明——見者是心所觸,非必色相所對。且古德補了一句「而薄福不覩」:如意寶就在那裡,薄福的人當面不見。落到讀者:不是佛難見,是見的條件在自己這一邊。
三十 應常憶念清淨法:菩薩該常掛在心上的十事
第三十門是答無礙之三門的末門,也是全品唯一一門明白對菩薩說話的:一切諸佛過去因緣、清淨勝行、滿足諸度、成就大願、積集善根、已具梵行、現成正覺、色身無量、神通無量、十力無畏——十者「一切菩薩應常憶念」。
澄觀釋此門「舉佛無二礙,勸物念持」——舉出佛的無礙,是為了勸人憶念受持。
須排的誤解:以為憶念是懷想。細看十事的排序:從佛的過去因緣起,經勝行、諸度、大願、善根、梵行,才到現成正覺與色身神通十力——前六件全是因位之事。所以所念者不是佛的果,是佛怎麼來的。落到讀者:念佛而只念其光明相好,念的是結果;連他當初怎麼發願怎麼積善根一併念了,才是此門所說的憶念。
三十一 一切智住:一念之中盡知眾生
第三十一門起答「解脫」,是最後三門的第一門。十句皆以「於一念中」起:悉知三世一切眾生心心所行、悉知所集諸業及業果報、悉知所宜以三種輪教化調伏、盡知所有心相而普現佛興、普隨心樂欲解示現說法、悉知心之所樂為現神力、遍一切處示現出興而為說佛身不可取著、普至法界一切處一切眾生彼彼諸道、隨有憶念者無不往應、悉知解欲為現無量色相。
澄觀判此門「明智障解脫。智安事理,故名為住。由離障故,一切能知」——所以此門的「住」不是安住不動,是智慧安於事理;因為離了智障,才一切能知。
十句之中,第七句尤要:普現出興之後緊接一句「為說佛身不可取著」。剛剛現身,隨即說此身不可執——現與不執同時,這才是解脫。落到讀者:凡見一相而執一相者,佛雖現前,仍是障。
三十二 佛三昧:恆在正定而遍一切處
第三十二門仍答解脫。十句同一句式,六句作「恒在正定,於一念中遍一切處」,四句(第三·八·九·十)作「恒住正定,於一念中遍一切處」,而後各說所作——廣說妙法、說無我際、普入三世、普入十方廣大佛剎、普現無量佛身、隨心解現身語意、說一切法離欲真際、演說緣起自性、示現世出世間廣大莊嚴、令眾生通達佛法無量解脫究竟到於無上彼岸。
澄觀釋此門「明定障解脫。由離障故,用廣為無量,體深不可思議故」,並指出此十「各先明在定、後一念遍用」——每一句都是前半在定、後半起用。
須排的誤解:以為入定與作用是兩段時間。此門的句式已經把答案寫在結構裡:不是先定後出定而用,是恒在定中而用遍一切處。落到讀者:功夫成片的標記,不是能入多久,是動用之時定未曾離。
三十三 無礙解脫:一粒微塵中現一切
品之末門仍答解脫。十句皆「能於一塵現……」:現不可說不可說諸佛出興於世、現諸佛轉淨法輪、現眾生受化調伏、現諸佛國土、現菩薩授記、現去來今一切諸佛、現去來今諸世界種、現去來今一切神通、現去來今一切眾生、現去來今一切佛事。
澄觀釋此門「明業用解脫智」,並引論語為證:「菩薩有不思議解脫,諸佛有無礙解脫,所作無障,脫拘礙故,故各於一塵頓為微細作用。」——菩薩之解脫尚名不思議,諸佛之解脫則名無礙;分野在「所作無障」。
全品以此門收,是有講究的。開卷十問的末一問正是解脫,收處便答解脫;而所答者不是離開什麼,是能在一粒微塵中現出三世一切。澄觀又於品末注意到本品「文少結束,似經來未盡」——這一品沒有常見的結頌收束,他判為「或顯佛德無盡故」。
落到讀者:讀完三十三門,若問佛的解脫究竟是什麼——此門的答案是,不必到別處去,一粒微塵裡三世都現得完。所謂不可思議,並不在遠處。
承衍
本品之定位,繫在一個古德早已設過的問上。智儼在《十玄門》中自問:〈佛不思議法品〉等既然明的是果德,為什麼得在因門之會裡說?他自答:這些雖然是果德,卻是『對緣而辨的果』,不是究竟圓寂之果,所以得與因門同在一會裡說。這一問一答,把本品放在了因會而說果德的位置上:所說是對機而辨的果,不是究竟圓寂之果——本品之所以能在重會普光明殿裡講,理據在此。
三十二門何以成為「不思議」之名?古德二家所說相通而語異。澄觀說本品「略顯三十二門,門皆具十,有三百二十德,以顯無盡」,又於品末總收一句:「既隨一門皆答十問,則包含該攝,是以名不思議。」李通玄則以帝網說之,稱這三十二門為「無量普遍周無礙總別同異成壞自在因陀羅網門」,並同得三百二十之數。前者從門門互含說,後者以六相與帝網之名說——二家並錄,不判高下。而六相之名(總別同異成壞)出於十地品初地第四大願,本品經文並未自舉此名,是古德以彼讀此,屬讀法之承,誌錄之。
釋名一事,三家亦各成一軌。法藏說「如來果之法,逈超言慮,故以為名」,澄觀承之而作「如來果法逈超言慮,故以為名」——二師同從言慮不及立義。李通玄則另起一路:「情識想不能及,故不思……識滅情昧,正智現前,名為不思議」——從識與智的對揀立義。同一品名,一從所詮之超言,一從能知之轉識成智,並存不判。
本品與前後之相承亦有明文。澄觀判此下五品為一組:本品總明佛德體用,〈如來十身相海〉〈如來隨好光明功德〉別顯勝德之相與好,後二品別明用益;他於品末說「相海等,猶答前問故」——本品未盡之勢,直貫下品。而本品十種自在法,古德判為「全同八地之中十種自在,但深廣不次耳」——因位第八地已列此十名,果位再列一遍,異只在深廣。兩處對讀,「深廣」二字才落得實。
至於本品在論典中的承衍,須據實記其闕:世親《十地經論》唯釋十地品,於本品無涉;法藏《華嚴經旨歸》、《成唯識論》、《攝大乘論本》皆無引本品之文;《華嚴一乘教義分齊章》之相關命中皆屬大正藏異本校記,非賢首本文之義理引證。零命中亦是誠實的結果——本品之承衍,主要在華嚴一宗自身的判教與疏釋之中,不在論軸。
A Thought Stirs in the Mind, and Someone Has Already Asked It for You
Carried far enough, practice always runs into one question: what, after all, is a buddha like? The question cannot be got out of the mouth — because whatever can be got out of the mouth has already fallen into speech. What the chapter writes at its opening is precisely this strait: among the great assembly there were bodhisattvas who “thought thus,” and merely by a turn taken in the mind, before a sound was uttered, ten matters were asked through and through — lands, original vows, lineage-nature, appearing, body, voice, wisdom, mastery, unobstructedness, liberation — and every one of them hung upon the same phrase: how is it inconceivable.
The three words “thought thus” deserve notice. In the requests of the earlier chapters someone usually steps out of the ranks, bows his head, and asks; here there is none of that. Chengguan points out the principle at work: it is not that they dared not ask, but that cause and fruit are sundered, and “the virtue of the cause is already deep, and the fruit must be more mysterious still, and therefore the request is made in thought alone” — the virtue of the position of the cause is already too deep to be told, and the position of the fruit must be more mysterious yet, so that a thought can be raised and speech cannot. Fazang, in his commentary on the sixty-fascicle recension, sets the same question more finely: since it was already asked in the second assembly, why ask again? He gives three answers: the distance is too great and so it is raised anew; the earlier chapters were alike of the position of the cause while here the dharmas of the fruit are set forth, so the positions are sundered; and this is “holding the dharma in thought and longing for it to be spoken,” not a separate request. The three answers stand together, and all are the settled teachings of the ancient worthies.
From this the reader may set up a standard at the outset: this chapter speaks from beginning to end of the inconceivable, and its way of doing so is not to make the inconceivable plain but to let you see thirty-two gates, gate after gate with no exhausting what is said — and that it cannot be exhausted is itself the answer.
The World-Honored One Empowers in the Three Activities, and Blue-Lotus Treasury Speaks Sustained by That Power
The thought was never uttered; who then answers? The text goes on: the World-Honored One “knew what the bodhisattvas were thinking in their minds,” and thereupon empowered with spiritual power, gathered in with wisdom, illumined with light, and filled with majestic force — Chengguan judges this to be “the empowering in the three activities,” and says that the first phrase is the general and the rest are the particulars, belonging severally to mind, speech, and body. So the Buddha did not speak this chapter with his own mouth; what the Buddha did was to empower one bodhisattva and let that bodhisattva speak for him.
Why Blue-Lotus Treasury Bodhisattva? Chengguan says it most beautifully: “the fruit-virtues are apart from speech and are set forth by borrowing the cause, and cause and fruit are simultaneous; and the virtue of the nature is undefiled and most surpassing, and one virtue contains all virtues.” The virtue of the position of the fruit is of itself apart from speech, and must borrow a person of the position of the cause to be set forth at all; and the blue lotus, coming out of the mud undefiled, precisely signifies the undefiledness of the virtue of the nature. Li Tongxuan reads it instead from the side of wisdom: the blue lotus signifies the fundamental wisdom, round, bright, pure, and undefiled, and “treasury” signifies that the fundamental wisdom is able to complete the differentiating wisdom. One reading takes the purity of the symbol, the other the root and branch of wisdom; both stand, and no judgment is passed.
And the one whom Blue-Lotus Treasury addresses is Lotus Treasury Bodhisattva. Chengguan adds one further remark: “if one’s mind were not the same as the Buddha’s, there would be no receiving the virtues of a buddha.” The one addressed must be of the same ground of mind as the Buddha before he can catch what is handed him. That sentence is in truth for the reader: this chapter is not spoken for onlookers.
1. The Measureless Abidings: Where a Buddha Abides
The first of the thirty-two gates answers first of all where a buddha abides. The text does not list ten phrases but nine, each with the graph “abide” at its head: abiding always in great compassion, abiding in doing the deeds of a buddha with bodies of every kind, abiding in turning the pure wheel of the Dharma with an impartial mind, abiding in expounding measureless dharmas with the four kinds of eloquence — and so on down to abiding in being able to reveal for sentient beings that ultimate dharma which is without obstruction.
What is easily misread is to take “abide” for a place. Chengguan judges this gate to “make clear the gate of the Dharma of their constant abiding,” set over against the next gate, “abiding throughout the Dharma realm” — so the abiding here is constancy, not a dwelling place; what a buddha abides in is great compassion, is the deeds of a buddha, is the wheel of the Dharma, is eloquence, is the most profound Dharma realm. To put it another way: a buddha has no place called ‘the place where the Buddha lives’; a buddha lives inside the things he does.
Nine phrases are laid out, and the first is “abiding always in great compassion.” This is the fixed star of the whole chapter: all the spiritual penetrations, powers, masteries, and adornments of the thirty-one gates that follow come out of that one phrase. If, having read the chapter through, one remembers only pores that hold worlds and a single thought that pervades the ten directions, and forgets that the first phrase is great compassion, then one has read the fruit-virtues as a set of uncanny abilities.
2. The Ten Dharmas Pervading the Dharma Realm: The Six Faculties and the Three Activities, All Without Bound
The second gate still answers the same question about the lands, but from another side: not where a buddha abides, but where a buddha pervades. The text lists ten — body, eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, mind, liberation, worlds, and practices and vows — and each of them is crowned with the words “without bound.”
One misunderstanding must be cleared away: this is not saying that a buddha has a very large body. The text supplies its own qualification — the body without bound “enters everywhere into the six destinies without defilement or attachment,” and the pure worlds without bound are such that “within them he gives rise to no defilement or attachment.” To pervade is to reach everywhere without sticking anywhere; it is not bulk. Chengguan, explaining this gate, says that in the heading “the measureless is the Dharma realm of phenomena, and the boundless is the principle,” and that the two are unobstructed, together with the Dharma realm in which phenomena and phenomena are unobstructed, and “all of these are what is pervaded” — what is pervaded is the fourfold Dharma realm, not space.
Brought home to the reader: that a buddha’s eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind are all without bound means that a buddha’s six faculties are not six windows but one surface of contact pervading the Dharma realm. When the eighth of the dharmas of mastery below says that the sense-field of the eye can do the deeds of a buddha of the sense-field of the ear, the seed of it is planted here.
3. The Wisdom That Brings Forth Thought after Thought: A Whole Life Walked through within a Single Thought
The third gate begins to answer the question about the original vows. The text lists ten phrases, each of them “within a single thought, able to manifest in measureless worlds” — the descent from the heavens, a bodhisattva’s taking birth, leaving the household life to study the path, accomplishing perfect awakening beneath the tree, turning the subtle wheel of the Dharma — the entire sequence of the eight aspects of the accomplishing of the path, all within a single thought.
What is most easily misread here is to take “a single thought” for great speed. Chengguan gives an important correction: “yet the vow has subsequently attained wisdom for its substance, and from that wisdom of vow the eight aspects and the rest are born; it is not that wisdom is born.” What the wisdom that brings forth thought after thought brings forth is the eight aspects, not wisdom; the wisdom is the already accomplished wisdom of vow, and the eight aspects are the function that flows out of that wisdom. So it is not that a buddha moves with miraculous speed, but that a buddha simply need not walk that life through in the sequence of time.
From this the reader may understand one thing: the birth, the leaving of home, and the awakening that a buddha manifests are, for the buddha, not a curriculum vitae but marks manifested to fit the occasion. The eight aspects are laid out for those who are watching; they are not a road the buddha himself walked.
4. The Ten Not Missing the Time: What Ought to Come Surely Comes
The fourth gate still answers the original vows, shifting to the matter of timing: not missing the time in accomplishing perfect awakening, not missing the time in ripening those who have the affinity, not missing the time in conferring the prediction upon bodhisattvas, and on to not missing the time in taming evil beings and manifesting inconceivable spiritual penetrations.
Chengguan’s gloss holds the measure of this gate with great exactness: “going and stopping lie with the conditions: when the faculties are ripe he transforms and appears, and when they are not yet ripe he sets it aside — it is not that the vow is not all-encompassing; but if the occasion is ripe and the time is missed, that would run counter to the original vow.” Whether a buddha comes or does not come hangs upon whether the faculties of sentient beings are ripe, not upon whether the buddha’s vow is complete. That one sentence clears away two misunderstandings: first, that a buddha’s long absence means some defect in the power of the vow; second, that a buddha ought to come whenever called. To force the transformation before ripeness is to miss the time; to withhold it after ripeness is also to miss the time.
Brought home to practice, this gate is in truth spoken for those who wait: to the question ‘when will the Buddha come,’ the real answer is ‘when will you be ripe.’ The original vow has never missed its time, and the missing of time has never been on that side.
5. The Incomparable and Inconceivable Realms: Within One There Is All
The fifth gate begins to answer the question about the lineage-nature. The text has ten phrases, each beginning from the word “one”: sitting once cross-legged and filling the ten directions, speaking one phrase of the meaning and revealing all the dharmas of a buddha, sending forth one light and illumining all worlds, within one body manifesting all bodies, within one place manifesting all worlds, within one wisdom deciding and knowing all dharmas.
This is one of the most central of the eyes of the Avataṃsaka — one is all. The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: it is not one divided into many, nor is it a simile of seeing the great in the small. The last two phrases of the text give the ground: “within a single thought, taking as their object universally the buddhas and the sentient beings of the three times, and yet their minds are not disordered”; “within a single thought, of one substance with all the buddhas past, future, and present, without duality.” That one can contain all is because the substance is from the first without duality, not because some spiritual power has stretched the one out large. Chengguan judges this gate to be such that “its substance and mark transcend speech and thought, and hence it says inconceivable; the lower positions do not reach it, and hence it says incomparable.”
One sentence is enough for the reader to keep: it is not that a buddha makes one sitting very large, but that “one” never shut “all” outside itself in the first place.
6. Bringing Forth Ten Kinds of Wisdom: Knowing That It Is Not There Is What Makes It Possible to Bring It Forth
The sixth gate still answers the lineage-nature, and its sentence-form is the strangest in the chapter: nine of its ten phrases run “knowing that all dharmas are without … and yet able to bring forth the wisdom of …,” while the sixth runs “knowing that all worlds have neither forming nor decay, and yet able to bring forth the wisdom that fully understands forming and decay” — knowing that all dharmas have no place toward which they tend and bringing forth the wisdom of dedicating and directing the vow, knowing that all dharmas have no body and bringing forth the wisdom of the pure body, knowing that all dharmas are from the first without duality and bringing forth the wisdom that awakens others, and so on to knowing that there is neither arising nor ceasing and bringing forth the wisdom that fully understands arising and ceasing.
The easiest way to misread this is as a contradiction: if it is not there, how is it brought forth? Chengguan breaks the difficulty open by saying that what this gate answers is the lineage-nature of the dharma-body: “it makes clear that the dharma-body is the lineage-nature. Out of what has no nature its wisdom comes forth,” and he points out that the ten phrases “are each in two phrases: the upper phrase in every case knows the nature — the nature that is no nature being what is able to give birth; the latter phrase brings forth the function of wisdom.” So the first half of each phrase is not a denial but a statement that the substance known has no nature of its own; and the second half is not an addition but the function that arises from that natureless nature.
Brought home to the reader: this is the deepest section of the chapter and also the most practical — whatever truly brings forth a function does so only after its lack of intrinsic nature is known. Grasp a thing as real and no wisdom comes of it; only opinions do.
7. The Ten Dharmas of Universal Entering: What One Must Bring in Order to Get In
The seventh gate begins to answer the question about appearing. The text lists a pure and subtle body entering everywhere into the three times, three kinds of mastery teaching sentient beings everywhere, the dhāraṇīs able everywhere to receive and uphold, the four kinds of eloquence turning everywhere the wheel of the Dharma, impartial great compassion never abandoning, the most profound meditative concentration always contemplating everywhere — eight of the ten phrases carry the word “everywhere,” only the fifth, “never abandoning any sentient being,” and the seventh, “taming sentient beings without rest,” doing without it.
What must be made clear is this: universal entering is not getting in unconditionally. Look closely at the structure of the ten phrases: in the first half of each, nine of the ten say “are complete in” such and such a virtue (the first says “have a pure and subtle body”), and only then does the second half say “everywhere” do such and such — complete in the dhāraṇīs and therefore able everywhere to receive and uphold; complete in great compassion and therefore never abandoning. Pervasiveness is not an empty pervasiveness; it is what naturally follows upon fullness of virtue. Chengguan judges this gate to “make clear that appearing is constant appearing, without any coming out and going in — only so is it truly appearing”: real appearing is constant appearing, and the sort that comes and goes does not count.
Brought home to practice: before wishing to be ‘everywhere at once,’ ask what you are complete in. To want pervasiveness without completeness is only distraction.
8. The Vast Dharmas Hard to Believe and Accept: The Dust Mote Does Not Grow Large, the Worlds Do Not Grow Small
The eighth gate still answers appearing, and its very name is “hard to believe and accept” — the ancient worthies do not conceal that what is said here is hard to take on faith. The first seven phrases are still manageable: crushing the demons, subduing the outsiders, taming beings, going to all worlds, realizing and entering the Dharma realm with wisdom. The last three turn abruptly deep: within a single pore there appear buddhas and worlds equal in number to the dust motes; within a single dust mote a multitude of lands are manifested and within them the wheel of the Dharma is turned and sentient beings taught, and yet “the dust mote does not grow large and the worlds do not grow small.”
“The dust mote does not grow large and the worlds do not grow small” is the one sentence in the chapter most to be watched. It blocks a misunderstanding in advance: it is not that the mote has been stretched out, nor that the worlds have been shrunk down. To explain it by expansion and contraction is to fall back upon quantity, which is still a realm that can be thought. The text supplies its own reason — “they abide always in the Dharma realm with the wisdom of realization.” Mutual entering does not come about by any change of bulk; it comes about because the place where the wisdom of realization abides has from the first no this and that.
What the reader can carry away from this gate is a standard: whoever would understand the mutual identity and mutual entering of the Avataṃsaka by enlarging and shrinking has not entered its gate.
9. The Great Merits, Apart from Faults and Pure: Ten Places without Fault
The ninth gate begins to answer the question about the body, and five gates run on together. This gate has ten phrases, each closing with “apart from faults and pure”: complete in great majestic virtue, apart from faults and pure; born in the house of the tathāgatas of the three times with a family gentle and good, apart from faults and pure; to the end of the future dwelling nowhere in mind, apart from faults and pure — and so on.
What must be distinguished is the direction of “apart from faults.” Chengguan judges this gate to stand at the head of the five, “setting forth in general the absence of fault, since the three activities of the Tathāgata proceed in accord with wisdom,” and says that “the matters of the three activities and the rest do not go beyond the body.” So the absence of fault spoken of here is not a matter of not erring in conduct; it is that the three activities wholly proceed in accord with wisdom, so that there is no place from which a fault could arise. The last two phrases are deeper still: after entering nirvāṇa, “sentient beings who hear his name obtain measureless merit, no different from the merit obtained while the Buddha was present in the world”; and though far off in unspeakable worlds, “if there are sentient beings who single-mindedly hold him in right recollection, they all obtain sight of him.”
Brought home to the reader: a buddha’s being apart from faults has, on your side, this as its effect — recollect his name, make your recollection right, and the merit is no different from the merit of his being in the world. This is not a consolation; it is the express text of this gate.
10. Ultimate Purity: Ten Places Pure to the Very End
The tenth gate still answers the body, changing the words to “ultimate”: the great vows of former times, the pure conduct upheld, being apart from the delusions of the world, the adorning of the lands, the retinue, the family, the form-body with its marks and signs, the undefiled dharma-body, the wisdom of all-knowing wisdom, and liberation and mastery — each of them ultimately pure.
One misunderstanding must be cleared away: do not read these ten phrases as a checklist of ten finished tasks. Chengguan points out that the measure of this gate lies in the two words “ultimately”: “it makes clear that faults do not arise; distinguishing it from the purity of the cause, it says ultimate, since the defilements of delusion and obstruction never rise again.” The purity of the position of the cause is the washing away of defilement; the ultimate purity of the position of the fruit is that the defilement never rises again. The former is a result; the latter is a nature.
He further divides out what the ten phrases belong to: the first five are the purity of the body of merit, the next two of the form-body, the next one of the dharma-body, the next one of the body of wisdom, and the last of the mind-made body and the rest. Plainly this gate is still speaking of body — it is dividing the body into layers and carrying each layer through to the end.
11. Ten Deeds of a Buddha at All Times: The Ten Things Done at Every Moment
The eleventh gate still answers the body, and yet it is the plainest of all the gates of the chapter in its sentence-form: if a being single-mindedly holds him in recollection, he appears before him; if a being’s mind is unruly, he expounds the Dharma for him; if a being can give rise to pure faith, he surely causes him to obtain measureless roots of good — and on to abiding in the Dharma realm and being able to contemplate it everywhere. The first four phrases are all “if there are sentient beings” who do thus and so; the latter six speak directly of the buddha’s own constant conduct.
The teaching value of this gate is that it pulls what has gone before back down to the ground. Chengguan judges this gate to “make clear the activity and function of the body,” and says its list largely agrees with the marks of the body in the Chapter on the Appearance of the Tathāgata. What is called a deed of a buddha need not be the sending forth of light and the shaking of the earth; “single-mindedly hold him in recollection, and he appears before him” is a deed of a buddha, and “great compassion that does not forsake a single sentient being” is a deed of a buddha.
The misunderstanding to be cleared away is this: to suppose that “appears before him” means that a form must be seen. Look closely and the only condition the text gives is the four words “single-mindedly hold in recollection”; it does not say that a form-body is seen. Brought home to the reader: this gate is the door the chapter leaves open for beginners, and the threshold is only the word single-minded.
12. The Dharmas of the Inexhaustible Ocean of Wisdom: Why Wisdom Cannot Be Used Up
The twelfth gate still answers the body, taking “the ocean of wisdom” for its name: the dharma-body without bound, measureless deeds of a buddha, the realm of the buddha-eye, roots of good hard to reckon, the raining down everywhere of the sweet-dew subtle Dharma, the praising of the merits of a buddha, the vows and practices cultivated in former times, the doing of the deeds of a buddha always to the end of the future, the knowing of the mental conduct of beings, and the adornment of merit and wisdom that none can surpass — all ten are “dharmas of the inexhaustible ocean of wisdom.”
Chengguan explains it exhaustively in a single sentence: “that is, the six faculties and three activities of the Tathāgata all correspond to a wisdom deep and broad; and it is also the body of wisdom set forth at length in particular, as may be known.” So this gate is still speaking of body, and the body it speaks of is the body of wisdom — not one of the six faculties or three activities but corresponds to a wisdom deep and broad.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: the ocean of wisdom is not a large reserve. The ocean as a simile is taken for its depth and breadth that cannot be drained, not for its capacity. Among the ten items of the text is “the vows and practices of every kind cultivated in former times” — plainly this ocean is not deep out of nowhere; it is a depth built up by vow and practice. Brought home to the reader: when wisdom runs dry, it is usually not that one has not thought enough, but that one has not vowed enough.
13. The Ten Constant Dharmas: What a Buddha Never Alters
The thirteenth gate is the last of the five that answer the body. Nine phrases have the word “constantly” for their spine: constantly cultivating the perfections, constantly apart from delusion with regard to all dharmas, constantly complete in great compassion, constantly possessing the ten powers, constantly turning the wheel of the Dharma, constantly manifesting for beings the accomplishing of right awakening, constantly delighting in taming beings, the mind constantly in right recollection of the non-dual dharma, and, having finished teaching beings, constantly manifesting entering the nirvāṇa in which no basis remains.
Chengguan judges this gate to “make clear that the activity of mind within the body is constant, its function being unbroken.” The measure of the last phrase deserves notice: “having finished teaching sentient beings, constantly manifesting entering the nirvāṇa in which no basis remains” — even entering nirvāṇa stands in the ranks of the constant. So nirvāṇa is not the ending of the constant; it is one item of the constant. The text glosses its own reason: “because the realm of the buddhas is without bound.”
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: to suppose that after buddhahood a buddha’s practices are all finished. This gate says expressly that he constantly cultivates the perfections and constantly turns the wheel of the Dharma — buddhahood is not the terminus of practice; it is practice become constant. Brought home to the reader: the real work lies not in having done it, but in its becoming constant.
14. Expounding Measureless Gates of the Dharma: How Many Gates the Speaking Has
The fourteenth gate begins to answer the question about the voice. The text lists the gate of the realm of sentient beings, the gate of the conduct of sentient beings, the gate of the deeds and fruits of sentient beings, the gate of delivering beings, the gate of purifying beings, the gate of the practice of the bodhisattvas, the gate of the vows of the bodhisattvas, the gate of the kalpas of the forming and decay of worlds, the gate of the bodhisattvas’ purifying of buddha-lands with the deep mind, and the gate of the successive appearing of the buddhas of the three times, closing with the gate of the wisdom of all the buddhas.
The order of these ten gates is worth noticing: it begins from sentient beings, passes through the bodhisattvas, reaches the worlds and the buddhas, and ends by returning to the wisdom of a buddha. The ordering of the gates of the expounding of the Dharma is a road laid upward from where the hearer stands. Chengguan judges this gate to “make clear that by voice he sets forth in eloquence, and so also answers the question about eloquence at the Hall of Universal Light” — voice is eloquence, the two names being of narrower and wider compass while the drift of the sense is much the same.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: to suppose that the many gates of the Buddha-dharma exist merely to cope with the mixture of capacities. Look closely at these ten gates and each of them genuinely has its own realm (the realm of sentient beings really is a realm; the kalpas of forming and decay really are kalpas); they are not provisional contrivances. Brought home to the reader: measureless gates of the Dharma does not mean saying one thing ten thousand times; it means that this world has ten thousand real entrances to begin with.
15. Doing the Deeds of a Buddha for Sentient Beings: Even Silence Counts
The fifteenth gate still answers the voice, and yet it stretches the compass of “speaking” wide open: manifesting a form-body and doing the deeds of a buddha, sending forth a subtle voice and doing the deeds of a buddha, having that which is received and doing the deeds of a buddha, having nothing that is received and doing the deeds of a buddha, taking earth, water, fire, and wind and doing the deeds of a buddha, taking names of every kind, taking the realms of the buddha-lands, adorning and purifying buddha-lands — and the last phrase is the strangest: “taking silence without words and doing the deeds of a buddha for sentient beings.”
Chengguan points out precisely here the difference between this gate and the one before: the earlier gate is the expounding of the Dharma by voice, while this gate “makes clear the expounding of the Dharma in every kind of way — that is, the six dusts, the four great elements, movement and gesture, all are able to set forth the Dharma and accomplish benefit, and there is none that is not a deed of a buddha; not voice alone.” He also explains the pair of receiving and not receiving: to receive offerings is to bring the giver’s perfection of giving to accomplishment, and not to receive them is to let others take the lesson of few desires — a pair of opposite courses of action, each with its own teaching.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: to suppose that where there is no speaking there is no teaching. Brought home to the reader: the true sound of the Dharma is not confined to sound; earth, water, fire, and wind, a single gesture, and even silence without words are all speaking. If you do not hear it, it is usually not that nothing was said.
16. The Most Surpassing Dharmas: Wherein a Buddha Is Most Surpassing
The sixteenth gate begins to answer the question about wisdom. What its ten phrases list are not spiritual penetrations but movements of the mind: great vows firm and unbreakable, cultivating the bodhisattva practice to the end of the kalpas of the future without sloth or weariness, going to unspeakable worlds for the sake of taming one single being, contemplating with impartial great compassion the two kinds of beings, those who believe and those who slander, never losing the mind of awakening from the first giving rise to it until buddhahood, amassing merit and dedicating and directing it all to the nature of all-knowing wisdom, cultivating the three activities in the presence of the buddhas and practicing only what a buddha practices — and the last phrase, “reaching the ground of the ten powers.”
The most moving things in this gate are the third phrase and the fourth: for the sake of taming one single being, going to unspeakably unspeakable worlds; and toward those who believe him and those who slander him, contemplating everywhere with great compassion, impartially and without difference. What is called most surpassing is surpassing here, not in what can be done. Chengguan judges this gate to “set forth in general the wisdom of the provisional and the real, of cause and fruit, and so also to answer the question about the most surpassing at the Hall of Universal Light, since wisdom is the most surpassing,” and points out that its closing phrase, “abiding in the ground of the ten powers,” also answers the question about the ground of a buddha.
Brought home to the reader: if you would find in yourself one place that answers to a buddha, do not look for spiritual penetrations; look for these two phrases — willingness to walk a long road for one person, and willingness to have no second mind toward one who slanders you.
17. Abiding without Obstruction: The Ten Places One Can Abide In
The seventeenth gate still answers wisdom. Its ten phrases all close with “abiding without obstruction”: able to go to all worlds, able to abide in all worlds, able within all worlds to walk, stand, sit, and lie down, able within all worlds to expound the true Dharma, able within all worlds to abide in the palace of the Tuṣita heaven, able to enter all the three times of the Dharma realm, able to sit at all the seats of awakening of the Dharma realm, able thought after thought to contemplate the mental conduct of beings and to teach and tame them with the three kinds of mastery, able with a single body to abide in the presence of measureless buddhas and to benefit beings in all places, able to reveal the true Dharma spoken by measureless buddhas.
Chengguan points out in a single phrase why this gate hangs under wisdom: “it makes clear that wisdom is apart from obstruction; since what wisdom does is unobstructed, everything is unobstructed.” Unobstructedness is not a strength great enough to break through barriers; it is that wisdom is from the first apart from obstruction, so that there is no barrier to obstruct.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: to read “without obstruction” as overcoming difficulties. Not one of the ten phrases of this gate speaks of overcoming; all of them speak of being of itself able to go and of itself able to abide. Brought home to the reader: in practice the real checkpoint has never been the wall outside, but one’s own conviction that there is a wall.
18. The Most Surpassing and Unsurpassed Adornments: Body, Speech, Mind, Light, Smile, Dharma-Body, Form, Family, and Great Kindness
The eighteenth gate is the last of the three that answer wisdom, and it is also the most sumptuous in language of any gate in the chapter. The ten adornments in order are: the adornment of body (the marks and the signs that accompany the form), the adornment of speech (the sixty kinds of tone, each tone with five hundred parts), the adornment of mind (the ten powers, the great samādhis, the eighteen exclusive dharmas), the adornment of light, the adornment of the manifesting of a smile, the adornment of dharma-body, the adornment of constant subtle light, the adornment of subtle form, the adornment of family, and the adornment of the merit of great kindness and great compassion.
Chengguan explains this gate as “the completing of benefit by wisdom: because within there is the adornment of wisdom, therefore without there are all the adornments” — every adornment outside is the overflow of the wisdom within. Upon the sixth, the adornment of dharma-body, he opens several layers: suchness come forth from its wrapping is the dharma-body of the nature of the Dharma; wisdom tallying with the Dharma realm is the dharma-body of wisdom; from “though present within the world, not mingled with the world” onward is the dharma-body of response and emanation; from “fully understanding the real nature of the world” onward is the dharma-body of merit; and “the path of speech cut off” is the dharma-body of space, and also the dharma-body of the real mark.
What may least be passed over is the tenth — the adornment of the merit of great kindness and great compassion, which the text closes with “the foremost field of merit, the unsurpassed receiver of offerings.” Nine adornments are spoken, and at the last the foot comes down upon being able to receive the offerings of others and thereby make them meritorious. Chengguan puts it through to the bone: “being the foremost field, among the receivers of gifts there is none above him.” The end of adornment is not to be good to look at; it is to be able to catch and hold the minds of sentient beings.
19. The Dharmas of Mastery: The Function of the Ten Kinds of Mastery
The nineteenth gate begins to answer the question about mastery, and eight gates run on together — the largest group in the chapter. The ten kinds of mastery of this gate are, in order: mastery with regard to all dharmas (clearly penetrating the bodies of phrases and bodies of syllables, eloquence unobstructed), teaching without missing the time, causing worlds to quake in six ways without harming a single being, manifesting within a single thought the adornments of all worlds, remaining in the world and extending the lifespan for unspeakable kalpas for the sake of one being, going everywhere to all the places in which the tathāgatas walk, accomplishing perfect awakening thought after thought and yet neither already awakened nor about to awaken, the six faculties doing one another’s deeds of a buddha, the pores containing all sentient beings, and manifesting within a single thought buddhas as many as the dust motes.
Chengguan judges these ten to be “wholly the same as the ten kinds of mastery of the eighth ground, only deeper and broader and not in the same order,” and allots them one by one to mastery of the Dharma, of mind, of resolute understanding, of wealth, of life, of what one wishes, of wisdom, of activity, of birth, and of vow. This is an important cross-reading: the eighth of the ten grounds, in the position of the cause, already has these ten names, and the position of the fruit says them over again, the difference lying in depth and breadth.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: the third phrase says that he can make the worlds quake and yet “has never harmed a single sentient being, and the sentient beings within them neither feel it nor know it” — mastery is not doing as one pleases; it is moving without disturbing. On the eighth phrase, the six faculties doing one another’s work, Chengguan adds a further remark: “yet this is no altering or turning about; not one faculty is changed, since it is originally complete.” It is not that the eye is made into an ear; it is complete so from the first. Brought home to the reader: mastery is mastery in that it costs no effort, and also in that it injures no one.
20. The Perfect Dharmas of a Buddha: Perfection Added on Top of Mastery
The twentieth gate still answers mastery. Eleven phrases run through in one breath: every pure mark complete with a hundred merits, accomplishing all the dharmas of a buddha, all roots of good, all merits, able to teach all beings, able to be a lord upon whom beings rely, accomplishing pure buddha-lands, accomplishing the wisdom of all-knowing wisdom, accomplishing a form-body with marks and signs so that those who see it obtain benefit, complete in the impartial true Dharma of the buddhas, and, the deeds of a buddha being done, without exception manifesting entering nirvāṇa.
Since the gate before has already spoken of the ten kinds of mastery, why speak of perfection as well? Chengguan gives the reason: “that is, the previous ten kinds of mastery the eighth ground may also have, and so the ten kinds of perfection of the Tathāgata are set forth. Again, since there is no single dharma with regard to which there is not mastery, it is therefore called perfection.” A bodhisattva of the eighth ground may already have those ten kinds of mastery, and so a further gate must be raised to set forth what is not held in common in the position of the fruit; and what is called perfection has for its sense that there is no single dharma with regard to which there is not mastery.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: perfection is not a matter of making up the numbers. The last phrase — “the deeds of a buddha being done, without exception manifesting entering nirvāṇa” — shows that the mark of perfection falls upon the willingness to close, not upon endless unfolding. Brought home to the reader: having finished, to be willing to rest is also a portion of perfection.
21. Skillfulness in Means: Knowing Its Emptiness and Yet Not Abandoning the Speaking
The twenty-first gate still answers mastery, and it is the densest gate of the chapter in doctrine. The ten kinds of skillfulness in means all have one and the same structure: knowing that dharmas are apart from frivolous talk and yet able to reveal the roots of good; knowing that all dharmas are without anything seen, that they do not know one another, that they are without bond and without release, without anything accomplished, and yet reaching mastery and the far shore and knowing them truly and without difference; being forever apart from all marks with a mind dwelling nowhere and yet able to know them all without confusion or error; not dwelling in the three times and yet able to expound the appearing of the buddhas of the three times; the three activities constructing nothing and yet becoming a treasury of the multitude of dharmas; knowing that all dharmas cannot be seen, are not one and not different, and yet not running counter to the dharmas of the world; within a single time knowing all times and yet manifesting day and night, kalpas and years; always abiding in the Dharma realm and yet accomplishing the fearlessnesses and the ten eloquences; knowing that all dharmas are from the first without names and yet making utterances of every kind in accord with worldly convention; knowing that all dharmas are in their own nature quiescent, not form, not feeling, not perception, not formations, not consciousness, and yet not breaking down any of the dharmas.
Chengguan sums it up in a phrase: “that is, mastery with regard to the dharmas, since the provisional and the real and the rest are all unobstructed” — skillfulness is skillful in that neither end, the real or the provisional, is lost. And upon the eighth, “good in the beginning, the middle, and the end,” he cites the three goods of the Yogācārabhūmi by way of explanation: good in the beginning is that gladness arises at the time of hearing; good in the middle is that at the time of cultivating one is far from the two extremes and walks by the Middle Way; good in the end is being ultimately apart from defilement.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: to suppose that to expound the Dharma after knowing emptiness is a step backward, a concession. The sentence-form of the text says exactly the opposite — every phrase first establishes its emptiness and then raises its function; the function does not retreat out of emptiness, the function grows out of emptiness. Brought home to the reader: only one who has truly let go can say anything that moves; one who is still holding on says everything on his own behalf.
22. The Ten Vast Deeds of a Buddha: Every Step of a Life Is a Deed of a Buddha
The twenty-second gate still answers mastery, and in length it is the greatest in the chapter. The text takes as its ten the taking of birth in Tuṣita, the descending in spirit into the mother’s womb, dwelling in the womb and being born and living in the palace, forsaking the palace and leaving the household life, accomplishing right awakening beneath the tree, turning the wheel of the Dharma that does not turn back, entering the royal capitals and cities, dwelling in the araṇya, bringing forth the treasury of pure roots of good, and entering nirvāṇa — precisely the one life of the eight aspects of the accomplishing of the path, and yet every step of it is marked as a “vast deed of a buddha.”
To see the intent of this gate clearly one must catch the qualification at the head of the text: these ten matters “none of the gods and humans of all the worlds can know,” nor can the śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas, “save only by the majestic spiritual power of the Tathāgata.” So this life, which to onlookers is a biography, is here declared to be not a career but ten occasions of expounding the Dharma. Chengguan explains this gate as “making clear the mastery of spiritual power,” and says that “within the eight aspects and the rest there is in every case a great function, since the subtle and the coarse contain one another. By this beings are gathered in, and hence they are called the deeds of a buddha.”
Three places in it are especially worth turning over. First, the section on dwelling in the womb says that “the Tathāgata at that time, while within the mother’s womb,” already manifests being newly born, being a boy, being within the palace, leaving the household life, accomplishing perfect awakening, turning the wheel of the Dharma, and entering parinirvāṇa — the whole course of a life is already manifested within the womb, which shows that the sequence is laid out for those who watch. Second, the section on entering the royal capitals and cities writes that when he enters the city gate “the blind gain sight, the deaf gain hearing, the deranged regain their own minds, the naked gain clothing” — the deeds of a buddha at their most solid are that a person’s suffering is here and now undone. Third, the section on nirvāṇa writes that after the Buddha’s passing his body is crushed into relics, stūpas are raised, and those who see them are made mindful of the Buddha, the Dharma, and the Saṅgha, and the last sentence says that the buddhas, “though they have already entered parinirvāṇa, are still for sentient beings an inconceivable pure field of merit” — even his going is one occasion of the deeds of a buddha.
Brought home to the reader: this gate thoroughly alters the definition of “the deeds of a buddha.” It is not that a buddha performs religious services; it is that every step of a buddha’s life is teaching. And the one step the reader can learn is the step taken at the city gate — that wherever one arrives, someone’s suffering is one measure less.
23. The Dharmas of Mastery in the Practice without Duality: Once Said, It Is Not Altered
The twenty-third gate still answers mastery. Its ten phrases all close with “decided and without duality”: skillfully proclaiming the words of the prediction, decided and without duality; according with the thoughts of beings and fulfilling their intent, decided and without duality; awakening before them to all dharmas and expounding the meaning, decided and without duality; complete in the wisdom of the buddhas of the three times, decided and without duality; knowing that all the kṣaṇas of the three times are one kṣaṇa; knowing that all the buddha-lands of the three times enter one buddha-land; knowing that all the speech of the buddhas of the three times is the speech of one buddha; knowing that the buddhas and the beings they deliver are of an impartial substance and nature; knowing that the dharmas of the world and the dharmas of the buddhas are without difference in nature; knowing that all the roots of good of the buddhas of the three times are one and the same root of good.
Chengguan takes “without duality” and “mastery” apart in explaining: “in matters they are clear and searching, decided and without doubt, and hence it says without duality; not fearing the objections of others is called mastery.” Without duality is that one has no doubt oneself; mastery is that one does not fear being questioned. He further divides the ten phrases: the first four may be known as they stand; the next three run through the two senses of ‘melting marks by principle’ and ‘phenomena and phenomena entering one another’; the next two are of principle alone; and the last has the three senses of sameness of nature and cultivation, mutual dedication, and the mutual play of host and guest.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: the first four phrases speak of the non-duality of word and deed (what is said is surely done, and the answer fits the occasion), while the latter six speak of a kṣaṇa being one kṣaṇa and buddha-lands entering buddha-lands — seemingly two different matters. In truth they are one matter: because the three times have from the first no two substances, what is said and what is done are likewise not two. Brought home to the reader: word and deed come apart because the moment of speaking and the moment of doing are, in your mind, two different worlds.
24. The Ten Abidings · Abiding in All Dharmas: Where a Buddha’s Mind Comes to Rest
The twenty-fourth gate still answers mastery. Its ten phrases all begin with “abiding”: abiding in awakening to the whole Dharma realm, abiding in the speech of great compassion, abiding in the original great vows, abiding in not forsaking the taming of beings, abiding in the dharma without any nature of its own, abiding in impartial benefit, abiding in the dharma of never forgetting, abiding in a mind without obstruction, abiding in a mind constantly in right concentration, abiding in entering impartially into all dharmas without running counter to the mark of the real limit.
It is most interesting read alongside the first gate, “the measureless abidings”: there it was the general heading, here the particular listing; there it answered the lands, here it answers mastery. Chengguan explains this gate as “making clear the mastery of samādhi, and so also answering the question about samādhi at the Hall of Universal Light. There is nothing in which the Tathāgata abides that is not samādhi, and hence he abides everywhere in all” — so the “abiding” of this gate is concentration: every abiding of a buddha is a samādhi.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: to suppose that to abide is to be motionless. Look closely and among the ten abidings are “abiding in not forsaking the taming of sentient beings” and “abiding in impartial benefit” — both of these are motion. So to abide is not to come to a stop; it is that the mind has a settled place while nothing is left undone. Brought home to the reader: the evidence of concentration is not how long one can sit, but that while acting the mind is still in that place.
25. Knowing All Dharmas Exhaustively with Nothing Left Over: Knowing until Nothing Remains
The twenty-fifth gate still answers mastery. Eleven phrases push outward one after another: knowing all the dharmas of past, future, and present exhaustively with nothing left over; knowing all the dharmas of speech, all the ways of the world, the minds of all beings, the higher, middling, and lower stations of the roots of good of all bodhisattvas, the perfect wisdom of all buddhas and their roots of good neither increasing nor decreasing, that all dharmas arise from causes and conditions, all the kinds of worlds — and the last phrase is the deepest: “knowing within the whole Dharma realm the differentiated matters of every kind, like the net of Indra, exhaustively with nothing left over.”
Chengguan judges this gate to “make clear the mastery of the ten powers,” saying that “the wisdom of the ten powers illumines its objects without remainder.” What deserves weight is the closing phrase: the net of Indra is the jeweled net of Śakra, lord of the gods, its pearls reflecting one another, image containing image. The first ten phrases exhaust the objects already known; the last says that even the mutual reflecting that is layer upon layer without exhausting is known exhaustively with nothing left over — this pushes “exhaustively” all the way onto the inexhaustible.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: to suppose that “knowing exhaustively” means completeness of information. The text says expressly, “knowing that all dharmas arise from causes and conditions, exhaustively with nothing left over” — what is known is dependent arising, not an inventory of items. Brought home to the reader: to know exhaustively in truth is not to remember everything, but to see through where everything comes from.
26. The Listing of the Names of the Ten Powers and the Nārāyaṇa Banner: One Heading, One Explaining, Making One Gate
The two stretches of scripture that are the twenty-sixth and the twenty-seventh the ancient worthies judge to be one gate. The text first lists the names of the ten powers — vast power, highest power, measureless power, power of great majestic virtue, power hard to obtain, power that does not turn back, firm power, power that cannot be broken down, power inconceivable to all the worlds, power that no sentient being can move — and thereupon explains them with the ten segments of “the ten kinds of dharma of the valor of the great Nārāyaṇa banner”; and it closes with “these dharmas of the valor of the great Nārāyaṇa banner of all the buddhas are measureless and boundless.” Chengguan outlines it in just this way: “within the text there are likewise three: first the heading, next the raising and explaining from ‘which are they’ onward, third the conclusion.”
What is the relation between the ten powers and the Nārāyaṇa banner? Chengguan says: “the ten powers are the particular names, and the great Nārāyaṇa and the rest are the general appellation.” The ten powers are ten names; the Nārāyaṇa banner is the general appellation. As for the allotment, he first records the saying of the ancient worthies — allotting the ten powers of the heading, in due order, to the ten segments below — and then at once points out its defect: this would “make one gate of the particular fail to gather in the preceding ten and fail to make a hundred gates, and would also leave the remaining gates without the sense of vastness”; and he gives an allotment in reverse order of his own (the first segment allotted to the power that cannot be moved, the second to the inconceivable, the third to the unbreakable, and so on). Both sayings are recorded together, and no judgment is passed.
Brought home to the reader: here is a demonstration of how to read. The allotment of one set of names to another may have more than one solution, and the ancient worthies do not conceal their differences; what matters is not who allotted them rightly, but seeing clearly that heading and explaining are one thing and may not be pulled apart into two gates.
27. The Ten Segments of the Nārāyaṇa Banner: Wherein the Power of Valor Is Actually Valorous
The ten segments of the dharmas of valor are, in order: the body that cannot be broken and the life that cannot be cut off; holding the worlds within a single pore to the end of the kalpas of the future; taking within a single thought unspeakable steps while the mind is always in concentration; having once sat down and eaten, sitting cross-legged through the kalpas of the prior and later limits; within a single body manifesting numberless heads and tongues and turning the wheel of the Dharma without exhausting; the breast adorned with the mark of virtue, subduing the demons unmoved; having an unobstructed voice that pervades the ten directions with nothing able to block it; the mind without obstruction, of one and the same substance and nature; one and the same dharma-body, listed as twenty-five bodies; awakening equally and cultivating equally all the dharmas of the buddhas.
Of the ten segments, three especially call for an eye. First, the first segment says that adamantine masses like Sumeru fall all at once over the three-thousandfold world-system and yet of the Buddha “not so much as a single hair is shaken,” and its last sentence turns to sentient beings: “if there are sentient beings who are guarded by the Buddha and who are sent by the Buddha, even they cannot be harmed — how much less the body of the Tathāgata!” The evidence of unbreakable power falls upon the person who is guarded. Second, the second segment takes space for its simile: “it is as when space universally holds all the worlds within the whole Dharma realm and yet is not wearied” — to hold without being wearied is because there was never any standing over against what is held. Chengguan says upon this, “because, though he holds many great mountains, body and mind suffer no weariness or injury.” Third, the ninth segment lists twenty-five bodies, and Chengguan judges of them: “the ten bodies in perfect fusion are the body of one and the same Dharma realm, and cannot be allotted to the reward and emanation bodies, and hence it says highest and most subtly secret” — these twenty-five names are not twenty-five kinds of body; they are twenty-five faces of one and the same dharma-body.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: to read these ten segments as the limits of a buddha’s physical strength. The text supplies its own line of defense — the third segment says “his mind is always in concentration without being scattered,” and the eighth says “the mind without obstruction … fully understanding that the marks of the realms are empty and still, and not giving rise to false imagining.” The substance of the power of valor is concentration and quiescent emptiness, not force. Brought home to the reader: what truly cannot be broken has never been hardness; it is not standing over against.
28. The Decided Dharmas: The Ten Matters That Are Necessarily So
The twenty-eighth gate begins to answer the question about unobstructedness. Its ten phrases have the word “decided” for their spine: decidedly descending to be born when the Tuṣita lifespan is exhausted, decidedly manifesting the taking of birth and dwelling in the womb ten months, decidedly wearying of the worldly and delighting in leaving the household life, decidedly sitting beneath the tree of awakening and accomplishing perfect awakening, decidedly awakening to all dharmas within a single thought, decidedly able to turn the subtle wheel of the Dharma at the fitting time, decidedly able according to the roots of good planted to expound the Dharma at the fitting time and confer the prediction, decidedly able to do the deeds of a buddha at the fitting time, decidedly able to confer the prediction upon bodhisattvas already brought to accomplishment, decidedly able within a single thought to answer everywhere all that beings ask.
Chengguan sets an important limit under this gate: “first, it makes clear that what is done is decided and nothing can obstruct it; this is spoken of one class of worlds, and hence it says decided, while in worlds of a different class it is not necessarily so. Again, it is spoken in terms of what a buddha is decidedly able to do, and hence it says decided.” What is called decided is, first, said of worlds of one and the same class, and second, said of what a buddha is surely able to do; it is not that the buddhas of all the worlds of the ten directions must walk this same course.
This is the gate of the chapter most easily read to death, and the ancient worthies loosen the knot for the reader in advance. Brought home to the reader: the eight aspects are a decided pattern, not a decided lock. Whoever sees one pattern and supposes it must be so has usually read what fits the occasion as what must be.
29. The Swift Dharmas: The Ten Benefits Swiftly Obtained by One Who Sees a Buddha
The twenty-ninth gate still answers unobstructedness. Eight of its ten phrases take the form “whoever sees them swiftly …,” while the sixth runs “if one who has already given rise to the mind of awakening sees them” and the seventh “if one who has not yet entered the right station sees them”: swiftly becoming far removed from all evil destinies, swiftly fulfilling surpassing merit, swiftly able to accomplish vast roots of good, swiftly gaining birth in the pure and subtle heavens, swiftly able to cut off all doubts, one who has given rise to the mind swiftly accomplishing vast faith and understanding never to turn back while one who has not yet given rise to it swiftly gives rise to the mind of awakening, one who has not yet entered the right station swiftly entering it, swiftly able to purify all the faculties worldly and world-transcending, swiftly obtaining the extinguishing of all obstructions, swiftly able to obtain fearless eloquence.
Chengguan explains this gate as “making clear the making of others unobstructed. As with the wish-fulfilling jewel, to see it is swiftly to obtain the benefit; but the thin in merit do not behold it,” and he divides the ten phrases into five pairs: leaving the evil destinies and fulfilling surpassing virtue; accomplishing the cause of good and drawing the fruit of joy; cutting off doubt and fulfilling the great mind; first entering the position and finally becoming pure; purifying the two obstructions and being complete in the four eloquences.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: to suppose that “seeing” is seeing with the eyes. Read this gate against the eleventh, “single-mindedly hold him in recollection, and he appears before him,” and the point is plain: the seeing is what the mind touches, not necessarily a form standing before the eye. And the ancient worthies add a further phrase, “the thin in merit do not behold it”: the wish-fulfilling jewel is right there, and one thin in merit does not see it though it stand before him. Brought home to the reader: it is not that a buddha is hard to see; it is that the condition of seeing lies on one’s own side.
30. The Pure Dharmas That Ought Always to Be Held in Recollection: The Ten Matters a Bodhisattva Should Keep in Mind
The thirtieth gate is the last of the three that answer unobstructedness, and it is the only gate in the chapter that plainly speaks to bodhisattvas: the causes and conditions of the buddhas in the past, their pure and surpassing practice, their fulfilling of the perfections, their accomplishing of the great vows, their amassing of roots of good, their completing of pure conduct, their accomplishing of right awakening before them, their measureless form-bodies, their measureless spiritual penetrations, and their ten powers and fearlessnesses — these ten “all bodhisattvas ought always to hold in recollection.”
Chengguan explains this gate as “raising up the twofold unobstructedness of a buddha, and exhorting beings to hold it in recollection and uphold it” — to raise up the unobstructedness of a buddha is done in order to exhort people to recollect and uphold it.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: to suppose that recollection is a kind of fond remembering. Look closely at the order of the ten matters: it begins from the buddhas’ causes and conditions in the past, passes through surpassing practice, the perfections, the great vows, roots of good, and pure conduct, and only then reaches the accomplishing of right awakening and the form-body, spiritual penetrations, and ten powers — the first six are all matters of the position of the cause. So what is recollected is not a buddha’s fruit but how a buddha came to be. Brought home to the reader: to be mindful of a buddha and be mindful only of his light and his marks is to be mindful of a result; to take in as well how he first made his vow and how he amassed his roots of good is the recollection this gate speaks of.
31. The Abidings of All-Knowing Wisdom: Knowing Sentient Beings Entirely within a Single Thought
The thirty-first gate begins to answer the question about liberation, and is the first of the last three. Its ten phrases all begin with “within a single thought”: knowing entirely the minds and mental conduct of all the beings of the three times; knowing entirely the deeds they have amassed and the fruits of those deeds; knowing entirely what is fitting for them and teaching and taming them with the three wheels; knowing exhaustively all the marks of their minds and manifesting everywhere the arising of a buddha; manifesting the expounding of the Dharma everywhere according to their wishes and understandings; knowing what their minds delight in and manifesting spiritual power for them; pervading all places, manifesting his arising and expounding that the body of a buddha is not to be grasped; reaching everywhere every place of the Dharma realm and every destiny of every being; going and responding wherever there are those who hold him in recollection; knowing entirely their understandings and wishes and manifesting measureless forms for them.
Chengguan judges this gate to “make clear liberation from the obstruction to wisdom. Wisdom rests upon phenomena and principle, and hence it is called abiding. Because he is apart from the obstruction, he is able to know all” — so the “abiding” of this gate is not an abiding that does not move; it is wisdom resting upon phenomena and principle, and it is because the obstruction to wisdom is left behind that all can be known.
Among the ten phrases the seventh is especially to the point: he manifests his arising everywhere, and immediately there follows “and expounds for them that the body of a buddha is not to be grasped or clung to.” He has just manifested a body, and at once he says that this body is not to be grasped — manifesting and not grasping at one and the same time: this is liberation. Brought home to the reader: whoever sees a mark and grasps that mark is still obstructed, even with a buddha standing before him.
32. The Samādhis of a Buddha: Always in Right Concentration and Yet Pervading All Places
The thirty-second gate still answers liberation. Its ten phrases share one sentence-form, six of them running “always in right concentration, within a single thought pervading all places” and four (the third, eighth, ninth, and tenth) running “always abiding in right concentration, within a single thought pervading all places,” after which each says what is done — expounding the subtle Dharma at length, expounding the limit in which there is no self, entering the three times everywhere, entering the vast buddha-lands of the ten directions everywhere, manifesting measureless buddha-bodies everywhere, manifesting body, speech, and mind according to the understandings of the mind, expounding the true limit in which all dharmas are apart from desire, expounding the nature of dependent origination, manifesting vast adornments worldly and world-transcending, and causing beings to penetrate the dharmas of a buddha and measureless liberations and ultimately to reach the unsurpassed far shore.
Chengguan explains this gate as “making clear liberation from the obstruction to concentration; because he is apart from the obstruction, the function is broad and measureless and the substance deep and inconceivable,” and points out that in these ten “each first makes clear the being in concentration, and afterward the pervading function within a single thought” — every phrase has the first half in concentration and the second half raising its function.
A misunderstanding must be cleared away: to suppose that entering concentration and exercising a function are two stretches of time. The sentence-form of this gate has already written the answer into its structure: it is not that one is first in concentration and then comes out of it to act; it is that always within concentration the function pervades all places. Brought home to the reader: the mark of work become continuous is not how long one can stay in, but that in the midst of action concentration has not been left.
33. Unobstructed Liberation: Within a Single Dust Mote All Is Manifested
The last gate of the chapter still answers liberation. Its ten phrases all run “able within a single mote to manifest …”: manifesting unspeakably unspeakable buddhas arising in the world, buddhas turning the pure wheel of the Dharma, beings receiving deliverance and being tamed, buddha-lands, bodhisattvas receiving the prediction, all the buddhas gone, come, and now, all the kinds of worlds gone, come, and now, all the spiritual penetrations gone, come, and now, all the sentient beings gone, come, and now, and all the deeds of a buddha gone, come, and now.
Chengguan explains this gate as “making clear the wisdom of liberation in the function of activity,” and cites the words of a treatise in evidence: “bodhisattvas have an inconceivable liberation, and the buddhas have an unobstructed liberation: what they do is without obstruction, since they are freed from all fettering and hindrance, and therefore each of them, within a single mote, all at once performs the subtle function.” The liberation of a bodhisattva is still named inconceivable, while the liberation of the buddhas is named unobstructed; the dividing line lies in “what they do is without obstruction.”
That the chapter closes with this gate is by design. The last of the ten questions raised at the opening was liberation, and at the close it is liberation that is answered; and what is answered is not a leaving of anything behind, but the ability within a single dust mote to manifest all of the three times. Chengguan further notices at the end of the chapter that here “the text has little of a conclusion, as though the scripture had come and not been finished” — this chapter has no closing verses of the usual kind, and he judges it to be “perhaps to show that the virtues of a buddha have no exhausting.”
Brought home to the reader: having read the thirty-three gates, if one asks what a buddha’s liberation finally is, the answer of this gate is that one need not go elsewhere — within a single dust mote the three times are manifested entire. What is called the inconceivable is not somewhere far off.
Lineage
The placement of this chapter hangs upon a question that an ancient worthy long ago set. Zhiyan asks himself, in the Ten Mysterious Gates: since the Chapter on the Inconceivable Dharmas of the Buddhas and its like set forth the fruit-virtues, why may they be spoken within an assembly of the gate of the cause? He answers himself: though these are fruit-virtues, they are ‘a fruit set forth in relation to conditions,’ not the fruit of ultimate perfect quiescence, and therefore they may be spoken in one and the same assembly with the cause. That question and answer set this chapter in the position of speaking the fruit-virtues within an assembly of the cause: what is spoken is a fruit set forth to fit the occasion, not the fruit of ultimate perfect quiescence — and here lies the ground on which this chapter may be spoken in the return to the Hall of Universal Light.
Why do the thirty-two gates come to bear the name “inconceivable”? Two houses of the ancient worthies say things that agree in sense and differ in words. Chengguan says that this chapter “sets forth thirty-two gates in brief, and each gate is complete with ten, making three hundred and twenty virtues, so as to show that there is no exhausting,” and gathers it up at the end of the chapter in a single sentence: “since following any one gate all ten questions are answered, there is containing and gathering in, and it is therefore named the inconceivable.” Li Tongxuan says it by way of the net of the god, calling these thirty-two gates “the gate of the net of Indra — measureless, universally pervading, unobstructed, of the whole and the part, of sameness and difference, of forming and decay, and masterly,” and arrives at the same number of three hundred and twenty. The former says it from the mutual containing of gate within gate, the latter by the names of the six marks and the net of the god — the two houses are recorded together, and no judgment is passed between them. And the names of the six marks (whole and part, sameness and difference, forming and decay) come from the fourth great vow of the first ground in the Chapter on the Ten Grounds; the text of this chapter does not itself raise those names, and it is the ancient worthies who read the one by the other — a lineage of reading, and it is recorded as such.
As to the explanation of the name, the three houses each make a track of their own. Fazang says, “the dharmas of the fruit of the Tathāgata far transcend speech and thought, and hence the name,” and Chengguan takes it up as “the fruit-dharmas of the Tathāgata far transcend speech and thought, and hence the name” — the two masters alike establish the sense upon the failure of speech and thought to reach. Li Tongxuan opens another road: “the thought of feeling and consciousness cannot reach it, and hence ‘not thought’ … when consciousness ceases and feeling is dark, right wisdom appears before one, and this is named the inconceivable” — establishing the sense by distinguishing consciousness from wisdom. Of one and the same chapter title, the one takes the transcending of speech by what is expressed, the other the turning of consciousness into wisdom in what knows; both stand, and no judgment is passed.
The joining of this chapter with what comes before and after has its express text as well. Chengguan judges the five chapters here as one group: this chapter sets forth in general the substance and function of the virtues of a buddha, the Chapter on the Ocean of Marks of the Ten Bodies of the Tathāgata and the Chapter on the Merit of the Light of the Secondary Signs set forth in particular the marks and the signs of those surpassing virtues, and the last two chapters set forth in particular the benefit of their function; and he says at the end of the chapter, “the Ocean of Marks and the rest still answer the earlier questions” — the unfinished momentum of this chapter runs straight into the chapters that follow. And the ten dharmas of mastery of this chapter the ancient worthies judge to be “wholly the same as the ten kinds of mastery of the eighth ground, only deeper and broader and not in the same order” — the eighth of the ten grounds, in the position of the cause, already lists these ten names, and the position of the fruit lists them over again, differing only in depth and breadth. Only when the two places are read together do the words “deeper and broader” come to rest upon something solid.
As for the lineage of this chapter within the treatises, what must be recorded is its absence, as the facts stand: Vasubandhu’s Shidi jing lun explains only the Chapter on the Ten Grounds and has no bearing upon this chapter; Fazang’s Huayan jing zhigui, the Cheng weishi lun, and the Mahāyānasaṃgraha have no text citing this chapter; and the relevant hits in the Huayan yisheng jiaoyi fenqi zhang all belong to Taishō records of variant witnesses, not doctrinal citations from Xianshou’s own text. A zero-hit is likewise an honest result — the lineage of this chapter lies chiefly within the doctrinal classification and the commentaries of the Huayan house itself, and not upon the axis of the treatises.
品三十四 如來十身相海品The Ocean of Marks of the Ten Bodies of the Tathāgata
全文五層 →Full five layers →前一品說完了佛的不思議法,為什麼還要專說一次身相
讀到這一品,最容易生的一個疑:前面〈佛不思議法品〉已把佛的果法總說了一遍,為什麼還要另立一品,從頭頂數到腳趾,一相一相地列九十七種身相?這豈不是重複,甚至是繁瑣?
澄觀判此品的來意,答得很直截:前品是總明果法,此品是別顯相德——總說過了,還須別說;近處是回答前品所留的『身』之問,遠處是回答第二會普光明殿中關於佛之眼等六根的舊問。法藏的判法與此同軌:約遠說,此品與前品同是酬答普光會中佛果德之問;約近說,前品總明果法,此品別顯相德,所以此品要來。
換句話說,這一品不是補述,是兌現。前面說佛的功德不可思議,那是義;如今要把這不可思議落到一個看得見的身上——眼、鼻、舌、牙、齒、脣、頸、肩、胸、手、髀、腨、足,一處一處地說它放什麼光、現什麼佛、演什麼法。義若不落到相,容易懸空成玄談;相若不繫於義,又只是佛像的描述。這一品的分量,正在於它把二者釘在一起。
排一個常見的誤讀:以為「相海」是誇張的形容。澄觀釋品名時說得很清楚——如來十身是標人顯德,相海是依人顯相;福報所成的奇特形狀顯著可辨,所以叫相;相之德深廣,所以稱海。海不是形容詞,是一個判準:相之體廣、相之用遍、相與相互相融入而難思,所以才配稱海。宗趣也就順此而立:以顯無盡相海為宗,以令人修無盡之行而顯成此相為趣——講相,最後是要人去修那個能感此相的行。
為什麼是普賢說,不是佛自說
全品從頭到尾只有一個說者:普賢菩薩摩訶薩。開口第一句是誡聽許說——佛子!今當為汝演說如來所有相海。開場「爾時,普賢菩薩摩訶薩告諸菩薩言」一句經家敘語之後,再無經家插敘。這是體例事實,不是缺文。
那為什麼佛的相,要由普賢來說?澄觀給了兩層理由:一層是相應——相海普周法界,普賢即是普行之人,令人行普行才能獲普相,所以由普賢說最相稱;一層是會次——普賢本是這一會的會主,前面的話已經說盡,順勢便說此品。李通玄則另出一義:此相海是由行報所成,普賢就是行,所以是讓修行的人自己來說自己所行之報德之果。
三家都不把說者當作偶然。這裡藏著本品的讀法:相是果,行是因;由普賢說相,就是讓因來說果。你若把九十七相讀成佛的外貌清單,這一品便只剩莊嚴的辭藻;你若記得說者是普賢,這九十七相立刻變成九十七條回向——每一道光都在指回某一種可修的行。
讀一相,要看哪五處
九十七相看似繁瑣,其實每一相都照同一副骨架寫成。澄觀判正陳相狀之文通有五:一依處、二列名、三體嚴、四業用、五結數;有時略而不具,看文便知;有時加上成益之句,仍歸業用所攝。
這五處,就是讀本品的五個關節。依處——這相長在身上哪裡(頂上、眉間、右手、左足跟);列名——這相叫什麼(多半以雲為名);體嚴——它以什麼寶為體、為飾(摩尼、毘瑠璃、閻浮檀金、因陀羅網);業用——它放光作什麼(普照法界、顯現諸佛、演說妙法、令眾生清淨);結數——是為第幾。
澄觀還交代了名與體用的關係:名是依體用而立的,所以都用體用來釋名,有時單從體、有時單從用、有時雙從二者,隨文思量;若遇到名與體用義不相似的,那是文略而義含,不必強配。這一句是防呆的——遇到相名與內容對不上的,不要去硬編。
最要緊的是體嚴的一句通則:所謂寶莊嚴,通顯的是體嚴;就事相說是摩尼等寶作莊嚴,就理說也顯智寶之圓淨為嚴;一一相中都有事理二嚴,隨宜解釋。這一句把整品從『寶物目錄』裡救了出來——寶是事,智是理,同一句經文兩面都能讀。落到讀者身上就是:你讀到摩尼、瑠璃、金剛,別只看見寶石,那同時是在說智之明淨、堅利、無染。
頂上為什麼一處就裝了三十二相
第一依處是頂上,經文一開口就說:如來頂上有三十二寶莊嚴大人相。九十七相之中,三分之一擠在一個頭頂上——這是全品最刺眼的不平衡,也是華嚴宗義最要緊的一處落腳。
澄觀不迴避,直接判:此處獨有三十二者,理實應多,為顯圓融一即一切,故一頂中便具權教三十二數。權教說佛有三十二相,那是全佛的相數;此經把整整三十二相安在一個依處上。這一步不是加法,是換算——一分之中具足一切分。華嚴講一多相容、主伴具足,其經據不必遠求,就在這第一句總標裡。
那為什麼偏偏是頂?澄觀設了自問自答:若這樣,其餘依處為何不是如此?答:為顯頂之尊勝。他引《善生經》校量相好,說一切世間之福不及如來一毛之功德,一切毛之功德不及一好之功德,一切好不及一相,一切相不及白毫,白毫又不及無見頂相。頂是相中之極,所以在頂上顯這一即一切之義最為相稱。
頂上三十二相,可以順著業用讀成幾層。第一相光照一切方普放無量大光明網,以妙寶為嚴、寶髮周遍柔軟密緻,一一髮放摩尼光,現佛身色相圓滿——這是全品的起相,先立『相能現佛』之則。李通玄於此逐字表法:方就是法,是根本智成就差別智之法;光明網是差別智中隨根設教濟度眾生之所報生,約因而名為光網;三十二寶則配三業二智。此是表法一軌,誌之。第二相佛眼光明雲,以摩尼王莊嚴出金色光,如眉間毫相所放——澄觀點出此相之讀法:體嚴釋其光明義,業用釋其佛眼義,因為佛眼無所不照;毫相放光之事,初會〈現相品〉已說。第三相充滿法界雲以寶輪為嚴,放福智燈明,普照十方法界世界海而普現諸佛菩薩——相能現佛之義至此鋪滿法界。第四相示現普照雲,真金摩尼為嚴,照不思議佛土而諸佛於中出現。第五相放寶光明雲,以毘瑠璃為華蘂,光中普現神變並讚歎如來往昔所行之智慧功德——這是第一次把「相」回指到『因行』。
第六相示現如來遍法界大自在雲,以寶焰摩尼為冠、覺悟一切寶焰光輪為鬘,光中現一切如來坐於道場、一切智雲充滿虛空法界。第七相如來普燈雲,以能震動法界國土之大自在寶海為嚴,光中普現十方菩薩功德海與三世佛智慧幢海——因海果海並現於一相。第八相普照諸佛廣大雲,以因陀羅寶、如意王寶、摩尼王寶為嚴,常放菩薩焰燈光明,現諸佛眾色相海、大音聲海、清淨力海。澄觀於此辨一個字:嚴中所說之摩尼,其義為意,與如意寶不同——同名之寶,義隨文別,這是讀名之戒。第九相圓滿光明雲,眾寶舒大焰網充滿十方,令一切眾生都見如來現坐其前,讚歎諸佛菩薩法身功德,令入如來清淨境界——相之業用第一次明說『令入』:不只是顯現,是接引。第十相普照一切菩薩行藏光明雲,寶焰普覆國土,十方法界通達無礙,震動佛音宣暢法海。
第十一相普光照耀雲,以毘瑠璃、因陀羅、金剛摩尼寶為嚴,出妙音充滿法界。澄觀特別點出此相末句:如是皆從諸佛智慧大功德海之所化現——這是辨業用之因,仍歸業用所攝。這一句是全品的樞紐:相不是自然生的裝飾,是智慧功德海所化現。第十二相正覺雲,寶華放光皆有如來坐於道場,令諸世界普得清淨,永斷一切妄想分別。第十三相光明照曜雲,以寶焰藏海心王摩尼為嚴,光中現無量菩薩及其所行之行,一切如來智身、法身、色相海充滿法界——身之三義同現一相。第十四相莊嚴普照雲,光中有大寶蓮華座彌覆法界,自然演說四菩薩行。這四菩薩行不是懸語,澄觀引《瑜伽·菩薩地》釋之:一切菩薩略有四行——一波羅蜜行、二菩提分法行、三神通行、四成熟有情行。相所演之法,是有目可指的行門。
第十五相現佛三昧海行雲,於一念中示現如來無量莊嚴,遍嚴一切法界不思議世界海——一念與無量,此相專顯時分之圓。第十六相變化海普照雲,妙寶蓮華如須彌山為嚴,眾寶光明從佛願生,現諸變化無有窮盡——從佛願生四字,把相之因由行推到願。第十七相一切如來解脫雲,光明莊嚴一切佛師子座,示現諸佛色像及無量佛法諸佛剎海。第十八相自在方便普照雲,以毘瑠璃華、真金蓮華、摩尼王燈、妙法焰雲為嚴,普現一切妙好莊嚴之具。第十九相覺佛種性雲,具足千輪,內外清淨,從於往昔善根所生,發明智日宣布法海。澄觀於此校梵本:十九云具足千輪者,梵本云具千輻輪也——千輪即千輻之輪,非別物。此相最堪注意的是『從於往昔善根所生』:相是報,報必有因。
第二十相現一切如來相自在雲,舒大寶焰充滿法界,普現佛剎微塵數三世諸佛,如師子王勇猛無畏,色相智慧皆悉具足。第二十一相遍照一切法界雲,顯現無量無邊諸佛菩薩智慧妙藏;澄觀判此相是示身智二光,同顯智慧——光有身光與智光二義,此相二義俱顯。第二十二相毘盧遮那如來相雲,以妙寶華及毘瑠璃清淨妙月為嚴,放百千萬億摩尼寶光充滿虛空法界,中現無量佛剎皆有如來結跏趺坐——全品唯此相以佛名為相名,遍一切處之義於此明點。第二十三相普照一切佛光明雲,悉現諸佛轉於法輪。第二十四相普現一切莊嚴雲,念念常現不可說不可說一切諸佛與諸菩薩坐於道場。第二十五相出一切法界音聲雲,以摩尼寶海、上妙栴檀為嚴,普演微妙音聲,示諸眾生一切業海——此相之業用不是顯佛,是照見眾生自己的業。
第二十六相普照諸佛變化輪雲,以如來淨眼為莊嚴。澄觀釋之最細:淨眼為嚴者通於十眼;光照以下顯業用,亦通身智二光;淨眼與光,正釋相名中的『普照』二字;光中所現之莊嚴具即是上文之輪義,也就是法輪。名、體、用三者於此扣合,是全品釋名之範例。第二十七相光照佛海雲,光普照一切世界,盡於法界無所障礙,處處皆有如來結跏趺坐。第二十八相寶燈雲,普現一切諸佛菩薩及不可思議諸眾生海。第二十九相法界無差別雲,放如來大智光明,普照佛土與菩薩道場眾會之無量法海,隨眾生心之所樂演說普賢菩薩行願,令其迴向——此相直接把相與普賢行願接上。第三十相安住一切世界海普照雲,普現淨妙道場及佛菩薩莊嚴身相,令其見者得無所見。第三十一相一切寶清淨光焰雲,普現諸菩薩海,莫不具足如來神力,常遊十方盡虛空界一切剎網。
自第二十七至三十一這五相,經文都略去了莊嚴一節。澄觀不當它是脫漏,判為:並略無莊嚴,亦由名中已含有故——名裡已經含了,所以文中省了。五分之科『或略不具』的通則,在此得一實例。
第三十二相普照一切法界莊嚴雲,最處於中,漸次隆起,以閻浮檀金、因陀羅網為嚴。澄觀判此相之位次最要:此相居頂之極,特顯其處在別,所以說處中;由此可知其餘三十一相都環繞此相,只是文中略而不明。漸次隆起一句正是顯此相之形,他引《智論》第五所說如來頂有骨髻如拳、《觀佛三昧經》說如合拳為證。頂相之所以先總標三十二、後結為嚴好——佛子!如來頂上有如是三十二種大人相以為嚴好——一總一結,正把這一處的三十二相收成一整。
眉間一相:白毫何以是相中之貴
第二依處眉間,只有一相:第三十三相遍法界光明雲,以摩尼寶華為嚴,放大光明具眾寶色,猶如日月洞徹清淨,普照十方國土,中現一切佛身,復出妙音宣暢法海。
澄觀在此交代一件體例事:自此以下每一相都有依處之句,所以文皆有五分——初依處、二顯名、三體嚴、四業用、五結數;頂上因為依處已在總標中說過,所以那三十二相文各唯四分。讀者若覺得後文比前文多出一句,這就是原因。
白毫之相,疏釋其體嚴極細:此相若收則右旋如覆瑠璃椀,若展則具十楞、有大光明;莊嚴唯用一寶,而光具多色,中間與外表皆空,這就是經文所說的洞徹。落到義上:一寶而多色,正是體一而用多;中表皆空,正是相而無自性。所以此相之名叫遍法界光明——名從用立,經文末句復出妙音已是法光,故此光之名從用而立。
眼與鼻:見無障礙,化佛出鼻
第三依處眼、第四依處鼻,各一相。澄觀合判為一句:第三眼、第四鼻各有一相。
第三十四相自在普見雲,以眾妙寶為嚴,摩尼寶光清淨映徹,普見一切皆無障礙。眼相之業用不在被看見,而在能見——普見一切而無障礙。這與前品之六根遍法界一問正相酬答。
第三十五相一切神通智慧雲,以清淨妙寶為嚴,眾寶色光彌覆其上,中出無量化佛坐寶蓮華,往諸世界為一切菩薩、一切眾生演不思議諸佛法海。鼻相之業用是出化佛而演法——這是本品的一個通則:任何一個身分,都不是靜態的裝飾,都在出佛、放光、說法。若問『鼻上為何出佛』,答案不在生理,在義理:十身之相,處處皆是法界之門。
舌之四相:從廣長到展卷
第五依處舌,有四相,是頂上以外相數最多的頭部依處。
第三十六相示現音聲影像雲,以眾色妙寶為嚴,宿世善根之所成就,其舌廣長遍覆一切諸世界海;如來若熙怡微笑,必放摩尼寶光普照十方法界,能令一切心得清涼,三世諸佛皆於光中炳然顯現,悉演廣大微妙之音,遍一切剎,住無量劫。澄觀判此即舌廣長相,並特別指出:於體嚴中說宿世善根所成,這是舉『因』為嚴;為什麼偏在此相說因?為的是讚演一乘之故。他又比較舌相之量:福德之人舌至鼻,權教之佛舌至髮際,其餘大乘中說現神足時方至梵世或覆三千,而此經直說其體便覆一切。這一比最能見教之高下:別經之廣長是神通所現,此經之廣長是相之本體。業用則分二,演法是釋相名中的音聲,現佛是釋相名中的影像——名之二字,用之二事,扣得極準。
第三十七相法界雲,其掌安平,眾寶為嚴,放妙寶光色相圓滿,猶如眉間所放光明,其光普照一切佛剎,唯塵所成,無有自性,光中復現無量諸佛,咸發妙音說一切法。澄觀釋『掌』字:掌謂近根,指舌之近根處;業用是光照諸剎,令應度者不必再作觀破摶聚之功,自然曉了諸法但是合塵而成、有何自性。此相是全品少見的直說空義處:所照之剎唯塵所成、無有自性——相海之中自有般若眼。
第三十八相照法界光明雲、第三十九相照耀法界雲,同在舌端。前者以如意寶王為嚴,恆出金色寶焰,中影現一切佛海,復震妙音充滿無邊世界,一一音中具一切音,聽者心悅,經無量劫玩味不忘;後者以摩尼寶王為飾,演眾色相微妙光明,充滿十方無量國土,盡法界靡不清淨,中有無量諸佛菩薩各吐妙音種種開示,一切菩薩現前聽受。澄觀判二相之別,用了一組極好的字:後二同在舌端,或居左右、或在上下;看其業用,只有展卷不同——前者是把佛海卷入舌端,後者是把諸佛展於法界。一卷一展,同是一舌。這就回答了『兩相為何相似』之疑:相似而不重複,差別在收放之勢。
上齶一相:闕文也照實記
第六依處上齶,一相:第四十相示現不思議法界雲,以因陀羅寶、毘瑠璃寶為嚴,放香燈焰清淨光雲充滿十方法界,示現種種神通方便,普於一切諸世界海開演甚深不思議法。
此處古德留了一條校記,值得照實傳。澄觀說:上齶既然有相,下齶按理也應該有,或許是梵本脫漏。他沒有替經文補一相,也沒有為闕文編一套道理,只是存疑。這是讀經的分寸:闕就是闕,記下來,不填。
牙之四相:四大牙與三德涅槃
第七依處牙,有四相。澄觀先解依處:牙有四相,是說左右上下四顆大牙;佛涅槃時四牙不碎,即指此。又訓詁經文的『輔』字:輔就是頰,也叫頰車骨。
第四十一相佛牙雲(右輔下牙),以眾寶摩尼卐字相輪為嚴,放大光明普照法界,普現一切佛身,周流十方開悟群生。第四十二相寶焰彌盧藏雲(右輔上牙),以摩尼寶藏為嚴,放金剛香焰清淨光明,一一光明充滿法界,示現諸佛神力,復現十方世界淨妙道場。澄觀釋此名:右輔上牙名彌慮者,顯妙高故——彌盧即妙高山之名,以山之高顯此相之勝。第四十三相寶燈普照雲(左輔下牙),以妙寶舒華發香為嚴,放燈焰雲清淨光明,充滿諸世界海,顯現諸佛坐蓮華藏師子之座,諸菩薩眾共所圍遶。
第四十四相照現如來雲(左輔上牙),以清淨光明、閻浮檀金、寶網、寶華為嚴,放大焰輪充滿法界,普現一切諸佛,以神通力於虛空中流布法乳、法燈、法寶,教化一切諸菩薩眾。澄觀把此相的三事配成一組法義:四中有法乳等三,同是一演法之事——約資養法身而名乳、約照了萬境而稱燈、約令其圓淨而為第三,也就是演三德涅槃之法,亦成三德涅槃之益。三事不是三種寶物,是一場說法的三重功能:養、照、成。落到讀者身上,聽法之益也正是這三層——被養、被照、被成就。
齒與脣:微笑放光,色如紅蓮
第八依處齒、第九依處脣,各一相。澄觀於此再記一條校語:上二各應分出上下——齒與脣按理也該分上下,經文合說了。
第四十五相普現光明雲,一一齒間相海莊嚴,若微笑時悉放光明,具眾寶色摩尼寶焰右旋宛轉,流布法界靡不充滿,演佛言音說普賢行。齒相之業用繫於微笑——這是全品最有溫度的一句:佛之微笑不是表情,是說法之機。所說者又正是普賢行,說者與所說在此合一。
第四十六相影現一切寶光雲,放閻浮檀真金色、蓮華色、一切寶色廣大光明,照于法界悉令清淨。澄觀釋其體嚴:以脣色赤好,如日初出時的紅蓮葉。這是相之形色與所放之色相應——經文說放蓮華色光,正因脣本如蓮。
頸一相:紺蒲柔軟
第十依處頸,一相:第四十七相普照一切世界雲,以摩尼寶王為嚴,紺蒲成就柔軟細滑,放毘盧遮那清淨光明,充滿十方一切世界,中現一切諸佛。澄觀於此依處無別釋,只判『第十頸,有一相』。紺蒲是深青而潤澤之相;此相之光直以毘盧遮那為名,與第二十二相相呼應——遍一切處之光,不獨在頂,也在頸。
肩之五相:右二左三的不齊
第十一依處肩,有五相:右肩二相、左肩三相。澄觀不掩其不齊,直記:第十一肩有五相,右二左三,或亦脫也——也許是脫了一相。存疑而不強解,與上齶一條同一分寸。
第四十八相佛廣大一切寶雲(右肩),放一切寶色、真金色、蓮華色光明,成寶焰網普照法界,中現一切菩薩。第四十九相最勝寶普照雲(右肩),其色清淨如閻浮金,放摩尼光充滿法界,中現一切菩薩。二相業用皆是現菩薩——肩者荷擔之處,所現皆菩薩,義自相應。
第五十相最勝光照法界雲(左肩),猶如頂上及眉間之種種莊嚴,放閻浮檀金及蓮華色眾寶光明,成大焰網充滿法界,於中示現一切神力。此相自比於頂與眉間,是全品少見的相與相互指——相海之相互融入,於此見一斑。第五十一相光明遍照雲(左肩),其相右旋,以閻浮檀金色摩尼寶王為嚴,放眾寶華香焰光明充遍法界,中現一切諸佛及嚴淨國土。第五十二相普照耀雲(左肩),其相右旋,微密莊嚴,放佛燈焰雲清淨光明,充遍法界,顯現一切菩薩種種莊嚴悉皆妙好。右旋二字兩相連用——旋非裝飾,是相之勢;順旋而不逆,正顯順法界而轉。
胸之十一相:卐字當中,左右各五
第十二依處胸,有十一相。澄觀判其位置:初一當中,左右各五。
第五十三相吉祥海雲,形如卐字,以摩尼寶華為嚴,放一切寶色種種光焰輪,充滿法界普令清淨,復出妙音宣暢法海。此相之名,澄觀有一段講究:卐字正翻就是吉祥海雲,因為是依形而立名,所以形相之句本應迴置於名下,而經文先標了形;不過以形屬體嚴所攝來看,這樣寫也無違。這一條看似是文序之辨,實則教了一個讀法:名、形、體三者本是一事,次序可移而義不移。
右邊五相:第五十四相示現光照雲,以因陀羅網為嚴,放大光輪充滿法界,普現無量諸佛。第五十五相普現如來雲,以諸菩薩摩尼寶冠為嚴,放大光明普照十方悉令清淨,示現三世諸佛坐於道場,普現神力廣宣法海。第五十六相開敷華雲,以摩尼寶華為嚴,放寶香焰燈清淨光明,狀如蓮華充滿世界。第五十七相可悅樂金色雲,以一切寶心王藏摩尼王為嚴,放淨光明照于法界,中現猶如佛眼廣大光明之摩尼寶藏。第五十八相佛海雲,以毘瑠璃寶、香燈、華鬘為嚴,放滿虛空之摩尼寶王香燈大焰清淨光明,充遍十方國土,普現道場眾會。
左邊五相:第五十九相示現光明雲,以無數菩薩坐寶蓮華為嚴,放摩尼王種種間錯寶焰光明,普淨一切諸法界海,示現無量諸佛及佛妙音演說諸法。第六十相示現遍法界光明雲,以摩尼寶海為嚴,放大光明遍一切剎,普現諸菩薩眾。第六十一相普勝雲,以日光明摩尼王寶輪鬘為嚴,放大光焰充滿法界諸世界海,示現一切世界、一切如來、一切眾生。第六十二相轉法輪妙音雲,以一切法燈清淨香蘂為嚴,放大光明充滿法界,普現一切諸佛所有相海及以心海。第六十三相莊嚴雲,以三世一切佛海為嚴,放淨光明嚴淨一切諸佛國土,普現十方諸佛菩薩及佛菩薩所行之行。
十一相之中,第六十一相示現世界、如來、眾生三者,第六十二相普現相海與心海,第六十三相以佛海為莊嚴而現佛與行——愈近末愈總。胸是卐字所在,吉祥之所繫,故此一處的相,多以『普現』『示現』為業:吉祥不是自受用的祥瑞,是為他顯現。
手之十三相:右五左四,指二掌二
第十三依處手,相數最多,有十三相。澄觀分為三節:初九是直語手相,其次二是左右指,最後二是左右掌。
右手五相:第六十四相海照雲,眾寶莊嚴,恒放月焰清淨光明,充滿虛空一切世界,發大音聲歎美一切諸菩薩行。第六十五相影現照耀雲,以毘瑠璃、帝青、摩尼寶華為嚴,放大光明普照十方菩薩所住蓮華藏、摩尼藏等一切世界,悉現無量諸佛以淨法身坐菩提樹,震動十方國土。第六十六相燈焰鬘普嚴淨雲,以毘盧遮那寶為嚴,放大光明成變化網,普現諸菩薩眾咸戴寶冠演諸行海;澄觀釋『成變化網』一句:是光化為網。第六十七相普現一切摩尼雲,蓮華焰燈為嚴,放海藏光充遍法界,普現無量諸佛坐蓮華座。第六十八相光明雲,摩尼焰海為嚴,放眾寶焰、香焰、華焰清淨光明,充滿一切諸世界網,普現諸佛道場。
左手四相:第六十九相毘瑠璃清淨燈雲,寶地妙色為嚴,放如來金色光明,念念常現一切上妙莊嚴之具。第七十相一切剎智慧燈音聲雲,以因陀羅網、金剛華為嚴,放閻浮檀金清淨光明,普照十方一切世界。第七十一相安住寶蓮華光明雲,眾寶妙華為嚴,放大光明如須彌燈,普照十方世界。第七十二相遍照法界雲,以妙寶鬘、寶輪、寶瓶、因陀羅網及眾妙相為嚴,放大光明普照十方國土,示現一切法界、世界海、一切如來坐蓮華座。澄觀於此相點出全品最深的一個字:左中七十二云因陀羅網為嚴者,即是網鞔之相,互涉入故。帝網在此不在譬喻的位置,而在體嚴的位置——不是說相『好像』帝網,是說相之體本來就是重重互涉的網。華嚴十玄之無盡義,於佛身相上的落處即此。
右手五相、左手四相的不齊,澄觀同樣兩存其說:右五左四者,或是左邊脫了一相,或是表示右手常用之故;而前面肩相卻是右二左三,兩處相通則正好相等。這一句是很好的示範——遇到數目不齊,先看有無別的解釋,不急著判為錯。
指與掌:第七十三相現諸劫剎海旋雲(右手指),以水月焰藏摩尼王一切寶華為嚴,放大光明充滿法界,恒出微妙音聲滿十方剎。第七十四相安住一切寶雲(左手指),以帝青、金剛寶為嚴,放摩尼王眾寶光明充滿法界,普現一切諸佛及諸菩薩。第七十五相照耀雲(右手掌),以摩尼王千輻寶輪為嚴,放寶光明右旋充滿法界,普現一切諸佛,一一佛身光焰熾然,說法度人,淨諸世界。第七十六相焰輪普增長化現法界道場雲(左手掌),以日光摩尼王千輻輪為嚴,放大光明充滿諸世界海,示現一切菩薩,演說普賢所有行海,普入一切諸佛國土,各各開悟無量眾生。
二掌皆有千輪。澄觀釋之:輪之轂、輻、輞三事具足,自然成就,不待人工。這一句最堪落地——相之圓滿不是造作出來的,是行滿自成。手是作事之具,掌中之輪自然成就,正說明:行到,相自現。
陰藏一相:隱密處也在說法
第十四依處陰藏,一相:第七十七相普流出佛音聲雲,以一切妙寶為嚴,放摩尼燈華焰光明,其光熾盛具眾寶色,普照一切虛空法界,普現一切諸佛遊行往來處處周遍。澄觀只用六個字帶過依處:第十四陰藏一相,猶如馬王——以古來相法所傳之馬王隱藏之相釋之。
要留意的是這一相的業用:最隱密之處,所放的是佛音聲雲,所現的是諸佛遊行往來、處處周遍。隱與遍在此並不相礙。若有人疑此處不宜列入莊嚴之相,這一相恰恰答了:相海之中無有一處是不說法的。
坐處二相:與虛空同一相而能生一切相
第十五依處坐處,二相。第七十八相寶燈鬘普照雲(右臀),以諸摩尼寶為嚴,放不思議寶焰光明,彌布十方一切法界,與虛空法界同為一相,而能出生一切諸相,一一相中悉現諸佛自在神變。第七十九相示現一切法界海光明彌覆虛空雲(左臀),猶如蓮華,以清淨妙寶為嚴飾,放光明網遍照十方法界,普現種種相雲。
第七十八相有一句要緊話:與虛空法界同為一相,而能出生一切諸相。同為一相,是說其體無別、不可分割;能生諸相,是說其用無盡、差別歷然。體之一與用之多,在同一句中並立——這是本品讀相的總鑰匙。前面所有相之「放光」「普現」,都是這一句的展開;後面九十七之數不可配法之判,也是這一句的必然。
髀二相:上下相稱,堪任遠行
第十六依處髀,二相。第八十相普現雲(右髀),以眾色摩尼為嚴,其髀與腨上下相稱,放摩尼焰妙法光明,於一念中能普示現一切寶王遊步相海。第八十一相現一切佛無量相海雲(左髀),以一切寶海隨順安住為嚴,廣大遊行,放淨光明普照眾生,悉使希求無上佛法。澄觀釋左髀之嚴:左邊說隨順安住者,因為髀多行動,所以須用多寶隨順而莊嚴。
此二相之義眼在『行』:上下相稱是堪行之形,遊步相海是能行之用,廣大遊行是行之遠,令眾生希求無上佛法是行之歸。佛之腿相所說的,正是行門本身。
腨三相:鹿王之腨與通身之毛
第十七依處腨,三相。第八十二相一切虛空法界雲(右邊伊尼延鹿王腨),以光明妙寶為嚴,其相圓直,善能遊步,放閻浮金色清淨光明遍照佛世界,發大音聲普皆震動,復現一切諸佛國土住於虛空寶焰莊嚴,無量菩薩從中化現。第八十三相莊嚴海雲(左邊伊尼延鹿王腨),色如真金,能遍遊行一切佛剎,放一切寶清淨光明,充滿法界施作佛事。
第八十四相普現法界影像雲(寶腨上毛),其毛右旋,一一毛端放寶光明充滿十方法界,示現一切諸佛神力,其諸毛孔悉放光明,一切佛剎於中顯現。澄觀於此有一條重要校勘:第三膊毛通於二腨;若依晉經,只說毛端,那就是通身一切毛了,義應如舊譯,則依處便成十九。這條校語是全品十九處之數的來歷——十八處是本經之文,第十九處是依晉經而通身之毛別立。古德立科而不諱其所本,這是治學的實相。
足之十三相:從足下到指端,通分為七
第十八依處足,有十三相。澄觀通分為七:初足下、二足上、三足指間、四足跟、五足趺、六足四周、七足指端;後六各分左右為二,文顯可知。
第八十五相一切菩薩海安住雲(足下),色如金剛、閻浮檀金、清淨蓮華,放寶光明普照十方諸世界海,寶香焰雲處處周遍,舉足將步香氣周流,具眾寶色充滿法界。澄觀釋名:名安住者,因為足下安平,一切著地,不容一針。此相略無左右,他並記一條校語:晉經在足趺之後別有足下千輻輪相,此經必當合有,所以後品才會說足下輪相名為普照王;今經千輪之言乃在指間,或許因為足下之輪人所常知,而指間有輪是異,所以特舉。這是古德以異譯與後品互證的示範。
第八十六相普照一切光明雲(右足上),以一切眾寶為嚴,放大光明充滿法界,示現一切諸佛菩薩。第八十七相普現一切諸佛雲(左足上),以寶藏摩尼為嚴,放寶光明,念念中現一切佛神通變化及其法海所坐道場,盡未來際劫無有間斷。
第八十八相光照一切法界海雲(右足指間),以須彌燈摩尼王千輻焰輪種種莊嚴,放大光明充滿十方法界世界海,普現一切諸佛所有種種寶莊嚴相。第八十九相現一切佛海雲(左足指間),以摩尼寶華、香焰、燈鬘、一切寶輪為嚴,恒放寶海清淨光明充滿虛空,普及十方世界,示現一切諸佛及諸菩薩圓滿音聲、卐字等相,利益無量眾生。
第九十相自在照耀雲(右足跟),以帝青、寶末為嚴,常放如來妙寶光明,其光妙好充滿法界,皆同一相無有差別,示現一切諸佛坐於道場演說妙法。第九十一相示現妙音演說諸法海雲(左足跟),以變化海摩尼寶、香焰海須彌華摩尼寶及毘瑠璃為嚴,放大光明充滿法界,普現諸佛神力。
第九十二相示現一切莊嚴光明雲(右足趺),眾寶所成極妙莊嚴,放閻浮檀金色清淨光明普照十方法界,其光明相猶如大雲,普覆一切諸佛道場。第九十三相現眾色相雲(左足趺),以一切月焰藏毘盧遮那寶、因陀羅尼羅寶為嚴,念念遊行諸法界海,放摩尼燈香焰光明遍滿法界。澄觀於此訓一名:因陀羅尼羅者,此云帝青。
第九十四相普藏雲(右足四周),以因陀羅尼羅金剛寶為嚴,放寶光明充滿虛空,示現一切諸佛坐於道場摩尼寶王師子之座。第九十五相光明遍照法界雲(左足四周),以摩尼寶華為嚴,放大光明充滿法界平等一相,示現一切諸佛及諸菩薩自在神力,以大妙音演說法界無盡法門。
第九十六相示現莊嚴雲(右足指端),以甚可愛樂之閻浮檀清淨真金為嚴,放大光明充滿十方法界,示現一切諸佛及諸菩薩無盡法海種種功德、神通變化。第九十七相現一切佛神變雲(左足指端),以不思議佛光明、月焰普香、摩尼寶焰輪為嚴,放眾寶色清淨光明充滿諸世界海,示現一切諸佛及諸菩薩演說一切諸佛法海。
自頂至足,九十七相至此列盡。值得一提的是:全品最末一相所現的,仍是諸佛菩薩演說法海——起於頂上之現佛身,終於足端之演法海;相海之首尾,都是說法。
九十七之數,不可拿來配法
列完九十七相,最容易生的下一個念頭是:這個數目有什麼深意?九十七該配哪九十七法?
澄觀對此下了一句斷語,是全品最要緊的一道護欄。他先列疑:上來所列九十七相,次第與數名是譯者所安置的;既然說是不能說盡,怎麼會剛好不滿百?足下闕了一相,脣與齶又沒有分開;若把這兩處合計進去,六根便都辨足了,何獨闕耳?若再加上兩耳與足下一相,正好圓成百數以顯無盡,豈不美哉!他又反問:況且此中所列,連權教的三十二相都還沒有列盡,難道普賢之力連一百都說不到嗎?
於是結論落下:晉經有所遺漏只有九十四相,也沒有次第之數,所以可知九十七這個數不在於生情配屬諸法。
這句話值得反覆讀。它防的是兩種病:一是穿鑿——見數就配法,把偶然的譯本數目當成法門的骨架;二是輕忽——以為數目既不配法便無關緊要,於是連相也讀糊塗了。正確的讀法在中間:數是譯者所安,相是佛德所顯;數可以不定,相之遍法界不可移。
同一分寸,澄觀也用在權實三十二相之會通上:既然三十二相在權教與實教中不同,互有互無,所以不作會釋——不強行把此經一頂之三十二與權教全佛之三十二配成一套。不會釋,不是不懂,是知其不可強同。
結略顯廣:說到九十七,仍只是略說
末後普賢自結:佛子!毘盧遮那如來有如是等十華藏世界海微塵數大人相;一一身分,眾寶妙相以為莊嚴。
澄觀判此為結略顯廣,並釋其所以:別別地說難以周遍,所以須要結略;而略又不能盡其實,所以須要顯廣。他接著算了一筆帳:一個華藏世界海之微塵數的相,已經無邊了,何況是十個華藏;那便是無盡復無盡——不是具普眼的人,怎麼看得見呢?
這一結,把前面九十七相的位置一次擺正:九十七不是總數,是樣品。經文開頭說『今當為汝演說如來所有相海』,中間列九十七,末尾說微塵數——首尾一對照就明白,中段的列舉自始便是舉略以顯廣。李通玄科此品為九十九段,正是把首之總舉、中之九十七、末之總結通三分數盡,其意亦同。
落到讀者身上,這一結是一句勸請:不要停在數目上。真正被交代的功課,是宗趣所說的那一句——顯無盡相海是宗,令人修無盡之行而顯成此相是趣。相是果,看果是為了認因;九十七道光照見的,其實是九十七次可以起行的地方。
承衍
本品之義,於華嚴一宗有三重承衍,皆古德成說,誌錄不判。
其一,判教之定位。法藏於《探玄記》體性門辨三十二相在小乘為色形、於《華嚴一乘教義分齊章》約教辨相段判始教入法身功德所攝、終教即真如法身,而若依一乘,則有十蓮華藏世界海微塵數相,相與業用皆遍法界,所以說十者是為顯無盡——並直指此即相海品所說。他又引《觀佛三昧海經》三類相好之判:略中略之三十二相當人天二乘,略說之八萬四千相當三乘菩薩,廣說之佛實相好如雜華經所說者,即是指此華嚴相海品,是一乘別教之相。澄觀於《疏》中同引同判,並註明雜華即此經異名。本品在五教判中的位置,由此而定。
其二,體性之異釋。法藏於《探玄記》立八門別釋,其體性一門五重次第:小乘以色形為體,初教依《瑜伽》於二十二根中取眼、舌、男、身四根為體,終教依《對法論》以定慧為體,攝相歸本則唯是淨識為體,會緣歸實則唯是真如為性,若圓教相海則以無盡法界為性。出因一門更集七家之說——布施、持戒、忍辱、大悲、如來藏性、十善、各別出因——而以佛果萬德圓融通之:或一行通感多相、或萬行俱成一相。澄觀則以事理二嚴通釋諸相,李通玄以三業二智之報成表法,科為九十九段。三軌並行,誌錄不判。
其三,相好二品之互足。本品列相,次品〈如來隨好光明功德品〉列好;澄觀釋足下輪相時已預繫後品之普照王,相與好相待而明,其義於二品合看方足。又本品上承〈佛不思議法品〉之總明果法,遠酬第二會普光明殿之佛果德問——第七會重會普光明殿的酬答結構,於此品完足其身相一分。
至於三乘經論,以相海之名檢《成唯識論》《攝大乘論》《瑜伽師地論》《解深密經》,皆無所得。九十七大人相與十身相海是一乘圓教別立之科目,三乘教典未見同名科目相對——此為體例之異,據實標闕,不以他處之文充之。
The Chapter Before Finished Speaking the Buddha’s Inconceivable Dharmas — Why Speak the Bodily Marks Over Again
Reading into this chapter, the doubt that most readily arises is this: the Chapter on the Inconceivable Dharmas of the Buddhas has already spoken the fruit-dharmas of the Buddha over in sum; why then set up another chapter that counts from the crown of the head down to the tips of the toes, listing ninety-seven bodily marks one after another? Is that not repetition, or even mere fussiness?
Chengguan, adjudging the reason for this chapter’s coming, answers very directly: the preceding chapter makes the fruit-dharmas clear in sum, and this chapter displays the virtue of the marks in particular — what has been said in sum must still be said in particular; near at hand it answers the question about the ‘body’ left over from the preceding chapter, and far off it answers the old question, raised at the second gathering in the Hall of Universal Light, about the six sense-faculties of the Buddha, the eyes and the rest. Fazang adjudges it along the same track: taken far off, this chapter and the preceding one alike repay the question about the fruit-virtues of a buddha at the gathering of Universal Light; taken near at hand, the preceding chapter makes the fruit-dharmas clear in sum, and this chapter displays the virtue of the marks in particular, and therefore this chapter comes.
Put another way, this chapter is not an afterword; it is a making good. Earlier it was said that the merit of the Buddha is inconceivable, and that was the import; now that inconceivability has to be brought down upon a body one can see — the eyes, the nose, the tongue, the fangs, the teeth, the lips, the neck, the shoulders, the breast, the hands, the thighs, the calves, the feet — telling place by place what light each emits, what buddhas each shows forth, what Dharma each expounds. If the import does not come down upon the marks, it easily hangs in the air and turns into airy talk; if the marks are not tied to the import, they are no more than a description of a buddha-image. The weight of this chapter lies exactly in its nailing the two together.
Here is a common misreading to be cleared away: taking ‘ocean of marks’ for a figure of exaggeration. Chengguan, in explaining the chapter’s name, says it plainly — the ten bodies of the Tathāgata raise up the person and display the virtue, and the ocean of marks rests upon the person and displays the marks; a superior form brought about by the recompense of merit and plainly to be told apart is therefore called a mark, and because the virtue of the marks is deep and vast it is called an ocean. ‘Ocean’ is not an adjective; it is a criterion: the substance of the marks is vast, the function of the marks is all-pervading, and mark and mark fuse into one another beyond conceiving — only so do they deserve the name of ocean. The tenet and aim follow from this: to display the inexhaustible ocean of marks is the tenet, and to make men cultivate the inexhaustible practices by which such marks are displayed and brought about is the aim — speaking of marks is, in the end, meant to send people to the practice that can bring such marks about.
Why Samantabhadra Speaks, and Not the Buddha Himself
From beginning to end this chapter has only one speaker: the bodhisattva-mahāsattva Samantabhadra. His first words are the enjoining of the hearing and the granting of the telling — Sons of the Buddha, I shall now expound for you all the ocean of marks of the Tathāgata. After the compilers’ one narrating clause at the opening, ‘at that time the bodhisattva-mahāsattva Samantabhadra told the bodhisattvas,’ there is no further interjection by the compilers. This is a fact of the chapter’s pattern, not a missing passage.
Why, then, should the Buddha’s marks be spoken by Samantabhadra? Chengguan gives two layers of reason: one is fittingness — the ocean of marks pervades the whole Dharma realm, and Samantabhadra is precisely the man of universal practice; only by making men practice the universal practice can the universal marks be obtained, and so it is most fitting that Samantabhadra should speak. The other is the order of the assembly — Samantabhadra is the host of this gathering, what he had to say before has been said out, and so he goes on to speak this chapter. Li Tongxuan brings out a further sense: this ocean of marks is brought about by the recompense of practice, and Samantabhadra is that practice; hence it is the practitioner himself who is made to speak the fruit of the recompensed virtue of his own practice.
None of the three masters takes the speaker for an accident. Herein lies the way to read this chapter: the marks are the fruit, and practice is the cause; to have Samantabhadra speak the marks is to have the cause speak the fruit. If you read the ninety-seven marks as an inventory of the Buddha’s outward appearance, this chapter is left with nothing but ornate phrasing; if you remember that the speaker is Samantabhadra, these ninety-seven marks turn at once into ninety-seven dedications — every single light points back to some practice that can be cultivated.
Reading a Single Mark: Which Five Places to Look At
Ninety-seven marks look fussy, but every one of them is written upon the same frame. Chengguan adjudges that the text properly setting out the states of the marks has five parts throughout: first, the place of support; second, the listing of the name; third, the adornment of the substance; fourth, the function in action; fifth, the concluding number. Sometimes a part is abridged and not complete, and one knows it on reaching the text; sometimes a clause about the benefit brought about is added, and this is still gathered under the function in action.
These five places are the five joints for reading this chapter. The place of support — where upon the body this mark grows (the crown of the head, between the brows, the right hand, the left heel); the listing of the name — what this mark is called (most often named with ‘cloud’); the adornment of the substance — what jewels are its substance and its ornament (maṇi, beryl, the gold of Jambūnada, the net of Indra); the function in action — what its emitted light does (illumining the Dharma realm everywhere, showing forth the buddhas, expounding the wondrous Dharma, making sentient beings pure); the concluding number — that this is the such-and-such mark.
Chengguan further accounts for the relation between the name and the substance and function: the name is established in dependence upon the substance and the function, and so the name is always explained by substance and function — sometimes taken from substance alone, sometimes from function alone, sometimes from both together, to be pondered as the text runs; and where the name and the sense of the substance and function are not alike, that is a case where the text is abridged while the sense is contained, and no forcing is called for. This clause is a safeguard: when you come upon a mark whose name does not square with its content, do not go inventing a match.
Most important of all is his one general rule about the adornment of the substance: what is called jeweled adornment displays throughout the adornment of the substance; taken as phenomena, it is said that maṇi and the rest serve as adornment, and it also displays the jewel of wisdom, adorning by its perfect purity; in every single mark there are both the adornment of phenomena and the adornment of principle, to be explained as is fitting. This one clause rescues the whole chapter from being a ‘jewel catalogue’ — jewels are phenomena, wisdom is principle, and one and the same sentence of the sūtra can be read on both faces. Brought down to the reader, it comes to this: when you read of maṇi, beryl, and adamant, do not see only gemstones; that is at the same time speaking of the brightness, the keenness, and the undefiledness of wisdom.
Why a Single Place, the Crown of the Head, Holds Thirty-Two Marks
The first place of support is the crown of the head, and the sūtra says at its very opening: upon the crown of the Tathāgata’s head there are thirty-two great-man marks adorned with all manner of jewels. Of the ninety-seven marks, a third of them are crowded upon one crown of the head — this is the most conspicuous imbalance in the whole chapter, and also the most important footing that the Huayan school’s tenet has here.
Chengguan does not evade it; he adjudges straight out: that this one place alone has thirty-two is because, in principle, there ought to be more still, and it is in order to display that in perfect fusion one is all that a single crown is made to hold the number thirty-two of the provisional teaching. The provisional teaching says a buddha has thirty-two marks, and that is the number of marks for the whole buddha; this sūtra sets a full thirty-two marks upon a single place of support. This step is not addition; it is conversion — within one part all parts are complete. When Huayan speaks of one and many containing each other, of principal and companion each complete, the scriptural warrant need not be sought far off: it is here in this first summarizing clause.
Why, then, precisely the crown? Chengguan sets a question to himself and answers it: if so, why are the remaining places of support not likewise? Answer: in order to display the honor and excellence of the crown. He cites the Shansheng jing comparing the marks and the excellences, saying that all the merit of the world does not come up to the merit of a single hair of the Tathāgata, that the merit of all the hairs does not come up to the merit of a single excellence, that all the excellences do not come up to one mark, that all the marks do not come up to the white tuft, and that the white tuft in turn does not come up to the invisible crown. The crown is the utmost among the marks, and so it is most fitting that this sense of one being all should be displayed upon the crown.
The thirty-two marks upon the crown may be read in several layers by following their functions in action. The first mark, Light Illumining Every Quarter and Everywhere Emitting Measureless Great Nets of Light, has wondrous jewels for its adornment and jewel-made hair spread everywhere, soft and finely close-set, every strand emitting maṇi light and showing the Buddha’s body perfect in color and mark — this is the opening mark of the whole chapter, and it establishes first the rule that ‘a mark can show forth buddhas.’ Li Tongxuan here betokens the sense word by word: ‘quarter’ is dharma, the dharma by which the fundamental wisdom brings about the wisdom of differentiation; the net of light is what is born as recompense from the setting up of teachings according to capacity and the drawing out of all sentient beings within the wisdom of differentiation, and taken with respect to cause it is named a net of light; and the thirty-two jewels are matched to the three kinds of action and the two wisdoms. This is one track of betokening the sense; it is set down. The second mark, Cloud of the Light of the Buddha-Eye, adorned with maṇi-kings and sending out a golden light like that emitted by the tuft between the brows — Chengguan points out how to read this mark: the adornment of the substance explains its sense of light, and the function in action explains its sense of the buddha-eye, because the buddha-eye illumines all without exception; and the matter of the tuft-mark emitting light has already been spoken of in the Chapter on the Manifestation of the Tathāgata at the first assembly. The third mark, Cloud Filling the Dharma Realm, adorned with jewel-wheels, sending out the lamplight of merit and wisdom, illumining the world-oceans of the Dharma realm in the ten directions and showing forth buddhas and bodhisattvas everywhere — the sense that a mark can show forth buddhas is here spread over the whole Dharma realm. The fourth mark, Cloud Manifesting Universal Illumination, adorned with true gold and maṇi, shining through inconceivable buddha-lands, with all buddhas appearing therein. The fifth mark, Cloud Emitting Jeweled Light, with beryl for its flower-stamens, showing spiritual transformations everywhere in its light and praising the wisdom and merit of the practices the Tathāgata performed of old — this is the first time the ‘mark’ is pointed back to the ‘causal practice.’
The sixth mark, Cloud Manifesting the Tathāgata’s Great Sovereignty Pervading the Dharma Realm, with flaming jewel maṇi for its crown and the flaming jewel-wheel of light that awakens all for its garland, showing in its light all Tathāgatas seated within the place of the Way and a cloud of all-knowledge filling empty space and the Dharma realm. The seventh mark, Cloud of the Tathāgata’s Universal Lamp, adorned with the great sovereign jewel-ocean that can shake the lands of the Dharma realm, showing in its light the oceans of merit of the bodhisattvas of the ten directions and the ocean of banners of the wisdom of the buddhas of the three times — the ocean of cause and the ocean of fruit appear together in a single mark. The eighth mark, Vast Cloud Universally Illumining the Buddhas, adorned with Indra jewels, wish-king jewels, and maṇi-king jewels, ever emitting the light of the flaming lamps of bodhisattvas and showing the oceans of the manifold colors and marks of the buddhas, their oceans of great voice, and their oceans of pure power. Chengguan here distinguishes a single word: the maṇi spoken of in the adornment has the sense of ‘intent,’ and is not the same as the wish-fulfilling jewel — jewels of the same name differ in sense as the text differs, and this is the caution to be kept in reading names. The ninth mark, Cloud of Perfect Light, with the manifold jewels spreading great nets of flame filling the ten directions, so that all sentient beings see the Tathāgata appearing seated before them, praising the merit of the dharma-bodies of buddhas and bodhisattvas and causing them to enter the Tathāgata’s pure state — here for the first time the function of a mark plainly says ‘causing to enter’: it is not merely showing forth, it is drawing in. The tenth mark, Cloud of Light Universally Illumining the Treasury of All Bodhisattva Practice, with jeweled flames covering all lands everywhere, the Dharma realm of the ten directions penetrated without obstruction, and the Buddha’s voice sounding out and proclaiming the ocean of the Dharma.
The eleventh mark, Cloud of Universal Light Shining Forth, adorned with beryl, Indra jewels, and adamantine maṇi, sending out a wondrous sound that fills the Dharma realm. Chengguan singles out the closing clause of this mark: all of this is conjured forth by the great ocean of merit that is the wisdom of the buddhas — this is a distinguishing of the cause of the function in action, and is still gathered under the function in action. This clause is the pivot of the whole chapter: the marks are not ornaments that grew of themselves, they are conjured forth by the ocean of merit that is wisdom. The twelfth mark, Cloud of Perfect Awakening, with jeweled flowers emitting light in which there are Tathāgatas seated within the place of the Way, causing all worlds to attain purity and cutting off forever all false discrimination. The thirteenth mark, Cloud of Light Shining Forth, adorned with the mind-king maṇi of the ocean of the treasury of jeweled flames, showing in its light measureless bodhisattvas and the practices they cultivate, and the wisdom-bodies, dharma-bodies, and oceans of color and mark of all Tathāgatas filling the Dharma realm — the three senses of ‘body’ appear together in one mark. The fourteenth mark, Cloud of Adornment Universally Illumining, with a great jeweled lotus seat in its light covering the Dharma realm and of itself expounding the four bodhisattva practices. These four bodhisattva practices are not a phrase hanging in the air; Chengguan explains them by citing the Yuqie shidi lun, the Bodhisattva Ground: bodhisattvas have, in brief, four practices — first, the practice of the perfections; second, the practice of the factors of awakening; third, the practice of spiritual penetrations; fourth, the practice of ripening sentient beings. The Dharma that the mark expounds is a gate of practice one can point to item by item.
The fifteenth mark, Cloud Manifesting the Practice of the Ocean of the Buddha’s Samādhis, showing within a single thought the Tathāgata’s measureless adornments and adorning everywhere the Dharma realm and the inconceivable world-oceans — one thought and the measureless: this mark displays the perfection of time in particular. The sixteenth mark, Cloud of the Ocean of Transformations Universally Illumining, adorned with wondrous jeweled lotuses as great as Mount Sumeru, the light of the manifold jewels born of the Buddha’s vows, showing transformations without end — the four words ‘born of the Buddha’s vows’ push the cause of the marks back from practice to vow. The seventeenth mark, Cloud of the Liberation of All Tathāgatas, its light adorning the lion thrones of all buddhas and showing the color-images of the buddhas together with measureless buddha-dharmas and oceans of buddha-lands. The eighteenth mark, Cloud of Sovereign Skillful Means Universally Illumining, adorned with beryl flowers, true-gold lotuses, maṇi-king lamps, and clouds of the flames of the wondrous Dharma, showing everywhere all the beautiful articles of adornment. The nineteenth mark, Cloud of Awakening to the Buddha-Lineage, complete with a thousand wheels, pure within and without, born of the roots of goodness of former times, sending out the light of the sun of wisdom and proclaiming the ocean of the Dharma. Chengguan here collates the Sanskrit text: where the nineteenth says ‘complete with a thousand wheels,’ the Sanskrit text says ‘complete with wheels of a thousand spokes’ — a thousand wheels is the wheel of a thousand spokes, not some other thing. What is most worth noting in this mark is the phrase ‘born of the roots of goodness of former times’: a mark is a recompense, and a recompense must have a cause.
The twentieth mark, Cloud of Sovereignty Manifesting the Marks of All Tathāgatas, spreading great jeweled flames that fill the Dharma realm and showing everywhere buddhas of the three times as many as the motes of dust of the buddha-lands, valiant and fearless as the lion king, complete in color and mark and in wisdom. The twenty-first mark, Cloud Pervadingly Illumining the Whole Dharma Realm, showing forth the wondrous treasuries of wisdom of measureless and boundless buddhas and bodhisattvas; Chengguan adjudges that this mark shows the two lights of body and wisdom, alike displaying wisdom — light has the two senses of bodily light and wisdom-light, and in this mark both senses are displayed. The twenty-second mark, Cloud of the Marks of Vairocana Tathāgata, adorned with wondrous jeweled flowers and the pure wondrous moon of beryl, emitting the light of hundreds of thousands of myriads of koṭis of maṇi jewels filling empty space and the Dharma realm, with measureless buddha-lands appearing therein, each with a Tathāgata seated with legs crossed — in the whole chapter this alone takes a buddha’s name for its mark-name, and the sense of pervading all places is plainly pointed out here. The twenty-third mark, Cloud of Light Universally Illumining All Buddhas, showing all buddhas turning the wheel of the Dharma. The twenty-fourth mark, Cloud Universally Manifesting All Adornments, in thought after thought ever showing unspeakably and unspeakably many buddhas and bodhisattvas seated within the places of the Way. The twenty-fifth mark, Cloud Sending Forth the Sounds of the Whole Dharma Realm, adorned with the ocean of maṇi jewels and superb sandalwood, sending out a subtle and wondrous sound everywhere and revealing to sentient beings the whole ocean of deeds — the function of this mark is not to show forth buddhas but to let beings see their own deeds.
The twenty-sixth mark, Cloud of the Wheel of Transformations Universally Illumining the Buddhas, adorned with the Tathāgata’s pure eyes. Chengguan explains this one most finely: that the pure eyes serve as adornment runs through the ten eyes; what follows from ‘its light illumines’ displays the function in action, and this too runs through the two lights of body and wisdom; the pure eyes and the light are just what explain the two words ‘universally illumining’ in the mark’s name; and the articles of adornment shown in the light are the sense of ‘wheel’ above, that is, the wheel of the Dharma. Name, substance, and function are here buckled together, and this is the exemplar of the chapter’s explaining of names. The twenty-seventh mark, Cloud of Light Illumining the Ocean of Buddhas, its light illumining all worlds everywhere, exhausting the Dharma realm without obstruction, with a Tathāgata seated with legs crossed in place after place. The twenty-eighth mark, Cloud of the Jeweled Lamp, showing everywhere all buddhas and bodhisattvas and the inconceivable oceans of sentient beings. The twenty-ninth mark, Cloud of the Dharma Realm Without Difference, emitting the light of the Tathāgata’s great wisdom, illumining the buddha-lands and the measureless oceans of the Dharma of the assemblies at the bodhisattva places of the Way, expounding according to what the minds of sentient beings love and delight in the practices and vows of the bodhisattva Samantabhadra and causing them to dedicate and direct them — this mark joins the marks directly to the practices and vows of Samantabhadra. The thirtieth mark, Cloud Abiding in All World-Oceans and Universally Illumining, showing everywhere the pure and beautiful places of the Way and the adorned bodily marks of buddhas and bodhisattvas, causing those who see to attain the seeing of nothing at all. The thirty-first mark, Cloud of the Pure Flaming Light of All Jewels, showing everywhere the oceans of bodhisattvas, not one of whom lacks the Tathāgata’s spiritual power, ever roaming the nets of lands of the ten directions to the ends of empty space.
From the twenty-seventh through the thirty-first, these five marks all leave out the section on adornment in the text of the sūtra. Chengguan does not take this for a dropped passage; he adjudges it thus: they all alike leave out the adornment, and this too is because the name already contains it — since it is contained in the name, it is left out in the text. The general rule of the fivefold outline, that a part ‘may be abridged and not complete,’ here finds a case in point.
The thirty-second mark, Cloud of Adornment Universally Illumining the Whole Dharma Realm, lying at the very center and rising up by degrees, adorned with the gold of Jambūnada and the net of Indra. Chengguan adjudges the position of this mark to be the most important: this mark occupies the utmost of the crown, and its place is displayed as being distinct, and therefore it is said to lie at the center; from this one may know that the remaining thirty-one marks all encircle this one, though the text abridges and does not say so. The clause ‘rising up by degrees’ is precisely what displays the shape of this mark, and he cites the fifth fascicle of the Zhi lun saying that the Tathāgata’s crown has a bony topknot like a clenched fist, and the Guanfo sanmei jing saying that it is like a joined fist, as his warrant. As for why the marks of the crown are first summarized as thirty-two and then concluded as an adorning excellence — Sons of the Buddha, upon the crown of the Tathāgata’s head there are thirty-two great-man marks such as these, serving as its adorning excellence — a summary at the head and a conclusion at the close gather the thirty-two marks of this one place into a single whole.
The One Mark Between the Brows: Why the White Tuft Is the Noblest of the Marks
The second place of support is between the brows, and it has only one mark: the thirty-third mark, Cloud of Light Pervading the Dharma Realm, adorned with maṇi jeweled flowers, emitting a great light complete in the colors of the manifold jewels, clear through and pure like the sun and the moon, illumining everywhere the lands of the ten directions, showing all buddha-bodies within it, and further sending out a wondrous sound that proclaims and sets forth the ocean of the Dharma.
Chengguan here accounts for a matter of pattern: from this point onward every mark has its clause of the place of support, and so the texts all have five parts — first the place of support, second the displaying of the name, third the adornment of the substance, fourth the function in action, fifth the concluding number; whereas for the crown, because the place of support had already been given in the summarizing clause, the texts of those thirty-two marks each have four parts only. If a reader feels that the later text has one clause more than the earlier, this is the reason.
As to the mark of the white tuft, the commentary explains the adornment of its substance most finely: this mark, when rolled up, whorls to the right like an overturned beryl bowl, and when spread out is complete with ten ridges and has a great light; its adornment uses a single jewel only, while its light is complete in many colors, and both the middle and the surface are empty — this is what the sūtra means by ‘clear through.’ Brought down to the import: one jewel and many colors is precisely substance being one while function is many; middle and surface both empty is precisely a mark that has no intrinsic nature. And so the name of this mark is Light Pervading the Dharma Realm — the name is established from the function, since the sūtra’s closing clause about further sending out a wondrous sound is already the light of the Dharma, and hence the name of this light is established from its function.
The Eyes and the Nose: Seeing Without Obstruction, Conjured Buddhas Issuing from the Nose
The third place of support is the eyes and the fourth is the nose, each with one mark. Chengguan adjudges them together in a single clause: the third, the eyes, and the fourth, the nose, have one mark each.
The thirty-fourth mark, Cloud of Sovereign Universal Seeing, adorned with manifold wondrous jewels, its maṇi jewel-light pure and shining clear through, seeing all everywhere with no obstruction at all. The function of the mark of the eyes lies not in being seen but in being able to see — seeing all everywhere without obstruction. This answers precisely the earlier question about the six sense-faculties pervading the Dharma realm in the preceding chapter.
The thirty-fifth mark, Cloud of All Spiritual Penetrations and Wisdom, adorned with pure and wondrous jewels, the color-light of manifold jewels covering it over, with measureless conjured buddhas appearing within it seated upon jeweled lotuses, going to all the worlds and expounding for all bodhisattvas and all sentient beings the inconceivable ocean of the buddha-dharmas. The function of the mark of the nose is to send out conjured buddhas who expound the Dharma — and this is a general rule of the chapter: no part of the body is a static ornament; every one of them is sending out buddhas, emitting light, and expounding the Dharma. If one asks, ‘why should buddhas issue from a nose,’ the answer lies not in physiology but in doctrine: the marks of the ten bodies are, place by place, gates of the Dharma realm.
The Four Marks of the Tongue: From Breadth and Length to Rolling Up and Spreading Out
The fifth place of support is the tongue, with four marks, the head-region place of support having the most marks after the crown.
The thirty-sixth mark, Cloud Manifesting Sounds and Images, adorned with jewels of manifold colors and wondrous kinds, brought to completion by the roots of goodness of former lives, its tongue broad and long and far-reaching, covering over all the world-oceans; and if the Tathāgata is glad and smiles, he must emit maṇi jewel-light illumining the Dharma realm of the ten directions everywhere, able to make every mind attain coolness, with the buddhas of the three times appearing plainly within that light, all sending forth vast and subtly wondrous sounds that reach every buddha-land and abide for measureless kalpas. Chengguan adjudges that this is the mark of the broad and long tongue, and he points out in particular: that within the adornment of the substance it is said to be brought to completion by the roots of goodness of former lives is a raising up of the ‘cause’ as adornment; and why is the cause spoken of in this mark alone? For the sake of praising and setting forth the One Vehicle. He further compares the measure of the tongue-marks: a man of merit has a tongue reaching to the nose, a buddha of the provisional teaching to the hairline, and in the remaining Mahāyāna it is said that when spiritual penetrations are displayed it reaches to the Brahmā world or covers the three thousandfold world; whereas this sūtra says straight out that its substance covers all. This one comparison shows best the height and depth of the teachings: the breadth and length in other scriptures are manifested by spiritual power, while the breadth and length in this sūtra are the very substance of the mark. The function in action then divides in two: the expounding of the Dharma explains ‘sounds’ in the mark’s name, and the showing forth of buddhas explains ‘images’ in the mark’s name — two words of the name, two matters of the function, buckled with great precision.
The thirty-seventh mark, Cloud of the Dharma Realm, its palm level and settled, adorned with manifold jewels, emitting a wondrous jeweled light perfect in color and mark like the light emitted from between the brows, that light illumining all buddha-lands everywhere — made only of motes of dust, having no intrinsic nature — and measureless buddhas further appearing in the light, all sending out a wondrous sound expounding all dharmas. Chengguan explains the word ‘palm’: the palm means near the root, that is, the part of the tongue near its root; and the function in action is that its light illumines the lands so that those who ought to be delivered need make no further effort at contemplating and breaking down aggregations, but understand of themselves that all dharmas are but the joining of dust — and what intrinsic nature could they have? This mark is one of the rare places in the whole chapter where emptiness is spoken outright: the lands illumined are made only of dust and have no intrinsic nature — within the ocean of marks there is an eye of wisdom of its own.
The thirty-eighth mark, Cloud of Light Illumining the Dharma Realm, and the thirty-ninth mark, Cloud Shining Forth upon the Dharma Realm, both at the tip of the tongue. The former is adorned with wish-king jewels, constantly sending out golden jeweled flames within which all the oceans of buddhas are reflected, and further sounding a wondrous voice filling boundless worlds, every one of its sounds complete in all sounds, so that hearers are glad at heart and savor them for measureless kalpas without forgetting; the latter is ornamented with maṇi jewel-kings, sending forth the marks of manifold colors and subtle and wondrous light, filling measureless lands in the ten directions, nothing in the Dharma realm left unpurified, with measureless buddhas and bodhisattvas within it each uttering a wondrous sound with all manner of revealing, and all bodhisattvas present before them to hear and receive it. Chengguan adjudges the difference between the two marks with a fine turn of words: the latter two are both at the tip of the tongue, whether to left and right or above and below; and looking at their functions in action, there is only the difference of spreading out and rolling up — the former rolls the ocean of buddhas into the tip of the tongue, the latter spreads the buddhas out over the Dharma realm. One rolling up and one spreading out, and both are the one tongue. This answers the doubt, ‘why are these two marks so alike?’ — alike but not repetitious; the difference lies in the posture of gathering in and letting out.
The One Mark of the Upper Palate: A Missing Passage Set Down as It Is
The sixth place of support is the upper palate, with one mark: the fortieth mark, Cloud Manifesting the Inconceivable Dharma Realm, adorned with Indra jewels and beryl jewels, emitting pure clouds of light from the flames of incense-lamps that fill the Dharma realm of the ten directions, showing forth all manner of spiritual penetrations and skillful means, and setting forth everywhere throughout the world-oceans the profound and inconceivable Dharma.
Here the ancient master left a note of collation worth transmitting as it stands. Chengguan says: since there is a mark of the upper palate, by rights there should be one of the lower as well; perhaps the Sanskrit text has dropped it. He neither supplies a mark for the sūtra nor works up a rationale for the missing one; he simply leaves the doubt standing. This is the proper measure in reading a scripture: what is missing is missing; set it down, and do not fill it in.
The Four Marks of the Fangs: The Four Great Fangs and the Threefold Virtue of Nirvāṇa
The seventh place of support is the fangs, with four marks. Chengguan first explains the place of support: that the fangs have four marks means the four great fangs, left and right, upper and lower; when the Buddha entered nirvāṇa the four fangs were not shattered, and these are meant. He further glosses the word for ‘beside’ in the sūtra: it means the cheek, also called the cheekbone.
The forty-first mark, Cloud of the Buddha’s Fang (the lower fang beside the right cheek), adorned with manifold jeweled maṇi and the wheel of the svastika sign, emitting a great light that illumines the Dharma realm everywhere, showing everywhere all buddha-bodies, spreading through the ten directions and awakening the multitudes. The forty-second mark, Cloud of the Treasury of Jeweled Flames of Meru (the upper fang beside the right cheek), adorned with the treasury of maṇi jewels, emitting the pure light of adamantine incense-flames, every single light filling the Dharma realm, showing forth the spiritual power of the buddhas, and further showing the pure and beautiful places of the Way in the worlds of the ten directions. Chengguan explains this name: that the upper fang beside the right is named Meru is because it displays the lofty and high — Meru is the name of the mountain that is lofty and high, and the height of the mountain displays the excellence of this mark. The forty-third mark, Cloud of the Jeweled Lamp Universally Illumining (the lower fang beside the left cheek), adorned with wondrous jewels spreading out blossoms and sending out fragrance, emitting the pure light of clouds of lamp-flames, filling the world-oceans, showing buddhas seated upon lion thrones of the lotus treasury with the hosts of bodhisattvas surrounding them together.
The forty-fourth mark, Cloud Illumining and Manifesting the Tathāgatas (the upper fang beside the left cheek), adorned with pure light, the gold of Jambūnada, jeweled nets, and jeweled flowers, emitting great wheels of flame that fill the Dharma realm, showing everywhere all buddhas who by spiritual power spread abroad within empty space the milk of the Dharma, the lamp of the Dharma, and the jewel of the Dharma, teaching and transforming all the hosts of bodhisattvas. Chengguan matches the three matters of this mark into one set of doctrine: within the fourth there are the three, the milk of the Dharma and the rest, which are alike one and the same matter of expounding the Dharma — with respect to nourishing the dharma-body it is named milk, with respect to illumining and knowing the myriad objects it is called a lamp, and with respect to making them perfect and pure it is the third; that is, they expound the Dharma of the threefold virtue of nirvāṇa, and they also bring about the benefit of the threefold virtue of nirvāṇa. The three matters are not three kinds of treasure; they are the three functions of one occasion of expounding the Dharma: nourishing, illumining, and bringing to completion. Brought down to the reader, the benefit of hearing the Dharma is likewise these three layers — being nourished, being illumined, and being brought to completion.
The Teeth and the Lips: Smiling and Emitting Light, Colored Like a Red Lotus
The eighth place of support is the teeth and the ninth the lips, each with one mark. Chengguan here sets down another note of collation: the two above ought each to be divided into upper and lower — the teeth and the lips ought by rights to be divided into upper and lower too, and the sūtra has spoken of them together.
The forty-fifth mark, Cloud Universally Manifesting Light, with an ocean of marks adorning the space between each tooth and the next, so that when he smiles they all emit light complete in the colors of the manifold jewels, the maṇi jeweled flames whorling to the right and turning about plainly, spreading through the Dharma realm and filling it all, and sending forth the Buddha’s speech and sound expounding the practice of Samantabhadra. The function of the mark of the teeth is tied to a smile — this is the warmest clause in the whole chapter: the Buddha’s smile is not an expression, it is the occasion of the Dharma being spoken. And what is spoken is precisely the practice of Samantabhadra, so that speaker and thing spoken are here made one.
The forty-sixth mark, Cloud Reflecting All Jeweled Light, emitting a vast light of the color of the true gold of Jambūnada, of the color of the lotus, and of the colors of all jewels, shining through the Dharma realm and causing it all to be pure. Chengguan explains the adornment of its substance: because the color of the lips is red and fine, like the leaf of a red lotus at the sun’s first rising. Here the shape and color of the mark answer to the color it emits — the sūtra says it emits a light of the lotus color precisely because the lips are themselves like a lotus.
The One Mark of the Neck: The Dark-Blue Reed, Soft and Smooth
The tenth place of support is the neck, with one mark: the forty-seventh mark, Cloud Universally Illumining All Worlds, adorned with maṇi jewel-kings, brought to completion as the dark-blue reed, soft and fine and smooth, emitting the pure light of Vairocana, filling all the worlds of the ten directions, and showing all buddhas within it. Chengguan gives no separate explanation at this place of support, adjudging only ‘the tenth, the neck, has one mark.’ The dark-blue reed is the mark of a deep blue and glossy sheen; and the light of this mark takes Vairocana itself for its name, answering to the twenty-second mark — the light that pervades all places is not on the crown alone, but on the neck as well.
The Five Marks of the Shoulders: The Unevenness of Two on the Right and Three on the Left
The eleventh place of support is the shoulders, with five marks: two on the right shoulder and three on the left. Chengguan does not cover over the unevenness, but records it straight out: the eleventh, the shoulders, has five marks, two on the right and three on the left — perhaps one has been dropped. Leaving the doubt standing rather than forcing an explanation, this is the same measure as in the note on the upper palate.
The forty-eighth mark, Cloud of the Buddha’s Vast and Universal Jewels (right shoulder), emitting a light of the colors of all jewels, of true gold, and of the lotus, forming a net of jeweled flames illumining the Dharma realm everywhere, showing all bodhisattvas within it. The forty-ninth mark, Cloud of the Supreme Jewel Universally Illumining (right shoulder), its color pure like the gold of Jambū, emitting a maṇi light filling the Dharma realm, showing all bodhisattvas within it. The function of both marks is to show forth bodhisattvas — the shoulder is where a burden is borne, and what it shows forth being bodhisattvas, the sense answers to itself.
The fiftieth mark, Cloud of Supreme Light Illumining the Dharma Realm (left shoulder), like the manifold adornments of the crown and of the space between the brows, emitting a light of the manifold jewels of the gold of Jambūnada and of the lotus color, forming great nets of flame filling the Dharma realm, and showing forth within it every spiritual power. This mark compares itself with the crown and the brows, and is one of the rare places in the chapter where mark points to mark — a glimpse of the marks of the ocean fusing into one another. The fifty-first mark, Cloud of Light Pervadingly Illumining (left shoulder), the mark whorling to the right, adorned with maṇi jewel-kings of the color of the gold of Jambūnada, emitting the light of manifold jeweled flowers and incense-flames pervading the Dharma realm, showing everywhere all buddhas and the adorned and purified lands. The fifty-second mark, Cloud Universally Shining Forth (left shoulder), the mark whorling to the right, finely close-set and adorned, emitting the pure light of clouds of the Buddha’s lamp-flames pervading the Dharma realm, showing all the manifold adornments of the bodhisattvas, every one of them beautiful. The two words ‘whorling to the right’ are used in two marks running — the whorl is not an ornament but the posture of the mark; it turns with the whorl and not against it, and this precisely displays turning in accord with the Dharma realm.
The Eleven Marks of the Breast: The Svastika at the Center, with Five on Each Side
The twelfth place of support is the breast, with eleven marks. Chengguan adjudges their positions: the first one is at the center, with five on each side.
The fifty-third mark, Cloud of the Auspicious Ocean, shaped like the svastika sign, adorned with maṇi jeweled flowers, emitting the manifold flaming wheels of light of the colors of all jewels, filling the Dharma realm and causing it all to be pure, and further sending out a wondrous sound proclaiming and setting forth the ocean of the Dharma. Chengguan has a nicety about this name: the svastika sign properly translated is just ‘cloud of the auspicious ocean,’ and because the name is established in dependence upon the shape, the clause about the shape ought by rights to be placed back under the name, whereas the sūtra has set the shape first; yet since the shape is gathered under the adornment of the substance, writing it thus is not amiss either. This looks like a matter of textual order, but it teaches a way of reading: name, shape, and substance are at bottom one thing, and the order may shift while the sense does not.
The five on the right: the fifty-fourth mark, Cloud Manifesting Illumining Light, adorned with the net of Indra, emitting a great wheel of light filling the Dharma realm, showing everywhere measureless buddhas. The fifty-fifth mark, Cloud Universally Manifesting the Tathāgatas, adorned with the maṇi jeweled crowns of the bodhisattvas, emitting a great light illumining the ten directions everywhere and making them all pure, showing forth the buddhas of the three times seated within the places of the Way, manifesting spiritual power everywhere and proclaiming the ocean of the Dharma at large. The fifty-sixth mark, Cloud of Blossoming Flowers, adorned with maṇi jeweled flowers, emitting the pure light of jeweled incense-flames and lamps, shaped like a lotus and filling the worlds. The fifty-seventh mark, Cloud of Delightful Golden Color, adorned with the maṇi-king of the treasury of the mind-king of all jewels, emitting a pure light shining through the Dharma realm, showing within it maṇi jewel-treasuries with a vast light like that of the Buddha’s eyes. The fifty-eighth mark, Cloud of the Ocean of Buddhas, adorned with beryl jewels, incense-lamps, and flower-garlands, emitting the pure light of the great flames of maṇi jewel-king incense-lamps that fill empty space, pervading the lands of the ten directions, and showing everywhere the assemblies at the places of the Way.
The five on the left: the fifty-ninth mark, Cloud Manifesting Light, adorned with numberless bodhisattvas seated upon jeweled lotuses, emitting the light of the manifold intermingled jeweled flames of the maṇi-kings, purifying everywhere all the oceans of the Dharma realm, and showing forth measureless buddhas together with the buddhas expounding all dharmas with a wondrous sound. The sixtieth mark, Cloud Manifesting Light Pervading the Dharma Realm, adorned with the ocean of maṇi jewels, emitting a great light reaching every buddha-land, showing everywhere the hosts of bodhisattvas. The sixty-first mark, Cloud of Universal Excellence, adorned with the jeweled wheels and flower-garlands of the maṇi-kings of sunlight, emitting great flames of light filling the many world-oceans of the Dharma realm, showing forth all worlds, all Tathāgatas, and all sentient beings. The sixty-second mark, Cloud of the Wondrous Sound of Turning the Wheel of the Dharma, adorned with all the lamps of the Dharma and pure fragrant stamens, emitting a great light filling the Dharma realm, showing everywhere all the oceans of marks and oceans of mind belonging to all buddhas. The sixty-third mark, Cloud of Adornment, adorned with all the oceans of buddhas of the three times, emitting a pure light that adorns and purifies all buddha-lands, showing everywhere all the buddhas and bodhisattvas of the ten directions together with the practices those buddhas and bodhisattvas cultivate.
Among the eleven marks, the sixty-first shows forth the three — worlds, Tathāgatas, and sentient beings; the sixty-second shows everywhere the ocean of marks and the ocean of mind; the sixty-third takes the ocean of buddhas for its adornment and shows forth buddhas and practices — the nearer the end, the more comprehensive. The breast is where the svastika lies, that to which good fortune is tied, and so the marks of this one place mostly have ‘showing everywhere’ and ‘showing forth’ for their function: good fortune is not an auspiciousness enjoyed for oneself; it is a showing forth for others.
The Thirteen Marks of the Hands: Five on the Right and Four on the Left, Two of the Fingers and Two of the Palms
The thirteenth place of support is the hands, with the most marks, thirteen. Chengguan divides them into three sections: the first nine speak of the hand-marks directly, the next two are the fingers of the left and right, and the last two are the palms of the left and right.
The five of the right hand: the sixty-fourth mark, Cloud of Ocean-Illumination, adorned with manifold jewels, ever emitting a pure light like the flame of the moon, filling all the worlds of empty space, and sending out a great voice praising all the practices of the bodhisattvas. The sixty-fifth mark, Cloud of Reflected Shining, adorned with beryl, sapphire, and maṇi jeweled flowers, emitting a great light illumining everywhere the worlds in which bodhisattvas dwell, the lotus treasury, the maṇi treasury, and the rest, showing measureless buddhas therein seated beneath the tree of awakening with pure dharma-bodies, and shaking the lands of the ten directions. The sixty-sixth mark, Cloud of Garlands of Lamp-Flames Universally Adorning and Purifying, adorned with Vairocana jewels, emitting a great light that forms a net of transformations, showing everywhere the hosts of bodhisattvas all wearing jeweled crowns and expounding the oceans of the practices; Chengguan explains the clause ‘forms a net of transformations’: it means the light turns into a net. The sixty-seventh mark, Cloud Universally Manifesting All Maṇi Jewels, adorned with lotuses and flaming lamps, emitting the light of the ocean-treasury pervading the Dharma realm, showing everywhere measureless buddhas seated upon lotus seats. The sixty-eighth mark, Cloud of Light, adorned with the ocean of maṇi flames, emitting the pure light of manifold jeweled flames, incense-flames, and flower-flames, filling all the nets of the worlds, and showing everywhere the places of the Way of the buddhas.
The four of the left hand: the sixty-ninth mark, Cloud of the Pure Beryl Lamp, adorned with the wondrous colors of the jeweled ground, emitting the Tathāgata’s golden light, in thought after thought ever showing all superb articles of adornment. The seventieth mark, Cloud of the Sound of the Lamp of Wisdom of All Lands, adorned with the net of Indra and adamantine flowers, emitting the pure light of the gold of Jambūnada, illumining everywhere all the worlds of the ten directions. The seventy-first mark, Cloud of the Light of the Abiding Jeweled Lotus, adorned with manifold jeweled and wondrous flowers, emitting a great light like the lamp of Sumeru, illumining everywhere the worlds of the ten directions. The seventy-second mark, Cloud Pervadingly Illumining the Dharma Realm, adorned with wondrous jeweled garlands, jeweled wheels, jeweled vases, the net of Indra, and manifold wondrous marks, emitting a great light illumining everywhere the lands of the ten directions, showing forth the whole Dharma realm, the world-oceans, and all Tathāgatas seated upon lotus seats. It is upon this mark that Chengguan points out the deepest word in the whole chapter: that the seventy-second on the left says the net of Indra serves as adornment means it is the mark of a net drawn taut, because they interpenetrate one another. Here the net of Indra stands not in the place of a simile but in the place of the adornment of the substance — it is not said that the mark is ‘like’ the net of Indra, but that the substance of the mark is of itself a net interpenetrating layer upon layer. The Huayan sense of the inexhaustibility of the ten profundities finds its footing upon the bodily marks of the Buddha just here.
As for the unevenness of five marks on the right hand and four on the left, Chengguan again leaves both explanations standing: as to five on the right and four on the left, either one has been dropped on the left, or it displays that the right hand is the one in constant use; and whereas the earlier shoulder-marks were two on the right and three on the left, taken together the two places come out exactly equal. This clause is a fine demonstration — when you meet an unevenness of number, first look whether some other explanation is available, and do not rush to judge it an error.
The fingers and the palms: the seventy-third mark, Cloud of the Whirling of the Ocean of Lands Through All Kalpas (the fingers of the right hand), adorned with the maṇi-kings of the treasury of water-moon flames and all jeweled flowers, emitting a great light filling the Dharma realm, ever sending out a subtle and wondrous sound that fills the buddha-lands of the ten directions. The seventy-fourth mark, Cloud Abiding in All Jewels (the fingers of the left hand), adorned with sapphire and adamantine jewels, emitting the light of the manifold jewels of the maṇi-kings filling the Dharma realm, showing everywhere all buddhas and all bodhisattvas. The seventy-fifth mark, Cloud of Shining Forth (the palm of the right hand), adorned with the maṇi-king jeweled wheel of a thousand spokes, emitting a jeweled light that whorls to the right and fills the Dharma realm, showing everywhere all buddhas, the body of each blazing with flaming light, expounding the Dharma and delivering people, and purifying the worlds. The seventy-sixth mark, Cloud of the Flame-Wheel Universally Increasing and Conjuring Forth the Places of the Way in the Dharma Realm (the palm of the left hand), adorned with the thousand-spoked wheel of the maṇi-kings of sunlight, emitting a great light filling the world-oceans, showing forth all bodhisattvas, expounding all the oceans of practice belonging to Samantabhadra, entering everywhere into all the buddha-lands, and awakening measureless sentient beings in each.
Both palms have the thousand wheels. Chengguan explains them: the hub, the spokes, and the rim of the wheel are complete in all three, brought to completion of themselves without waiting upon human labor. This clause comes down to the ground best of all — the perfection of a mark is not something contrived; it is practice fulfilled and self-completed. The hand is the instrument by which work is done, and that the wheel in the palm is completed of itself says just this: when the practice arrives, the mark appears of itself.
The One Mark of the Sheathed Organ: Even the Hidden Place Expounds the Dharma
The fourteenth place of support is the sheathed organ, with one mark: the seventy-seventh mark, Cloud Universally Pouring Forth the Buddha’s Voice, adorned with all wondrous jewels, emitting the light of the flames of maṇi lamps and flowers, that light blazing and complete in the colors of the manifold jewels, illumining everywhere all empty space and the Dharma realm, and showing everywhere all buddhas roaming and coming and going, reaching everywhere in place after place. Chengguan passes over the place of support in six words: the fourteenth, the sheathed organ, one mark, like that of the horse king — explaining it by the mark of concealment of the horse king as transmitted in the ancient science of marks.
What is to be noticed is the function of this mark: in the most hidden place of all, what is emitted is a cloud of the Buddha’s voice, and what is shown forth is buddhas roaming and coming and going, reaching everywhere in place after place. Hidden and pervading are here not at odds with each other. If anyone doubts whether this place ought to be listed among the marks of adornment, this very mark answers him: within the ocean of marks there is not one place that does not expound the Dharma.
The Two Marks of the Place of Sitting: One Mark with Empty Space, Yet Able to Give Birth to All Marks
The fifteenth place of support is the place of sitting, with two marks. The seventy-eighth mark, Cloud of Garlands of Jeweled Lamps Universally Illumining (the right hip), adorned with all manner of maṇi jewels, emitting an inconceivable light of jeweled flames spread over the whole Dharma realm of the ten directions, being one mark together with empty space and the Dharma realm and yet able to bring forth all marks, with the sovereign spiritual transformations of the buddhas appearing in every single mark. The seventy-ninth mark, Cloud Manifesting the Light of the Ocean of the Whole Dharma Realm Overspreading Empty Space (the left hip), like a lotus, ornamented with pure and wondrous jewels, emitting a net of light shining throughout the Dharma realm of the ten directions and showing everywhere all manner of clouds of marks.
The seventy-eighth mark has one sentence of the first importance: it is one mark together with empty space and the Dharma realm, and yet can bring forth all marks. That it is one mark says that its substance is undivided and cannot be cut apart; that it can bring forth all marks says that its function is inexhaustible and its differences stand out plainly. The oneness of substance and the manyness of function stand side by side within one and the same sentence — this is the master key to reading the marks in this chapter. All the emitting of light and showing forth everywhere in the marks before are the unfolding of this one sentence; and the adjudging afterward that the number ninety-seven cannot be matched to dharmas follows from it of necessity.
The Two Marks of the Thighs: Upper and Lower in Proportion, Fit to Go Far
The sixteenth place of support is the thighs, with two marks. The eightieth mark, Cloud of Universal Manifestation (the right thigh), adorned with maṇi jewels of manifold colors, the thigh and the calf in proportion above and below, emitting the wondrous Dharma-light of maṇi flames, able within a single thought to show forth everywhere the ocean of marks of the stepping and pacing of all jewel-kings. The eighty-first mark, Cloud Manifesting the Measureless Ocean of Marks of All Buddhas (the left thigh), adorned with all the oceans of jewels abiding in accord with what is fitting, roaming far and wide, emitting a pure light illumining sentient beings everywhere and causing them all to seek after the unsurpassed Buddha-dharma. Chengguan explains the adornment of the left thigh: that the left is said to abide in accord is because the thigh moves much, and so many jewels are needed to adorn it in accord with it.
The eye of doctrine in these two marks is ‘going’: proportion above and below is the shape fit for going, the ocean of marks of stepping and pacing is the function able to go, roaming far and wide is the distance of the going, and causing sentient beings to seek after the unsurpassed Buddha-dharma is where the going comes home. What the leg-marks of the Buddha expound is the gate of practice itself.
The Three Marks of the Calves: The Calves of the Deer King and the Hair of the Whole Body
The seventeenth place of support is the calves, with three marks. The eighty-second mark, Cloud of All Empty Space and the Dharma Realm (the right calf like that of the aiṇeya deer king), adorned with bright and wondrous jewels, its mark round and upright and straight, able to roam and pace well, emitting the pure light of the color of the gold of Jambū illumining the buddha-worlds throughout, sending out a great voice that shakes everything everywhere, and further showing all buddha-lands abiding in empty space adorned with jeweled flames, from within which measureless bodhisattvas are conjured forth. The eighty-third mark, Cloud of the Ocean of Adornment (the left calf like that of the aiṇeya deer king), its color like true gold, able to roam throughout all buddha-lands, emitting the pure light of all jewels, filling the Dharma realm and performing buddha-deeds.
The eighty-fourth mark, Cloud Universally Manifesting the Images of the Dharma Realm (the hair upon the jeweled calves), that hair whorling to the right, every single hair-tip emitting a jeweled light filling the Dharma realm of the ten directions, showing forth the spiritual power of all buddhas, the pores too all emitting light, and all buddha-lands appearing therein. Chengguan has an important note of collation here: the third, the hair, runs through both calves; and if one goes by the Jin sūtra, which says only ‘hair-tips,’ then it would be all the hair of the whole body, and the sense ought to follow the old rendering, in which case the places of support come to nineteen. This note is the provenance of the number nineteen of the places of support in this chapter — the eighteen places are the text of this sūtra, and the nineteenth is separately established from the Jin sūtra as the hair of the whole body. That an ancient master should set up an outline without concealing what he took it from is what scholarship actually looks like.
The Thirteen Marks of the Feet: From the Soles to the Tips of the Toes, Divided Throughout into Seven
The eighteenth place of support is the feet, with thirteen marks. Chengguan divides them throughout into seven: first the soles of the feet, second the upper sides of the feet, third between the toes, fourth the heels, fifth the insteps, sixth all around the feet, seventh the tips of the toes; and the last six each divide into left and right, as the text plainly shows.
The eighty-fifth mark, Cloud of the Abiding of the Ocean of All Bodhisattvas (the soles of the feet), its color like adamant, like the gold of Jambūnada, and like the pure lotus, emitting a jeweled light illumining everywhere the many world-oceans of the ten directions, clouds of jeweled incense-flames reaching everywhere in place after place, the fragrance flowing about when he lifts his foot and is about to step, complete in the colors of the manifold jewels and filling the Dharma realm. Chengguan explains the name: it is named Abiding because the soles of the feet are level and settled, touching the ground at every point, with no room for a needle. This mark does not divide into left and right, and he sets down a further note of collation alongside: in the Jin sūtra, after the insteps of the feet there is separately a mark of the thousand-spoked wheel upon the soles, and this sūtra must have it too, which is why the following chapter says that the wheel-mark upon the soles is named Universally Illumining King; the words about a thousand wheels in this sūtra fall instead between the toes, perhaps because the wheel upon the soles is what everyone knows, while a wheel between the toes is unusual, and therefore it is singled out. This is a demonstration by an ancient master of cross-verifying by means of a parallel translation and a later chapter.
The eighty-sixth mark, Cloud of Light Universally Illumining All (the upper side of the right foot), adorned with all the manifold jewels, emitting a great light filling the Dharma realm and showing forth all buddhas and bodhisattvas. The eighty-seventh mark, Cloud Universally Manifesting All Buddhas (the upper side of the left foot), adorned with treasury-maṇi jewels, emitting a jeweled light, in thought after thought showing the spiritual transformations of all buddhas together with their oceans of the Dharma and the places of the Way in which they sit, to the end of the kalpas of the future without interruption.
The eighty-eighth mark, Cloud of Light Illumining the Ocean of the Whole Dharma Realm (between the toes of the right foot), with the thousand-spoked wheels of flame of the maṇi-kings of the lamp of Sumeru for its manifold adornment, emitting a great light filling the many world-oceans of the Dharma realm of the ten directions, showing everywhere all the manifold jeweled and adorned marks belonging to all buddhas. The eighty-ninth mark, Cloud Manifesting the Ocean of All Buddhas (between the toes of the left foot), adorned with maṇi jeweled flowers, incense-flames, garlands of lamps, and all jeweled wheels, ever emitting the pure light of the ocean of jewels filling empty space and reaching throughout the worlds of the ten directions, showing forth all buddhas and bodhisattvas, their perfect voices, the svastika sign and marks of that sort, and benefiting measureless sentient beings.
The ninetieth mark, Cloud of Sovereign Shining Forth (the heel of the right foot), adorned with sapphire and jewel-dust, ever emitting the light of the Tathāgata’s wondrous jewels, that light beautiful and filling the Dharma realm, all of it one and the same mark without difference, showing forth all buddhas seated within the places of the Way expounding the wondrous Dharma. The ninety-first mark, Cloud Manifesting the Wondrous Sound That Expounds the Ocean of Dharmas (the heel of the left foot), adorned with the maṇi jewels of the ocean of transformations, the maṇi jewels of the Sumeru flowers of the ocean of incense-flames, and beryl, emitting a great light filling the Dharma realm and showing everywhere the spiritual powers of the buddhas.
The ninety-second mark, Cloud Manifesting the Light of All Adornments (the instep of the right foot), made of manifold jewels and adorned most beautifully, emitting the pure light of the color of the gold of Jambūnada illumining everywhere the Dharma realm of the ten directions, the mark of that light like a great cloud spreading over and covering all the places of the Way of the buddhas. The ninety-third mark, Cloud Manifesting the Marks of Manifold Colors (the instep of the left foot), adorned with the Vairocana jewels of the treasury of all moon-flames and with indranīla jewels, in thought after thought roaming the oceans of the Dharma realm, emitting the light of the incense-flames of maṇi lamps that fills the Dharma realm throughout. Chengguan here glosses a name: indranīla is called in the language of Han ‘Śakra-blue.’
The ninety-fourth mark, Cloud of the Universal Treasury (all around the right foot), adorned with indranīla adamantine jewels, emitting a jeweled light filling empty space, showing forth all buddhas seated within the places of the Way upon lion thrones of maṇi jewel-kings. The ninety-fifth mark, Cloud of Light Pervadingly Illumining the Dharma Realm (all around the left foot), adorned with maṇi jeweled flowers, emitting a great light filling the Dharma realm as one equal mark, showing forth the sovereign spiritual powers of all buddhas and bodhisattvas, and expounding with a great and wondrous sound the inexhaustible Dharma-gates of the Dharma realm.
The ninety-sixth mark, Cloud Manifesting Adornment (the tips of the toes of the right foot), adorned with the most delightful pure and true gold of Jambūnada, emitting a great light filling the Dharma realm of the ten directions, showing forth all the manifold merits and spiritual transformations of the inexhaustible ocean of the Dharma of all buddhas and bodhisattvas. The ninety-seventh mark, Cloud Manifesting the Spiritual Transformations of All Buddhas (the tips of the toes of the left foot), adorned with the inconceivable light of the buddhas, the universal fragrance of moon-flames, and the flaming wheels of maṇi jewels, emitting the pure light of the colors of the manifold jewels filling the world-oceans, showing forth all buddhas and bodhisattvas expounding the ocean of the Dharma of all buddhas.
From the crown of the head to the feet, the ninety-seven marks are here listed out. It is worth remarking that what the very last mark of the chapter shows forth is still buddhas and bodhisattvas expounding the ocean of the Dharma — beginning with the showing forth of buddha-bodies upon the crown and ending with the expounding of the ocean of the Dharma at the tips of the toes; at both ends of the ocean of marks alike, it is the expounding of the Dharma.
The Number Ninety-Seven Is Not to Be Taken and Matched to Dharmas
Having listed the ninety-seven marks, the next thought that most readily arises is this: what deep meaning has this number? Which ninety-seven dharmas should the ninety-seven be matched to?
Chengguan lays down a sentence upon this, and it is the most important guardrail in the whole chapter. He first sets out the doubt: the ninety-seven marks listed above, their order and the naming of their number, were put in place by the translator; and since it is said that they cannot be told out in full, how does it happen that they fall just short of a hundred? A mark is missing from the soles of the feet, and the lips and the palate are not divided; if those two places were reckoned in, the six sense-faculties would all be told out — why should the ears alone be lacking? And if the two ears and the one mark of the soles were added besides, the number would come round to a hundred and so display the inexhaustible — would that not be fine? And he asks in return: moreover, what is listed here has not even told out in full the thirty-two marks of the provisional teaching; could the power of Samantabhadra be unable to speak so much as a hundred?
Then the conclusion falls: the Jin sūtra has omissions and has only ninety-four, and it has no numbering of the order either, and so one may know that the number ninety-seven does not lie in matching dharmas to it out of one’s own fancy.
This sentence deserves reading over and over. It guards against two maladies: the first is forced construction — seeing a number and matching dharmas to it, taking an accidental number in a rendering for the very frame of a Dharma-gate; the second is slighting — supposing that since the number is not matched to dharmas it does not matter, and so reading the marks themselves into confusion as well. The right reading lies in the middle: the number is what the translator put in place, and the marks are what the Buddha’s virtue displays; the number may be indefinite, but the pervading of the Dharma realm by the marks is not to be moved.
Chengguan uses the same measure upon the reconciling of the provisional and the real thirty-two marks: since the thirty-two marks differ in the provisional and the real teachings, each having what the other has not, therefore no reconciling explanation is made — the thirty-two upon one crown in this sūtra are not forced into a set with the thirty-two of a whole buddha in the provisional teaching. Not to reconcile is not to fail to understand; it is to know what cannot be forced into sameness.
Raising the Brief to Display the Vast: Even at Ninety-Seven, It Is Still Only the Brief Telling
At the end Samantabhadra concludes for himself: Sons of the Buddha, Vairocana Tathāgata has great-man marks such as these, as many as the motes of dust of ten Flower-Treasury world-oceans; and upon every single part of his body there are manifold jeweled and wondrous marks serving as adornment.
Chengguan adjudges this as raising the brief to display the vast, and explains why: to speak of them one by one can hardly reach them all, and so a brief conclusion is needed; and yet the brief cannot exhaust what is really so, and so the vast must be displayed. He then reckons it up: the marks as many as the motes of dust of a single Flower-Treasury world-ocean are already boundless, how much more ten Flower-Treasuries — that is the inexhaustible upon the inexhaustible; and who but one possessed of the universal eye could ever behold it?
This conclusion sets the standing of the foregoing ninety-seven marks straight at one stroke: ninety-seven is not the total, it is a specimen. The sūtra says at its opening, ‘I shall now expound for you all the ocean of marks of the Tathāgata,’ it lists ninety-seven in the middle, and at the end it says ‘as many as the motes of dust’ — set the beginning against the end and it is plain that the listing in the middle was from the first a raising of the brief to display the vast. Li Tongxuan outlines this chapter as ninety-nine sections, which is precisely to count out in three the summarizing at the head, the ninety-seven in the middle, and the general conclusion at the end; and his intent is the same.
Brought down to the reader, this conclusion is an exhortation: do not stop at the number. The lesson actually laid upon us is that one clause of the tenet and aim — to display the inexhaustible ocean of marks is the tenet, and to make men cultivate the inexhaustible practices by which such marks are displayed and brought about is the aim. The marks are the fruit, and one looks at the fruit in order to recognize the cause; what the ninety-seven lights illumine is in truth ninety-seven places where practice can be set going.
Lineage
The import of this chapter has three layers of lineage within the Huayan school, all of them settled sayings of the ancient masters, set down without adjudication.
First, its placement within the classification of the teachings. In the Tanxuan ji, under the gate of substance, Fazang distinguishes the thirty-two marks as having form and shape for their substance in the Lesser Vehicle; in the section on distinguishing the marks with respect to the teachings in the Huayan yisheng jiaoyi fenqi zhang, he adjudges them for the initial teaching as gathered under the merits entering the dharma-body, and for the final teaching as suchness itself, the dharma-body; while if one goes by the One Vehicle, then there are marks as many as the motes of dust of ten Lotus-Treasury world-oceans, and both the marks and their functions in action pervade the Dharma realm, so that ten is spoken of in order to display the inexhaustible — and he points directly to this as what the Chapter on the Ocean of Marks speaks. He further cites the threefold adjudging of marks and excellences in the Guanfo sanmei hai jing: the thirty-two marks of the briefest of brief tellings answer to men and gods and the two vehicles, the eighty-four thousand marks of the brief telling answer to the bodhisattvas of the three vehicles, and the true marks and excellences of a buddha in the vast telling, as spoken in the Zahua jing, are precisely this Huayan Chapter on the Ocean of Marks, the marks of the distinct teaching of the One Vehicle. Chengguan in his Huayan jing shu cites the same and adjudges the same, and notes besides that the Zahua is another name for this sūtra. The place of this chapter within the classification into five teachings is thereby settled.
Second, the divergent explanations of its substance. In the Tanxuan ji Fazang sets up eight gates of separate explanation, and his one gate of substance has five layers in order: the Lesser Vehicle takes form and shape for the substance; the initial teaching, going by the Yuqie, takes four of the twenty-two faculties — the eye, the tongue, the male organ, and the body — for the substance; the final teaching, going by the Duifa lun, takes concentration and wisdom for the substance; gathering the marks back to the root, it is pure consciousness alone that is the substance; reducing conditions to the real, it is suchness alone that is the nature; and if it be the ocean of marks of the perfect teaching, then the inexhaustible Dharma realm is its nature. His one gate on the issuing cause gathers further the sayings of seven houses — giving, keeping the precepts, forbearance, great compassion, the nature of the Tathāgata-womb, the ten good deeds, and separate causes for each — and he runs them together by the perfect fusion of the myriad virtues of the buddha-fruit: whether one practice draws many marks in response, or the myriad practices together bring about one mark. Chengguan for his part explains all the marks throughout by the twofold adornment of phenomena and principle, and Li Tongxuan betokens their sense by the recompense brought about by the three kinds of action and the two wisdoms, outlining the chapter as ninety-nine sections. Three tracks run side by side; they are set down without adjudication.
Third, the mutual completion of the two chapters on the marks and the excellences. This chapter lists the marks, and the following chapter, the Chapter on the Merit of the Light of the Secondary Signs of the Tathāgata, lists the excellences; Chengguan, in explaining the wheel-mark upon the soles of the feet, has already tied it beforehand to the Universally Illumining King of the following chapter, since marks and excellences are made clear over against each other and their import is complete only when the two chapters are read together. And this chapter takes up in turn the general clarifying of the fruit-dharmas in the Chapter on the Inconceivable Dharmas of the Buddhas before it, and repays from afar the question about the fruit-virtues of a buddha at the second gathering in the Hall of Universal Light — the structure of question and answer at the seventh assembly, the second gathering in the Hall of Universal Light, has here completed its one portion concerning the bodily marks.
As for the treatises of the three vehicles, searching the Chengweishi lun, the She dacheng lun, the Yuqie shidi lun, and the Jieshenmi jing under the name ‘ocean of marks’ yields nothing at all. The ninety-seven great-man marks and the ocean of marks of the ten bodies are a heading separately set up by the perfect teaching of the One Vehicle, and no heading of the same name answering to it is to be seen in the scriptures of the three vehicles — this is a difference of pattern, set down as lacking according to the fact, and not filled in with texts from elsewhere.
品三十五 如來隨好光明功德品The Merit of the Light of the Secondary Signs of the Tathāgata
全文五層 →Full five layers →相之外,為什麼還要再說一個「好」
佛的身相,前一品已經說盡了——十身相海,一一相各有光明照徹法界。既然如此,本品為何還要另立一個「隨好」?
隨好是隨逐大相而有的細好,論品位,它比相低一等。澄觀正是從這『低一等』上立本品的來意:相好雖然不同,同樣是莊嚴佛身,但好依相而有,德劣於相,所以次於相而說;而正因為它劣,它的用一顯出來,反而「翻顯大相德難思」。這是一種說法的手法:要說一件不可思議之事,不從最高處說,從最低處說——最低的那一分尚且如此,最高的可想而知。所以讀本品,若只讀到『佛好莊嚴』,是讀漏了;經文真正要你算的,是一筆比例。
一道光,救得了地獄眾生嗎
經文開口就給出這比例。如來自說:有一隨好名圓滿王,其中出大光明名為熾盛,還有七百萬阿僧祇的光明作它的眷屬——這只是一個好。再往下:菩薩足下千輻輪相中有隨好,常放四十種光明,其中一道名清淨功德,能照億那由他佛剎微塵數的世界。一個好裡的一道光,照這麼多世界。
在圓滿王之光以前,如來先說了因位的一道光:「我為菩薩時,於兜率天宮放大光明,名:光幢王,照十佛剎微塵數世界。」照到的是地獄眾生——「遇斯光者,眾苦休息,得十種清淨眼,耳、鼻、舌、身、意亦復如是,咸生歡喜,踊躍稱慶,從彼命終生兜率天」。這一段要看兩件事:一是光的主人還是菩薩、不是佛,果位的隨好光明其實從因位就在照;二是所得先是六根各十種清淨,然後才是生天——先把能見能聞的根換了,再換處所。
這道光做了什麼?「阿鼻地獄極苦眾生,遇斯光者,皆悉命終生兜率天。」不要把它讀成僥倖。經文自己補了條件:光「隨諸眾生種種業行、種種欲樂皆令成熟」——是成熟,不是替代。眾生本有的善根被光催熟了,苦報才盡;後文更明說遇光得位者「以先修行善根力故」。光是緣,不是因。這一分若不分清,本品就成了神話;分清了,它說的是感應之理。
說法的不是佛,是一面鼓
生了天之後呢?經文安排了一個極特別的說法者:「天中有鼓,名:甚可愛樂。」鼓自己發音,告訴這些剛從地獄上來的天子:你們是因為心不放逸、在如來處種了善根、往昔親近眾多善知識,又蒙毘盧遮那的大威神力,才從那裡命終來生此天。
為什麼要讓一面鼓來說,而不是佛親口說?先看鼓做了什麼:它第一句話不是安慰,是給這些天人一份『來歷說明』——你今天的樂不是偶然,是你自己種的因,加上佛的加持。天人最容易犯的病是耽樂而忘因;鼓一開口就把因指出來。第二次發音更進一步:毘盧遮那菩薩入了離垢三昧,你們應當敬禮——把他們的眼光從自身的樂,撥向一位入定的菩薩。
「奇哉希有!何因發此微妙之音」
諸天子的反應,是本品全部義理的起點:他們生疑了——這樣微妙的聲音,究竟從哪裡發出來的?
這一問問得好。若他們只是感激地聽著,法就止於勸善。因為他們追問聲音的來處,天鼓才得以把「來處」這件事整個翻開。經文從此進入主體:不是先講道理再舉例,是說法者以自己為例。這是本品體例上最值得注意的一點——能說的和所說的是同一件事。
我說「我」,卻不著我
天鼓答的第一句是:我所發的聲,是諸善根力所成就的。接著:「如我說我,而不著我,不著我所;一切諸佛亦復如是,自說是佛,不著於我,不著我所。」
這是先解一個現成的疑難。既然無我,佛為何處處說「我」?答:說我是言說之便,著我是心上之執,兩者不是一回事。一面鼓說「我」的時候,誰都知道那裡沒有一個鼓在自居;佛說『我是佛』,正是這樣的說。若把無我理解成『不許說我』,那是把義理降成了語法。這一節落到日用上就是:不必忌諱說我,要看的是說的時候心裡有沒有立一個我。
聲音從東方來嗎
接著是本品貫穿到底的一句:「如我音聲不從東方來,不從南西北方、四維上下來。」既然聲音不從十方來,那它從哪來?天鼓沒有說『無因』,它給了正面的答案:憑三昧善根之力、憑般若波羅蜜威德之力,才出生這樣的清淨音聲。
無來處,不等於無因。這是本品最要防的一個歪。人聽見『不從十方來』,容易滑向『那就是憑空的、隨機的』;經文偏偏把力量說得明明白白。所謂無來處,是說它不是一件從別處搬運過來、途中可以攔截的東西;它是條件具足時當下的現起。同一個理,經文又用三十三天的宮殿樂具來說一遍:那些樂具也不從十方來——它們是業所感,不是從倉庫搬來的。
你那個地獄的身,也沒有來處
然後天鼓把這把刀轉向聽者自己:「譬如汝等昔在地獄,地獄及身非十方來,但由於汝顛倒惡業愚癡纏縛,生地獄身,此無根本、無有來處。」
這一著極重。前面說音聲、說樂具,聽者還可以當作旁觀的道理;一說到『你昨天受的那個地獄身』,就躲不掉了。地獄是實有其苦的,這一點經文沒有否認——它否認的是『有一個現成的地獄在某處等著你』。地獄從顛倒惡業與愚癡纏縛生,所以「無根本」。無根本的意思是:它沒有一個獨立不待緣的底子,因此纏縛一解,它就沒有了。這正是後文懺悔義的伏筆——業若有根本,懺悔便無從下手。
五欲擋在念佛之前
理說到這裡,天鼓轉為勸誡:你們應當前往那位菩薩處親近供養,不要再貪著五欲樂具,「著五欲樂障諸善根」。接著一喻:「譬如劫火燒須彌山,悉令除盡,無餘可得;貪欲纏心亦復如是,終不能生念佛之意。」
要看清這喻的力道。它不是說貪欲讓念佛變弱,是說貪欲纏心的時候,念佛之意根本生不出來——如同劫火之後須彌無餘可得。這對剛生天的人尤其切:他們正處在最好的享受裡。經文不是叫他們苦行,是提醒他們:樂境本身不傷人,纏著才傷人。
知恩報恩,不是人情
天鼓再說:「汝等應當知恩報恩」,並且加了一句重話:不知報恩的眾生,多遭橫死,生於地獄。
這句容易被讀成勸世的人情話。放回本品脈絡看就不是了:這些天子的整個處境,是別人給的——一道光把他們從阿鼻拔出來。知恩,就是如實知道自己此刻站在哪一段因緣上;不知恩,就是把果報當成自己天生應得的,於是重新放逸造業。所以天鼓緊接著給出報恩的具體做法:你們如今應當趕快迴向,增長善根。報恩不是回禮,是把所得的轉出去。
非男非女,不生不滅
勸誡之後,天鼓回到自身作最後一喻:「如我天鼓,非男非女,而能出生無量無邊不思議事」——你們天子天女也一樣,非男非女,而能受用種種上妙宮殿園林。再推一層:「如我天鼓不生不滅,色、受、想、行、識亦復如是不生不滅。汝等若能於此悟解,應知則入無依印三昧。」
從一面鼓的沒有性別,說到五蘊的不生不滅,中間的關節在『無定體』三字:鼓不是男不是女,卻能作用;蘊不生不滅,卻能受苦受樂。悟解此處所入之定名為「無依印」——無依,正是因為沒有一個可倚的定體。這一節是本品前半的收束:從音聲的無來處,一路收到五蘊的無來處。
見不著的菩薩
諸天子聽了得未曾有,化作萬華雲、萬香雲、萬音樂雲、萬幢雲、萬蓋雲、萬歌讚雲,同往毘盧遮那菩薩的宮殿——卻「欲申瞻覲而不得見」。有天子說:菩薩已從此沒,生在人間淨飯王家了。諸天子以天眼觀看,果然見他處在淨飯王家,梵天欲天承事供養。
於是他們動了念:我們若不去問訊,乃至只要有一念貪著這天宮,就很不應該——這一念是他們的第二次進步:從求見,轉為警覺自己的耽著。而天鼓第四次發聲,糾正了他們對「見」的理解:「菩薩摩訶薩非此命終而生彼間,但以神通,隨諸眾生心之所宜,令其得見。」不是搬家,是應現。天鼓仍以自身作證:我如今不是眼所能見的,卻能出聲;菩薩入離垢三昧也是這樣,不是眼所見,而能處處示現受生。
悔除四障:先發心,再問方法
接著是本品的正教。天鼓教他們:應發阿耨多羅三藐三菩提心,淨治其意,住善威儀,悔除一切業障、煩惱障、報障、見障;並且以盡法界眾生數等的身、頭、舌,以盡法界眾生數等的善身業、善語業、善意業,悔除所有障礙過惡。澄觀於下文天鼓說法段方科「總觀四障」,此段但依經文陳四障。
注意次第:先發菩提心,後說悔除。懺悔若不安在菩提心上,只是求消災;安在菩提心上,才是清理上路的障礙。而「盡法界眾生數等身」的說法,也不是誇張的修辭——它把懺悔的量,撐到與所造之業的量相稱。諸天子的反應正是本節該有的反應:心大歡喜而問「菩薩摩訶薩云何悔除一切過惡」——他們問的是方法。
業止住於心,只從顛倒生
天鼓的答,是本品的心臟:「菩薩知諸業不從東方來,不從南西北方、四維上下來,而共積集,止住於心;但從顛倒生,無有住處。菩薩如是決定明見,無有疑惑。」
三句要分開看。一、業不從十方來——它不是外物。二、而共積集,止住於心——它確實在,且在心上。三、但從顛倒生,無有住處——它的生處是顛倒,不是一個真實的所在。三句合起來,正是懺悔何以可能的全部理由:業若是外物,懺悔追不到;業若無有,懺悔無必要;業在心上而無實住處,所以能以心轉之。天鼓還補了一句防邊的話:說我說我所、說貪恚癡種種諸業,「而實無我、無有我所」,諸業果報十方推求悉不可得。
業非生滅,卻不是沒有果報
到這裡最容易生的誤會是:既然無來去,是不是也就無果報?天鼓立刻堵住:「一切諸業亦復如是,非生非滅,隨有修集則受其報。」又說:「若有去來則有斷常,一切諸佛終不演說有斷常法,除為方便成熟眾生。」
這一節把兩邊都切了。說業實有來去,落常見;說業全然無有,落斷見;佛不說斷常之法。非生非滅而果報不失——這才是可懺的業。所以本品的懺悔,不是把罪抹掉,是把『罪有實體』這個顛倒看破;顛倒破了,依顛倒而立的罪也就無所依附。
鏡裡的影像,來過嗎
為了把這個理坐實,天鼓舉出本品最有名的喻:有玻瓈鏡名為能照,清淨鑒徹,與十世界其量正等;無量國土中一切山川眾生,乃至地獄、畜生、餓鬼,所有影像都在其中顯現。然後它設問:「彼諸影像可得說言來入鏡中、從鏡去不?」諸天子答:「不也。」
這一問一答是本品兩次由聽者作答之一(另一在品末,寶手答「不也」),位置正在義理的頂點上。影像分明現,卻不曾入、不曾出。一切業也是這樣:能出生果報,而無來去之處。再以幻師一喻收尾——幻師幻惑人眼,諸業亦然;「若如是知,是真實懺悔,一切罪惡悉得清淨」。經文於此下了定義:真實懺悔,是一種知,不是一種交易。
說法之益:一場法會的果
法說完了,果現前。百千億那由他佛剎微塵數世界中的兜率陀天子得無生法忍;無量六欲天子發菩提心;六欲天中一切天女皆捨女身,發無上菩提之意。
接著是更廣的一層:諸天子因聞普賢廣大迴向、因得十地、因獲諸力莊嚴三昧、因以眾生數等清淨三業悔除重障,於是見到百千億那由他佛剎微塵數的七寶蓮華,華上菩薩結跏趺坐放光,菩薩的一一隨好放眾生數等光明,光中又有眾生數等佛結跏趺坐隨心說法。經文卻在盛極處收了一句:「而猶未現離垢三昧少分之力。」——見到這麼多,還不到那個定的一小分。本品所有的大數字,都要落在這一句上才讀得對。
香雲與煩惱之數
得益之後是供養。諸天子於身上一一毛孔化作眾生數等的妙華雲供養毘盧遮那如來,散在佛身上皆住;香雲普雨無量佛剎微塵數世界。身蒙其香的,「其身安樂,譬如比丘入第四禪,一切業障皆得銷滅」——以定境之樂為量,可見此香非世間香。
而聞者所得更深一層:經文於此列出煩惱之數——於色聲香味觸,內有五百煩惱,外亦五百;貪行多者二萬一千,瞋行多者二萬一千,癡行多者二萬一千,等分行者二萬一千。四類合為八萬四千。經文並不叫人一一去斷,只說「了知如是悉是虛妄」;如是知已,即成就香幢雲自在光明清淨善根。見蓋雲者,則種一清淨金網轉輪王一恒河沙善根。數目擺出來,是要人看見它虛妄,不是要人數著它發愁。
清淨金網轉輪王
本品後半轉入果位。菩薩住此轉輪王位,於百千億那由他佛剎微塵數世界中教化眾生。經文以兩喻說此位之用:一是明鏡世界的月智如來,四眾化身而來聽法,廣說本生未曾一念間斷,若有眾生聞其佛名必得往生彼土;二是初禪——「如得初禪,雖未命終,見梵天處所有宮殿而得受於梵世安樂」。
兩喻各有所指。月智如來喻聞名之益,故下接:暫得遇金網輪王之光明者,必獲菩薩第十地位。初禪喻未至而先受,故知遇光所得之十地,是先得其位分之受用,而非跳過修行——經文明說「以先修行善根力故」。住此位放摩尼髻清淨光明,遇者皆得第十地位、成就無量智慧光明、得十種清淨眼乃至十種清淨意、具足無量甚深三昧,成就清淨肉眼。
八十返微塵,與那隻肉眼
末段如來親設一喻,且直接考問寶手:把億那由他佛剎碎為微塵,一塵一剎再各碎為微塵;持之左手向東行,過那麼多微塵數世界才下一塵,十方皆然;所有著塵不著塵的世界,全都集成一個佛土。「如是佛土廣大無量可思議不?」寶手答:「不也!」——不可思議;並補一句:若有眾生聞此譬喻能生信解,更為希有奇特。
佛印可了這句,而且把重量押在「信」上:聞此譬喻而生信者,「我授彼記,決定當成阿耨多羅三藐三菩提」。信何以有這樣的分量?因為這個量已超出思量,能信即是心量已與之相稱。隨後如來再把數推到極處:以千億佛剎微塵數的上述廣大佛土末為微塵,依前譬喻一一下盡,集成一土,復末為塵,如是展轉「乃至經八十返」——這一切微塵,「菩薩業報清淨肉眼於一念中悉能明見」。
要看的是「肉眼」二字。不是天眼、不是慧眼,是業報所成的肉眼——只因這業報清淨,一念之中就明見八十返之塵,並見百億廣大佛剎微塵數佛,如玻瓈鏡清淨光明照十佛剎微塵數世界。玻瓈鏡在此第二次出現:前面用它說業無來去,這裡用它說眼之明淨。全品最後結歸一句:這一切都是清淨金網轉輪王甚深三昧福德善根之所成就——一路從地獄眾生遇光講到此處,因果一線未斷。
承衍
本品之釋,古德三軌並行。澄觀依相好體用立義,判本品為劣德之用而成頓益、翻顯大相德難思,並於品末結云差別因果至此而竟、此品之末經來未盡——以本品為差別因果之收束,下接普賢行。法藏於六十本疏中另開二門:一定分齊,既三十二相有八十隨好以嚴,則十蓮華藏微塵數相一一各有塵數等好;二辨業用,明佛為菩薩時相輪隨好最下位處之用,放一光而地獄眾生皆得生天、成就十地十眼。李通玄不逐品立科,於自訂科序中列本品為第九,判其義為「於手中放光,照惡道苦,明道滿大悲接俗光也」;又於〈阿僧祇品〉科釋中專引本品天鼓所說悔除法,以這些天子過去修十信、中有作惡墮地獄、蒙光生天、聞天鼓說法一時得十地離垢三昧,判為「三生得十地果」之例證——此為通玄己判,非本品經文直說,誌其繫屬,不判高下。
異譯方面:本品六十本作〈佛小相光明功德品〉,「隨好」彼作「小相」,發起同為佛告寶手菩薩;末段兩本喻依不同(八十本作微塵展轉八十返,六十本作錠光玻瓈珠),而場景結構同——皆以難思之量結歸轉輪王位之三昧福德善根。兩本詳略與譯語系統本自有異,全錄不判。
至於本品與經內他品之繫,經文自己說得最清楚:諸天子之得十地,繫於「聞說普賢廣大迴向」。懺悔一段所以能成為華嚴一經中最常被引用的悔除法門,也正因為它不停在儀式上——它把懺悔安在『業無來處』這一見上,於是懺悔成了見的事,不是交易的事。
Beyond the Marks, Why Speak of a ‘Sign’ Besides
The bodily marks of the Buddha were exhausted in the preceding chapter — the ocean of marks of the ten bodies, each single mark with its own light shining through the Dharma realm. That being so, why does this chapter set up yet another thing called a secondary sign?
A secondary sign is a fine excellence that follows upon the great marks; reckoned by rank, it stands a degree below the marks. It is precisely upon that ‘degree below’ that Chengguan founds the reason for this chapter’s coming: marks and signs differ, yet both alike serve to adorn the Buddha’s body; but the signs depend upon the marks and their virtue is inferior to the marks, and so they are set forth after the marks — and just because they are inferior, when their working is once displayed it turns back and displays instead that the virtue of the great marks is hard to conceive. This is a way of speaking: to say a thing that is inconceivable, one begins not from the highest place but from the lowest — if even the lowest portion is like this, the highest may be surmised. So in reading this chapter, if one reads no further than ‘the Buddha’s signs are majestic,’ one has read past it; what the sūtra really asks you to reckon is a ratio.
Can One Light Really Save the Beings of the Hells
The sūtra gives that ratio in its opening breath. The Tathāgata says of himself: there is a secondary sign named Perfect Fullness King, from within which a great light goes forth named Blazing, with seven million asaṃkhyeyas of lights besides for its retinue — and this is one sign only. Then further down: within the mark of the thousand-spoked wheel beneath the bodhisattva’s feet there is a secondary sign, which ever sends forth forty kinds of light, and among them one named Pure Merit, able to shine through worlds as many as the dust motes of a koṭi of nayutas of buddha-lands. One light within one sign shines upon that many worlds.
Before the light of the Perfect Fullness King, the Tathāgata first speaks of a light belonging to the causal stage: “When I was still a bodhisattva, in the palace of the Tuṣita Heaven I sent forth a great light, named Light-Banner King, which shone through worlds as many as the dust motes of ten buddha-lands.” What it shone upon were the beings of the hells — “those who met this light had their manifold sufferings brought to rest, and obtained ten kinds of pure eye, and their ears, noses, tongues, bodies, and minds likewise; they all gave rise to joy and leapt up rejoicing, and when their lives there ended they were born in the Tuṣita Heaven.” Two things are to be watched in this passage. First, the owner of the light is still a bodhisattva and not yet a buddha: the light of the secondary signs of the fruition stage was already shining from the causal stage. Second, what is gained is first the ten kinds of purity in each of the six faculties, and only afterward the birth in heaven — first the organs of seeing and hearing are exchanged, and then the dwelling place.
What did this light do? “Those beings in the Avīci hell who undergo the utmost suffering, when they meet this light, all end their lives there and are born in the Tuṣita Heaven.” Do not read this as a stroke of luck. The sūtra itself supplies the condition: the light, “following upon the manifold deeds and the manifold desires and delights of beings, brings them all to ripeness” — it ripens, it does not substitute. The roots of goodness the beings already had were ripened by the light, and only then were their painful recompenses spent; and further on the sūtra says outright of those who obtain a station upon meeting the light that it is “by the power of the roots of goodness of his former practice.” The light is the condition, not the cause. If this portion is not kept distinct, the chapter becomes a tale of marvels; kept distinct, what it states is the principle of stimulus and response.
The One Who Expounds Is Not the Buddha but a Drum
And after the birth in heaven? The sūtra sets up a most singular expounder of the Dharma: “In that heaven there is a drum, named Most Delightful.” The drum sounds of itself, and tells these gods just come up out of the hells: it is because your minds were not heedless, because you planted roots of goodness in the presence of the Tathāgata and in former times drew near to a multitude of good friends, and because of the great awesome spiritual power of Vairocana, that your lives there ended and you came to be born in this heaven.
Why should a drum be made to speak, rather than the Buddha with his own mouth? First look at what the drum does. Its first utterance is not consolation but a statement of provenance handed to these gods: the pleasure you have today is no accident; it is the cause you yourself planted, together with the Buddha’s sustaining power. The illness gods are likeliest to fall into is to revel in pleasure and forget the cause; the drum, in its first words, points the cause out. Its second sounding goes a step further: the bodhisattva Vairocana has entered the samādhi of parting from defilement, and you should pay him homage — turning their eyes away from their own pleasure and toward a bodhisattva sitting in concentration.
“How Strange and Rare It Is! By What Cause Is So Subtle and Wondrous a Sound Sent Forth?”
The response of the sons of the gods is the starting point of the whole doctrine of this chapter: they gave rise to a doubt — a sound so subtle and wondrous as this, from where exactly is it sent forth?
The question is well asked. Had they merely listened in gratitude, the Dharma would have stopped at exhortation to goodness. Because they pressed after where the sound came from, the drum was able to open up the whole matter of ‘coming from.’ From here the sūtra enters its body: not first the principle and then the example, but the expounder taking himself for the example. This is the point most worth noting in the chapter’s manner — what can speak and what is spoken of are one and the same thing.
I Say “I,” and Yet Do Not Cling to a Self
The drum’s first answer is: the sound I send forth is accomplished by the power of the manifold roots of goodness. Then: “It is as when I say ‘I’ and yet do not cling to there being a self, nor cling to there being anything that belongs to a self; and all the buddhas are likewise — they say of themselves ‘I am the Buddha,’ and yet do not cling to a self, do not cling to what belongs to a self.”
This is first of all the untying of a ready difficulty. If there is no self, why does the Buddha say “I” everywhere? The answer: to say ‘I’ is a convenience of speech, to cling to a self is a grasping in the mind, and the two are not one thing. When a drum says “I,” everyone knows there is no drum there setting itself up as somebody; and the Buddha’s saying ‘I am the Buddha’ is a saying just of that kind. To understand no-self as ‘one may not say I’ is to reduce a doctrine to a rule of grammar. Brought down to daily use, this section comes to: there is no need to shrink from saying ‘I’; what is to be watched is whether, in the saying, a self is being set up in the mind.
Does the Sound Come from the East
Next comes the sentence that runs through this whole chapter: “It is as with my sound: it does not come from the east, nor does it come from the south, the west, the north, the four intermediate quarters, the zenith, or the nadir.” If the sound does not come from the ten quarters, then where does it come from? The drum does not say ‘from no cause’; it gives a positive answer: it is by the power of the roots of goodness of samādhi, and by the awesome power of prajñā-pāramitā, that a pure sound such as this is brought forth.
To have no place one comes from is not to have no cause. This is the chapter’s most guarded-against swerve. A man who hears ‘it does not come from the ten quarters’ slips easily into ‘then it is out of thin air, then it is random’; and the sūtra takes care to name the powers plainly. To have no place one comes from means that it is not a thing carried over from somewhere else, which might be intercepted on the road; it is the immediate arising, when the conditions are complete. The same principle is said over again with the palaces and instruments of pleasure of the Thirty-Three Gods: those instruments of pleasure too do not come from the ten quarters — they are what deeds have called forth, not goods fetched out of a storehouse.
That Hell-Body of Yours Has No Place It Came From Either
Then the drum turns this blade upon the hearers themselves: “It is as with your being in the hells in former times: that hell and that hell-body did not come from the ten quarters; it was only through your inverted evil deeds and the entanglement of delusion that a hell-body was born. That body has no root, and there is no place it comes from.”
This stroke falls very heavily. While it was sounds and instruments of pleasure, the hearers could still take it for a principle observed from the side; once it is ‘that hell-body you wore yesterday,’ there is no dodging. That the hells are really suffered the sūtra does not deny — what it denies is that there is a hell ready-made in some place, waiting for you. The hell is born from inverted evil deeds and the entanglement of delusion, and therefore it “has no root.” To have no root means that it has no substrate standing independent of conditions; and therefore, once the entanglement is loosened, it is gone. This is precisely the foreshadowing of the doctrine of repentance below — for if deeds had a root, repentance would have nothing to lay hold of.
The Five Desires Stand in Front of Mindfulness of the Buddha
The principle having been carried this far, the drum turns to admonition: you should go to that bodhisattva’s place to draw near and make offerings, and no longer be greedily attached to the instruments of the five desires, for “to be greedily attached to the pleasure of the five desires screens off the manifold roots of goodness.” Then a simile: “It is as when the fire at the end of the kalpa burns Sumeru: it burns it away utterly, so that nothing at all is left; and the entanglement of greed and desire about the mind is likewise — in the end the intention of mindfulness of the Buddha cannot arise.”
The force of the simile must be seen clearly. It does not say that greed makes mindfulness of the Buddha weaker; it says that while greed entangles the mind, the intention of mindfulness of the Buddha cannot be brought forth at all — as after the fire at the end of the kalpa nothing at all of Sumeru is left. This bears most sharply upon men just born into heaven: they are in the very midst of the finest enjoyment. The sūtra is not telling them to practice austerities; it is reminding them that a state of pleasure does not of itself injure a man — it is the being entangled that injures him.
To Know Kindness and Repay It Is Not a Matter of Courtesy
The drum says further: “You should know kindness and repay kindness,” and adds a heavy word: beings who do not know how to repay kindness for the most part meet with untimely death and are born in the hells.
This is easily read as a worldly homily upon gratitude. Set back into the chapter’s own context it is nothing of the kind: the whole situation of these gods was given them by another — a single light drew them up out of Avīci. To know kindness is to know truly upon what stretch of causes and conditions one is standing at this moment; not to know kindness is to take one’s recompense as something owed to one by nature, and so to fall back into heedlessness and make deeds anew. Hence the drum at once gives the concrete way of repaying: now you should quickly dedicate and direct what you have gained, and increase your roots of goodness. To repay kindness is not to return a gift; it is to turn over what one has received.
Neither Male nor Female, Neither Arising nor Ceasing
After the admonition the drum comes back to itself for a last simile: “It is as with me, this heavenly drum: I am neither male nor female, and yet I am able to bring forth measureless, boundless, inconceivable things” — and you sons of the gods and daughters of the gods are likewise, neither male nor female, and yet able to enjoy the manifold exquisite palaces and gardens. Then it presses one layer further: “And as with me, this heavenly drum, which neither arises nor ceases, so form, feeling, perception, formations, and consciousness are likewise, neither arising nor ceasing. If you are able to awaken and understand herein, know that this is to enter the samādhi of the seal of no reliance.”
From a drum’s having no sex to the aggregates’ neither arising nor ceasing, the joint in the middle lies in the words ‘no fixed substance’: the drum is neither male nor female, and yet it functions; the aggregates neither arise nor cease, and yet they undergo pain and pleasure. The concentration entered upon awakening here is named ‘the seal of no reliance’ — no reliance, precisely because there is no fixed substance to lean upon. This section closes the first half of the chapter: from the soundlessness of a place the sound comes from, all the way home to the aggregates having no place they come from.
The Bodhisattva Who Cannot Be Seen
The sons of the gods, having heard this, gained what they had never had before, and conjured up ten thousand clouds of flowers, ten thousand clouds of incense, ten thousand clouds of music, ten thousand clouds of banners, ten thousand clouds of canopies, and ten thousand clouds of songs of praise, and went together to the palace of the bodhisattva Vairocana — and yet they “wished to look up and behold him, and could not see him.” One son of the gods said: the bodhisattva has already passed away from here and been born among men in the house of King Śuddhodana. The sons of the gods looked with the heavenly eye, and sure enough saw him in the house of King Śuddhodana, with Brahmā and the gods of desire attending upon him and making offerings.
Thereupon a thought stirred in them: if we do not go to ask after his welfare, and if there be so much as a single thought of clinging attachment to this heavenly palace, that would be greatly unfitting — and this thought is their second advance: from seeking to see him, they turn to being alert to their own indulgence. Then the drum, sounding a fourth time, corrects their understanding of ‘seeing’: “The bodhisattva-mahāsattva did not end his life in this place and go to be born over there; it is only by the power of spiritual penetration that, according to what suits the minds of beings, he lets them see him.” It is not a removal of household, but a responsive manifestation. And the drum again takes itself for witness: I now am not what the eye is able to see, and yet I am able to give forth sound; the bodhisattva entering the samādhi of parting from defilement is likewise — not what the eye can see, and yet able to display his taking of birth in place after place.
Repenting and Removing the Four Obstructions: First Raise the Mind, Then Ask the Method
Next comes the proper instruction of this chapter. The drum teaches them: they should give rise to the mind of unsurpassed perfect awakening, purify and order their minds, abide in good deportment, and repent and remove all obstructions of karma, obstructions of afflictions, obstructions of recompense, and obstructions of views; and further, with bodies, heads, and tongues as many as the number of the beings of the whole Dharma realm, and with good deeds of body, speech, and mind as many as the number of the beings of the whole Dharma realm, repent and remove all obstructions and faults. Chengguan places his outline heading ‘contemplating the four obstructions altogether’ only at the later passage of the drum’s exposition; this passage simply sets out the four obstructions as the sūtra has them.
Note the order: first the raising of the mind of awakening, and afterward the speaking of repentance. Repentance not set upon the mind of awakening is only a seeking to be rid of calamity; set upon the mind of awakening, it becomes the clearing away of the obstructions on a road one has taken. And the phrase ‘bodies as many as the number of the beings of the whole Dharma realm’ is not a rhetorical exaggeration either — it stretches the quantity of the repentance until it answers to the quantity of the deeds that were done. The response of the sons of the gods is exactly the response this section should have: their minds greatly rejoiced, and they asked, “How is it that the bodhisattva-mahāsattva repents and removes all faults?” — what they ask for is a method.
Deeds Come to Rest upon the Mind, and Are Born Only of Inversion
The drum’s answer is the heart of the chapter: “The bodhisattva knows that the manifold deeds do not come from the east, nor come from the south, the west, the north, the four intermediate quarters, the zenith, or the nadir, but are gathered together in common and come to rest within the mind; they are born only of inversion, and have no place where they abide. The bodhisattva sees this with decisive clarity, and has no doubt.”
The three clauses are to be taken apart. First, deeds do not come from the ten quarters — they are not outward things. Second, they are gathered together in common and come to rest within the mind — they really are there, and they are upon the mind. Third, they are born only of inversion and have no place where they abide — their place of birth is inversion, not any real location. The three together are the entire reason why repentance is possible: were deeds outward things, repentance could not reach them; were deeds nothing at all, repentance would be unnecessary; because deeds are upon the mind and yet have no real place of abiding, they can be turned by the mind. The drum adds one more word to guard the border: it speaks of a self and of what belongs to a self, speaks of greed and anger and delusion and the manifold deeds, “and yet in truth there is no self, nor is there anything that belongs to a self,” and the deeds and their fruits of recompense, sought for throughout the ten quarters, are altogether not to be found.
Deeds Neither Arise nor Cease, and Yet There Is No Loss of Recompense
The misunderstanding likeliest to arise just here is: since there is no coming and going, is there then no recompense either? The drum stops it at once: “All the manifold deeds are likewise: neither arising nor ceasing, but only, according to whoever has cultivated and gathered them, does that one undergo their recompense.” And again: “If there were a coming and a going, one would fall into the view of annihilation and the view of permanence; the buddhas in the end do not expound a dharma that has annihilation or permanence, save as a skillful means for bringing beings to ripeness.”
This section cuts away both sides. To say deeds really come and go is to fall into the view of permanence; to say deeds are nothing at all is to fall into the view of annihilation; and the Buddha does not expound a dharma of annihilation or permanence. Neither arising nor ceasing, and yet no loss of recompense — this is the kind of deed that can be repented. So the repentance of this chapter is not a wiping away of sin; it is a seeing through of the inversion that sin has a substance of its own. Once the inversion is broken, the sin that was established upon the inversion has nothing left to cling to.
Did the Images in the Mirror Ever Come
To settle this principle in place, the drum raises the most famous simile of the chapter: there is a crystal mirror named Able to Shine, pure and reflecting through and through, exactly equal in measure to ten worlds; within measureless lands all the mountains and rivers and beings, and even the hells, the animals, and the hungry ghosts, all have their images appearing within it. Then it puts a question: “Can those reflected images be said to enter into the mirror and to go out from the mirror?” The sons of the gods answer: “They cannot.”
This one question and answer is one of the two places in the chapter where the hearers make the reply (the other is at the chapter’s end, where Jewel Hand answers “It cannot be conceived”), and its position is at the very summit of the doctrine. The images appear plainly, and yet have never entered and never gone out. All deeds are likewise: they are able to bring forth their fruits of recompense, and yet have no place they come from and no place they go to. Then the simile of the illusionist closes it off — the illusionist deludes the eyes of men, and the manifold deeds are the same; “if one is able to know in this way, this is true repentance, and all sins and evils are made pure.” Here the sūtra lays down a definition: true repentance is a kind of knowing, not a kind of transaction.
The Benefit of the Teaching: The Fruit of One Dharma Assembly
The Dharma spoken, the fruit appears. The sons of the Tuṣita gods within worlds as many as the dust motes of a hundred thousand koṭis of nayutas of buddha-lands obtained the forbearance of the non-arising of dharmas; measureless sons of the gods of the six heavens of desire gave rise to the mind of awakening; and all the daughters of the gods within the six heavens of desire forsook the body of a woman and gave rise to the intention set upon unsurpassed awakening.
Then comes a wider layer: because the sons of the gods had heard the vast dedication of Samantabhadra, because they had obtained the ten grounds, because they had gained the samādhi adorned with the manifold powers, and because with pure deeds of the three kinds as many as the number of beings they had repented and removed the heavy obstructions, they thereupon saw seven-jeweled lotus flowers as many as the dust motes of a hundred thousand koṭis of nayutas of buddha-lands, upon each flower a bodhisattva seated cross-legged sending forth light, each single secondary sign of those bodhisattvas sending forth lights as many as the number of beings, and within the lights again buddhas as many as the number of beings, seated cross-legged and expounding the Dharma according to the minds of beings. And yet at the very height of this abundance the sūtra gathers it up in one clause: “and yet all of this did not yet display even a small part of the power of the samādhi of parting from defilement.” — seeing so much, and it does not reach a small part of that concentration. Every one of the great numbers in this chapter must come to rest upon this clause before it is read rightly.
The Clouds of Incense and the Number of the Afflictions
After the benefit comes the offering. The sons of the gods conjured within each and every pore of their bodies clouds of wondrous flowers as many as the number of beings, and made offering to Vairocana Tathāgata, scattering them upon the Buddha, and they all came to rest there; the clouds of incense rained down everywhere upon worlds as many as the dust motes of measureless buddha-lands. Of those whose bodies received that incense, “their bodies were at ease, as when a monk enters the fourth dhyāna, and all their obstructions of karma were melted away” — with the joy of a state of concentration as the measure, one may see that this incense is no worldly incense.
And what those who smelled it gained goes one layer deeper. Here the sūtra sets out the number of the afflictions: as regards form, sound, smell, taste, and touch, there are five hundred afflictions within and five hundred without; those in whom the practice of greed is much have twenty-one thousand, those in whom the practice of anger is much have twenty-one thousand, those in whom the practice of delusion is much have twenty-one thousand, and those in whom the three are in equal parts have twenty-one thousand. The four sorts together make eighty-four thousand. The sūtra does not tell a man to cut them off one by one; it says only, “they know that all of this is empty and false”; and having known it in this way, one accomplishes the roots of goodness of the pure light of the sovereign mastery of the cloud of incense-banners. Those who see the cloud of canopies plant roots of goodness as many as the sands of one Gaṅgā of a pure golden-net wheel-turning king. The numbers are set out so that a man may see that they are empty and false, not so that he may count them over and grow anxious.
The Pure Golden-Net Wheel-Turning King
The latter half of the chapter turns to the station of fruition. The bodhisattva abiding in this station of the wheel-turning king teaches and transforms beings within worlds as many as the dust motes of a hundred thousand koṭis of nayutas of buddha-lands. The sūtra speaks of the working of this station with two similes: one is the Tathāgata Moon Wisdom of the world Bright Mirror, to whom the fourfold assembly come by manifested bodies to hear the Dharma, and who expounds at length the affairs of his former births without ever an interval of a single thought, so that if there are beings who hear the name of that buddha they will surely be born in that land; the other is the first dhyāna — “It is as with one who has obtained the first dhyāna: though he has not yet ended his life, he already sees all the palaces in the place of Brahmā and is able to receive the ease and joy of the Brahmā world.”
Each simile has its own point. Moon Wisdom Tathāgata figures the benefit of hearing a name, and so what follows is: whoever for a moment meets the light of the golden-net wheel-turning king will surely obtain the station of the bodhisattva’s tenth ground. The first dhyāna figures a receiving beforehand of what one has not yet reached, and so one knows that the tenth ground gained upon meeting the light is a receiving in advance of the portion of that station, and not a leaping over of practice — the sūtra says plainly, “this is by the power of the roots of goodness of his former practice.” Abiding in this station he sends forth the pure light of the maṇi topknot, and those who meet it all obtain the station of the tenth ground, accomplish measureless light of wisdom, obtain ten kinds of pure eye and so on to ten kinds of pure mind, are furnished with measureless and most profound samādhis, and accomplish a pure fleshly eye.
Eighty Turns of Dust Motes, and That Fleshly Eye
In the last passage the Tathāgata sets a simile with his own mouth, and puts a question directly to Jewel Hand: crush a koṭi of nayutas of buddha-lands into dust motes, take one mote as one land and crush each of these into dust motes again; hold them in the left hand and go eastward, passing that many worlds of dust motes before setting down one mote, and so in all ten quarters; and let all the worlds, whether a mote was set upon them or not, be gathered together into one buddha-land. “Is such a buddha-land, vast and measureless, to be conceived?” Jewel Hand answers, “It cannot be conceived!” — and adds a word besides: if there be beings who hear this simile and are able to give rise to faith and understanding, that is rarer and more marvelous still.
The Buddha approves that word, and lays the weight upon ‘faith’: to one who hears this simile and gives rise to faith, “I confer upon that one a prediction: he will surely accomplish unsurpassed perfect awakening.” Why should faith carry such weight? Because this quantity has already passed beyond calculation, and to be able to believe it is for the measure of one’s mind to have become answerable to it. Thereupon the Tathāgata pushes the number to its furthest: grind the vast buddha-lands spoken of above, as many as the dust motes of a thousand koṭis of buddha-lands, into dust motes, set them down one by one following the former simile until they are used up, gather them into one land, and grind it into dust motes again, and so on turn after turn “even to the passing of eighty turns” — and all these dust motes “the pure fleshly eye accomplished by the recompense of the bodhisattva’s karma is able within a single thought to see clearly.”
What is to be watched is the words ‘fleshly eye.’ Not the heavenly eye, not the eye of wisdom, but the fleshly eye accomplished by the recompense of karma — only, because this recompense is pure, within a single thought it sees clearly the motes of eighty turns, and sees too buddhas as many as the dust motes of a hundred koṭis of vast buddha-lands, pure and bright as a crystal mirror, shining through worlds as many as the dust motes of ten buddha-lands. The crystal mirror appears here a second time: earlier it served to say that deeds have no coming and going, here it serves to say that the eye is bright and clean. The whole chapter is gathered up at last in one clause: all of this is accomplished by the merit and roots of goodness of the most profound samādhi of the pure golden-net wheel-turning king — from the beings of the hells meeting the light all the way to this place, the thread of cause and fruit has not once been broken.
Lineage
In the explanation of this chapter the ancient masters run in three tracks side by side. Chengguan founds his sense upon the substance and function of marks and signs, judging this chapter to be a working of inferior virtue that yet accomplishes an immediate benefit and turns back to display that the virtue of the great marks is hard to conceive; and at the chapter’s end he sets down that the differentiated causes and fruits are herewith finished, and that at the end of this chapter the scripture did not come down complete — taking this chapter as the gathering up of the differentiated causes and fruits, with the practice of Samantabhadra following after. Fazang, in his commentary upon the sixty-fascicle text, opens two further gates: first, settling the compass — since the thirty-two marks are adorned with eighty secondary signs, then each single one of the marks as many as the dust motes of ten lotus-treasuries has signs as many as dust motes; second, setting forth the working — making clear the working, when the Buddha was a bodhisattva, of the secondary sign at the lowest station of the wheel-mark, which sends forth one light so that the beings of the hells all obtain birth in heaven and accomplish the ten grounds and the ten kinds of eye. Li Tongxuan sets up no outline chapter by chapter, but in his own order of chapters lists this one as the ninth, and judges its sense to be that “he sends forth light within his hand, shining upon the sufferings of the evil destinies, making clear the light of the fullness of the path and of great compassion gathering in the worldly”; and further, in his explanation of the outline of the Chapter on Asaṃkhyeya, he cites expressly the method of repenting and removing spoken by the heavenly drum in this chapter, and takes these gods — who in the past cultivated the ten faiths, made evil deeds in the intermediate state and fell into the hells, were shone upon by the light and born in heaven, heard the heavenly drum expound the Dharma and at one time obtained the ten grounds and the samādhi of parting from defilement — as an instance of what he judges to be “obtaining the fruit of the ten grounds in three lives.” This is Li Tongxuan’s own judgment, and not what the text of this chapter says outright; his ascription is set down as such, without adjudication of which is higher.
As for the parallel translation: in the sixty-fascicle text this chapter is the Chapter on the Merit of the Light of the Lesser Marks of the Buddha, where ‘secondary sign’ appears as ‘lesser mark,’ and the opening is likewise the Buddha telling the bodhisattva Jewel Hand; in the closing passage the two witnesses take different grounds for their similes (the eighty-fascicle text having the dust motes carried through eighty turns, the sixty-fascicle text having the crystal pearl of a lamp-flame), while the structure of the scene is the same — both gathering up, with a quantity beyond conceiving, into the merit and roots of goodness of the samādhi of the station of the wheel-turning king. The two witnesses differ of themselves in fullness and brevity and in their systems of rendering; both are recorded without adjudication.
As to how this chapter is tied to the other chapters within the sūtra, the sūtra itself says it most clearly: the obtaining of the ten grounds by the sons of the gods is tied to their “hearing the vast dedication of Samantabhadra.” And the reason the passage on repentance has become the most often cited method of repenting and removing in the whole Avataṃsaka is likewise that it does not stop at ritual — it sets repentance upon the one insight that deeds have no place they come from, and so repentance becomes a matter of seeing, and not a matter of transaction.
品三十六 普賢行品The Practice of Samantabhadra
全文五層 →Full five layers →為什麼開口先說『這只是少分』
前面幾品講如來的壽量、住處、不思議法、相海、隨好光明,一路把佛境界說得極廣。普賢一開口卻先收:前面所演,只是隨眾生根器所宜,略說如來境界的一小分。這句話容易被讀成謙辭,其實是判分齊——說了多少、對誰說、憑什麼只能說到這裡。澄觀科此為「標前少說」,下接「徵釋所由」,二段合為「說因」,正是要交代:佛境界不是說不完而已,是說給誰聽、能聽多少才決定說多少。誤讀是把它當客套。落地:讀華嚴到此處,該問的不是『佛境界有多大』,而是『我這個根器現在能承接到哪裡』。
佛出世的理由,是一份病歷
接著普賢說出佛出興於世的緣由。經文列的不是功德,是眾生的病狀:沒有智慧而造惡,計執我與我所,執著在身上,顛倒疑惑,以邪見分別,與種種結縛恆常相應,隨生死流而離如來之道越來越遠。七句連下,一句比一句深——從無智到造惡,從造惡到計我,從計我到著身,從著身到顛倒,從顛倒到邪見,從邪見到結縛,從結縛到隨流遠道。誤讀是把它當成泛泛的呵責。這其實是全品的病因書:下文所列百萬障,一條一條都是這幾句的展開;下文所修十法,一條一條都是這幾句的對治。落地:先認得病,後面的藥才不是一堆名相。
我不見一法為大過失
然後是全品最重的一句:我不見一法為大過失,如諸菩薩於他菩薩起瞋心者。這句話的分量在它的簡別——不是說瞋是最重的煩惱,是說『菩薩對菩薩起瞋』這一件事最重。所簡有三:起者是菩薩,所對是菩薩,所起是瞋。三者缺一,此判不成。澄觀釋此段,引《決定毘尼經》為證,說菩薩寧起百千貪心也不起一瞋,因為違害大悲莫過於此,並誌《菩薩善戒》有同樣的說法。理由就在「違害大悲」四字:貪還在攝,瞋直是拒;大悲是菩薩行的體,瞋一起,體先壞了。誤讀是拿這句去責備別人的瞋。落地:這句是說給發了菩提心的人聽的——你越是同行,越傷得起。
一瞋成百萬障:這個「百萬」怎麼讀
經文自問自答:若諸菩薩於餘菩薩起瞋恚心,即成就百萬障門。接著逐條列名。有人一見「百萬」就要去數,數不足一百萬便疑。澄觀誌「古人寄位分五」以科此百萬障〔疏見考據〕;就經文看,所列諸障是類目,總說百萬——是類舉之量,非清點之數(此為讀法,非經文直說)。六十華嚴同一段作「百千障礙法門」,數目與八十本不同,古來並存,誌錄不判。誤讀是以為經文在誇張。落地:要看的不是數字,是這些障的排法——它從果報排到根身,從根身排到心行,最後排到種性,一層比一層近。
障的第一層:見不到、聽不到、生不到
先列的十條全是最粗的果報:不見菩提、不聞正法、生不淨世界、生諸惡趣、生諸難處、多諸疾病、多被謗毀、生頑鈍諸趣、壞失正念、闕少智慧。這一層的共相是『機會沒有了』——不是修不好,是連遇都遇不到。接著是六根障:眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意各成一障,六十華嚴此處併作一句,八十本逐根別出。再接著是惡緣一類:惡知識、惡伴黨、樂習小乘、樂近凡庸、不信樂大威德人、樂與離正見人同住、生外道家、住魔境界、離佛正教、不見善友、善根留難、增不善法、得下劣處。誤讀是把這些當成別人加給我的環境。經文的次第說得清楚,這些是一念瞋所成就的,不是外來的。落地:起心的當下,往後的遇與不遇就開始分岔了。
古人寄位:以五位配這一長串障
再往下是生處之障——生邊地、生惡人家、生惡神中、生惡龍惡夜叉乃至惡羅剎中;然後是不樂大法之障——不樂佛法、習童蒙法、樂著小乘、不樂大乘、性多驚怖、心常憂惱、愛著生死、不專佛法、不喜見聞佛自在神通;再是退失菩薩行之障——不得菩薩諸根、不行菩薩淨行、退怯菩薩深心、不生菩薩大願、不發一切智心、於菩薩行懈怠、不能淨治諸業、不能攝取大福、智力不能明利、斷於廣大智慧、不護持菩薩諸行;再是謗智住魔之障——樂誹謗一切智語、遠離諸佛菩提、樂住眾魔境界、不專修佛境界、不決定發菩薩弘誓、不樂與菩薩同住、不求菩薩善根、性多見疑、心常愚闇。澄觀於此誌錄古人一種科法,把這一長串寄配五位:初一段障十信行,「不樂佛法」以下障十住行,「不得菩薩諸根」以下障十行之行,「樂誹謗一切」以下障十向行,「不樂與菩薩同住」以下障十地行。誤讀是把寄位當成經文自帶的分段。這是古德為便讀而配的科,經文本身只是一氣列名。落地:五位一配,就看得出這串障不是散列,是從信到地,把整條菩薩道逐段堵死。
六度違行與六根三業之障
障名列到後半,句式忽然變了,前面是直呼其名,這裡改為『因為不能如何,所以起如何之障』。先配六度:不能行平等施故起不捨障,不能持如來戒故起破戒障,不能入堪忍門故起愚癡惱害瞋恚障,不能行大精進故起懈怠垢障,不能得諸三昧故起散亂障,不修治般若故起惡慧障;再加處非處無善巧、度眾生無方便、菩薩智慧中不能觀察、菩薩出離法中不能了知。接著配根與業:不成就十種廣大眼故眼如生盲,耳不聞無礙法故口如啞羊,不具相好故鼻根破壞,不能辨了眾生語言故成就舌根障,輕賤眾生故成就身根障,心多狂亂故成就意根障;不持三種律儀故成就身業障,恆起四種過失故成就語業障,多生貪瞋邪見故成就意業障。誤讀是把「眼如生盲」「口如啞羊」讀成生理的殘缺。經文給的因是『不成就菩薩十種廣大眼』「耳不聞無礙法」,所以這是法眼法耳之盲啞。落地:句式一改,因果就露出來了——障不是罰,是行不修而自然成的結果。
障的末一句,最重
三業障之後,經文另立「賊心求法障」「斷絕菩薩境界障」二障:澄觀於此點出「如賊心求法,豈獨障於地耶?是知通障」——這兩障不只障一地,是通障。在末尾之前還有七句同型的障:於菩薩勇猛法中心生退怯、於出離道中心生嬾惰、於智慧光明門中心生止息、於念力中心生劣弱、於如來教法中不能住持、於離生道不能親近、於無失壞道不能修習——皆就菩薩自道之退墮而立障,所障的是往前走的力氣。一長串的最後兩條是:隨順二乘正位障、遠離三世諸佛菩薩種性障。排在末位不是偶然。前面的障是遇不到、修不成、根身不利,到此處是入了二乘的正位、離了菩薩的種性——換句話說,走上另一條道,從此不再是這條路上的人。所以普賢立刻結成:若菩薩於諸菩薩起一瞋心,則成就如是等百萬障門;並把開頭那句遮詮再說一遍,我不見有一法為大過惡如諸菩薩於餘菩薩起瞋心者。首尾同句,中間夾著全部障名——這是經文自己給的框。誤讀是覺得結語只是重複。落地:重複的那一句就是括號,讀完百萬障再讀它,分量才落實。
從障翻身:先修十法
結成之後,語勢一轉:是故,諸菩薩摩訶薩欲疾滿足諸菩薩行,應勤修十種法。十法是——心不棄捨一切眾生、於諸菩薩生如來想、永不誹謗一切佛法、知諸國土無有窮盡、於菩薩行深生信樂、不捨平等虛空法界菩提之心、觀察菩提入如來力、精勤修習無礙辯才、教化眾生無有疲厭、住一切世界心無所著。前二條正對前面的病:不棄捨眾生,對治的是瞋所生的拒;於諸菩薩生如來想,直接對治「於他菩薩起瞋心」——把同行看成如來,瞋就無處起。誤讀是把十法讀成一般的善行清單。它是有的放矢的藥方,第二味尤其是本品的主藥。落地:把身邊那個最難相處的同行看成如來,這一味藥今天就能服。
十清淨:修法之後,先是淨
經文用一個「安住此十法已,則能具足」的句式,把十法接到十清淨:通達甚深法清淨、親近善知識清淨、護持諸佛法清淨、了達虛空界清淨、深入法界清淨、觀察無邊心清淨、與一切菩薩同善根清淨、不著諸劫清淨、觀察三世清淨、修行一切諸佛法清淨。這裡的「清淨」不是另修一種行,是前十法修熟之後,那同一件事上的濁去了。試對看:十法中的「於諸菩薩生如來想」,到此成了「與一切菩薩同善根清淨」——從作意的想,成了無濁的同。誤讀是把六段當六批不同的功課。落地:一段之成即是下一段之始,不是加碼,是同一件事變清。
十智:淨了之後,看得見
清淨接智:知一切眾生心行智、知一切眾生業報智、知一切佛法智、知一切佛法深密理趣智、知一切陀羅尼門智、知一切文字辯才智、知一切眾生語言音聲辭辯善巧智、於一切世界中普現其身智、於一切眾會中普現影像智、於一切受生處中具一切智智。十智前七是「知」,後三轉為「現」與「具」——知到極處自然能現,故普現其身、普現影像不是另一種神通,是智的用;第十智則說於一切受生處具一切智智。誤讀是把智讀成博聞。落地:這十智全是對機的智,知眾生心行、知業報、知語言——都是為了說得上話。
十普入:華嚴最見骨的一段
智之後是十普入,句句作互入之式:一切世界入一毛道,一毛道入一切世界;一切眾生身入一身,一身入一切眾生身;不可說劫入一念,一念入不可說劫;一切佛法入一法,一法入一切佛法;不可說處入一處,一處入不可說處;不可說根入一根,一根入不可說根;一切根入非根,非根入一切根;一切想入一想,一想入一切想;一切言音入一言音,一言音入一切言音;一切三世入一世,一世入一切三世。十對之中,界與毛道是廣狹,身與身是主伴,劫與念是時,法與法是教,根與非根是能所——一多相入之義,本經在此說得最直。誤讀是把「入」讀成塞進去。經文特意兩邊互說,甲入乙、乙也入甲,正是要斷『大裝小』的想。落地:這一段不必先懂,先記住它的句式,後面長頌的「於一微塵中,悉見諸世界」就有著落了。
十勝妙心:入了之後,心住在哪裡
觀察普入之後,經說住十種勝妙心:住一切世界語言非語言勝妙心、住一切眾生想念無所依止勝妙心、住究竟虛空界勝妙心、住無邊法界勝妙心、住一切深密佛法勝妙心、住甚深無差別法勝妙心、住除滅一切疑惑勝妙心、住一切世平等無差別勝妙心、住三世諸佛平等勝妙心、住一切諸佛力無量勝妙心。十條有一條最要緊:住一切眾生想念無所依止。全品之末說「皆從自想起」,這裡先埋下一筆——知眾生的想念本無依止,才不會被想網纏住。誤讀是把「住」讀成停下來。這裡的住是安住之住,是心有所據而不動。落地:心要住得住,得先知道所住之處本來無依。
十善巧智:名為十而實列十一
六段的末段是十種佛法善巧智:了達甚深、出生廣大、宣說種種、證入平等、明了差別、悟解無差別、深入莊嚴、一方便入、無量方便入、知無邊佛法無差別、以自心自力於一切佛法不退轉。逐句點過,實得十一句,而經文結云「是為十」。底本如是,逐字保留,古來或以「一方便入」與「無量方便入」合為一條、或以末二句合為一條,說法不一,誌錄不判。要看的是這一段的位置:前五段修的是心與智,這一段修的是『用得上』——同一佛法,能了達、能出生、能宣說、能證入,且證平等而不失差別,明差別而不礙無差別,最後歸到『以自心自力於一切佛法不退轉』。誤讀是數不合而疑經。落地:學到能說給人聽而不走樣,才算善巧。
少作功力,疾得菩提
六段說盡,普賢結勸:聞此法已,咸應發心,恭敬受持;持此法者,少作功力,疾得阿耨多羅三藐三菩提,皆得具足一切佛法,悉與三世諸佛法等。「少作功力」四字最惹眼——前面才列了百萬障、六十行門,怎麼反說少作功力。關鍵在末句「悉與三世諸佛法等」:此法是平等圓因,因既與果等,故不待歷劫積累而後方成。澄觀正以此判本品為明平等圓因,與次品之平等滿果為一對。誤讀是把「少作功力」讀成捷徑或省力。落地:省的不是工夫,是繞路——認得這一門,力氣不再花在岔道上。
瑞證:說對了,天地會答
長行說畢,經家敘瑞。因佛神力、因法如是故,十方各有十不可說百千億那由他佛剎微塵數世界六種震動,並雨下十種雲——華雲、香雲、末香雲,衣蓋幢幡摩尼寶等莊嚴具雲,妓樂雲,諸菩薩雲,如來色相雲,讚歎善哉雲,如來音聲充滿法界雲,莊嚴世界雲,增長菩提雲,光明照耀雲,神力說法雲。末以一句結通:如此世界菩提場中見如來成等正覺演說此法,十方一切世界悉亦如是。誤讀是把瑞相看成裝飾。經文給的因是兩個——佛神力故、法如是故;後一個才是重點:法本來就是這樣,不是特意示現。落地:所謂感應,經自己解釋為法爾如是。
他方普賢來作證:一切平等無有增減
接著十方各過十不可說佛剎微塵數世界之外,有十佛剎微塵數菩薩來到此土,充滿十方而作證言。他們自報身分:我等一切同名普賢,各從普勝世界普幢自在如來所來;並說我們也在一切處演說此法,此會與彼會、此說與彼說,一切平等無有增減;末云皆承佛威神力,來此道場為汝作證。要處在「同名普賢」與「無有增減」二語。普賢不是一個人的名字,是一種行的名字;行同則名同,所以他方無數普賢與此會普賢說同一法而不相妨。誤讀是把他方普賢當作旁證的外人。落地:作證的方式是自己也在說同一句話——這才是華嚴式的證明。
說偈之前的九個「欲」
轉入長頌之前,經家先敘普賢說偈之意:以佛神力、自善根力,觀察十方乃至法界,欲開示菩薩行、欲宣說如來菩提界、欲說大願界、欲說一切世界劫數、欲明諸佛隨時出現、欲說如來隨根熟眾生出現令其供養、欲明如來出世功不唐捐、欲明所種善根必獲果報、欲明大威德菩薩為一切眾生現形說法令其開悟。九個欲就是這一百二十一頌的目次。誤讀是把它當轉場的套語。落地:讀長頌讀到迷路時,回來對這九句,就知道自己讀到哪一段了。
前二十四頌:先說要說什麼
長頌起首便是誡聽——汝等應歡喜,捨離於諸蓋,一心恭敬聽,菩薩諸願行;接著許說往昔諸菩薩最勝人師子如彼所修行,並說劫數、世界、諸業與出興之尊。中間插入過去佛的本願原文:思惟發是願,我當作世燈,具足佛功德,十力一切智;一切諸眾生,貪恚癡熾然,我當悉救脫,令滅惡道苦。再說願已發而修行無退,故名論師子;再許說賢劫千佛之普眼、無量劫之未來佛行、無量剎之十力尊諸行;再以八個「隨」字排開諸佛出世之相——隨願、隨名號、隨授記、隨壽命、隨正法、隨所化、隨佛剎;末歸到常作普賢業、身語意三業無礙清淨、究竟普賢道、出生淨智日。澄觀判前二十四頌為「顯說分齊」,正是此意:先把要說的範圍畫出來。誤讀是急著往下讀行相。落地:長行已教之義,頌在此處只作對位,不再重講;頌自有的,是那段本願的原話。
九十七頌之首:於一微塵中,悉見諸世界
第二十五頌起,正辨普賢行相。起句便是全品最著名的一偈——「於一微塵中,悉見諸世界,眾生若聞者,迷亂心發狂。」經文自己預告了讀者的反應——聽了會發狂。接著層層推開:一塵如是,一切塵亦然;一一塵中有十方三世法;一一塵中有無量種佛剎;乃至無量無邊剎了知即一剎、一切諸世界悉入一剎中而世界不為一亦復無雜亂。這一長段是長行「一切世界入一毛道」那一條的頌,句句都在守兩個界限:入而不壞其相,一而不成雜亂。誤讀是把它當作神通的誇示。落地:不壞相而相入,才是華嚴說的無礙——若壞了相,就只是一團混沌,不是法界。
智大悲行三十頌:未安者令安
第九十二頌起,澄觀判為智大悲行。起句是未安者令安,安者示道場;如是遍法界,其心無所著。接著是那兩句最見骨的話:不住於實際,不入於涅槃——不住實際,所以不落沉空;不入涅槃,所以不捨眾生。再往下說法數眾生數了知而不著、普雨於法雨、念念成正覺而修菩薩行未曾有退轉;末段收在「皆從自想起」一大節:無量無邊心各各差別業皆由想積集、了知非一二非染亦非淨皆從自想起、眾生皆妄起善惡諸趣想由是或生天或復墮地獄、一切諸國土想網之所現幻網方便故一念悉能入。誤讀是把前面說空的偈與這裡說度生的偈看成兩截。落地:正因為知道世間是想網所現,才敢一念入其中去撈人——這就是智與悲在同一句話裡。
末頌:佛說、眾生說、國土說
長頌收尾處說:佛說眾生說,及以國土說,三世如是說,種種悉了知;又說過去中未來,未來中現在,三世互相見,一一皆明了;末偈作結:如是無量種,開悟諸世間,一切智方便,邊際不可得。長頌一百二十一偈,其正辨行相之九十七頌,末了不歸到某一種所得,反歸到「邊際不可得」。誤讀是覺得結尾落空。經文的意思是,能開悟世間的方便無量,所以說不到邊——不可得的是邊際,不是方便。落地:以無邊之方便對無邊之眾生,這是本品給普賢行下的定義。
承衍
本品之承衍首在次品。澄觀判〈普賢行品〉與〈如來出現品〉為一對,前明平等圓因、後明平等滿果,故本品之「悉與三世諸佛法等」直接開出次品的性起出現之義。就宗義而論,十普入一段為一多相入、廣狹自在之品內經據,長頌「於一微塵中,悉見諸世界」與「一切諸世界,悉入一剎中,世界不為一,亦復無雜亂」則為微細相容與帝網重重之所本,後世十玄之談多取材於此。就教體而論,法藏於《華嚴一乘教義分齊章》判一乘與三乘之異,其第三「主異」條直引本品末頌「佛說菩薩說剎說眾生說三世一切說」為據,以明一乘之教主是十身佛與無盡三世間同說,不同三乘唯化身受用身之說——所引者是六十華嚴之句,非八十本之文,誌錄之。諸家科判則三軌並行:澄觀就八十本科為所治與能治二分、能治六位各十行,法藏就六十本科為普賢行三義三分而統以六十行門,李通玄則不立逐品釋名,唯以本品為第七會之略舉、大本有百萬億頌——三說本數與所配俱異,不能互配,並錄不判。
Why He Opens by Saying ‘This Is Only a Small Part’
The chapters just before have spoken of the Tathāgata’s span of life, his dwelling places, his inconceivable dharmas, the ocean of his marks, and the light of his secondary signs, expounding the Buddha’s realm most broadly all the way along. Yet Samantabhadra opens by drawing it in: what was expounded before is only a brief telling, following what suits the capacities of beings, of a small part of the Tathāgata’s realm. It is easy to read this sentence as modesty; in truth it is a judgment of compass — how much was said, to whom it was said, and on what ground it could be said only this far. Chengguan outlines it as ‘marking what went before as little said,’ and what follows he outlines as ‘asking and explaining the reason,’ the two together making ‘the speaking of the cause’; and just this is what has to be conveyed: it is not merely that the Buddha’s realm cannot be exhausted in speech, but that who is listening and how much they can take in is what decides how much gets said. The misreading is to take it for a courtesy. Landing it: reading the Avataṃsaka this far, what ought to be asked is not ‘how great is the Buddha’s realm,’ but ‘how far can this capacity of mine take it up right now.’
The Reason the Buddhas Appear in the World Is a Case History of Illness
Samantabhadra next speaks the reason the Buddhas arise in the world. What the sūtra lists is not merits but the symptoms of beings: being without wisdom they do evil; they reckon a self and what belongs to a self; they cling to the body; they are upside down and full of doubt; they discriminate by wrong views; they are ever conjoined with every kind of knot and bond; they drift with the flood of birth-and-death and grow ever farther from the way of the Tathāgata. Seven clauses come down in a row, each deeper than the last — from being without wisdom to doing evil, from doing evil to reckoning a self, from reckoning a self to clinging to the body, from clinging to the body to being upside down, from being upside down to wrong views, from wrong views to knots and bonds, from knots and bonds to drifting with the flood and growing far from the way. The misreading is to take it for a general reproach. This is in fact the whole chapter’s account of the cause of the disease: the million hindrances listed below are, one by one, the unfolding of these clauses, and the ten dharmas cultivated below are, one by one, their cure. Landing it: recognize the illness first, and what comes after will not be a heap of terms.
I See No Single Thing So Greatly at Fault
Then comes the heaviest sentence of the chapter: I see no single thing so greatly at fault as bodhisattvas rousing a mind of anger against another bodhisattva. The weight of the sentence lies in what it sifts out — it does not say that anger is the heaviest of the afflictions; it says that this one thing, ‘a bodhisattva angry at a bodhisattva,’ is the heaviest. Three things are sifted: the one who rouses is a bodhisattva, the one against whom it is roused is a bodhisattva, and what is roused is anger. Let any one of the three be lacking and the judgment does not stand. Chengguan, explaining this passage, cites the Jueding pini jing as his warrant, that a bodhisattva would rather rouse a hundred thousand thoughts of greed than one thought of anger, since nothing so violates and harms great compassion as this; and he records that the Pusa shanjie says the same. The reason lies in those four words, ‘violates and harms great compassion’: greed still gathers in, while anger simply refuses; great compassion is the very substance of the bodhisattva practice, and the moment anger rises, the substance is broken first. The misreading is to take this sentence and reprove someone else’s anger with it. Landing it: this sentence is spoken to those who have roused the mind of awakening — the more of a fellow traveler you are, the more there is in you to be wounded.
One Thought of Anger Accomplishes a Million Hindrances: How This ‘Million’ Is to Be Read
The sūtra asks and answers itself: if bodhisattvas rouse a mind of anger and rage against the remaining bodhisattvas, they accomplish a million gateways of hindrance. Then it lists the names one by one. There are those who, seeing ‘a million,’ set about counting, and doubt when the count falls short of a million. Chengguan records that ‘the ancients assigned them to five positions’ as an outline of these million hindrances 〔for the commentary see the apparatus〕; and as the text stands, the hindrances listed are categories, spoken of altogether as a million — a quantity raised by kind, not a number arrived at by tallying (this is a way of reading, not something the sūtra says outright). The sixty-fascicle Avataṃsaka has, at this same passage, ‘a hundred thousand gateways of hindering dharmas,’ a number differing from that of the eighty-fascicle text; the two have stood side by side from of old, and are recorded without adjudication. The misreading is to suppose that the sūtra is exaggerating. Landing it: what is to be looked at is not the number but the ordering of these hindrances — it runs from recompense to the faculties and the body, from the faculties and the body to the conduct of the mind, and at the last to the lineage, each layer nearer in than the one before.
The First Layer of Hindrance: Not Seeing, Not Hearing, Not Being Born Where One Might
The first ten listed are all recompense of the coarsest kind: not seeing awakening, not hearing the true Dharma, being born in an impure world, being born in the evil destinies, being born in the difficult places, having many sicknesses, being much slandered, being born among the stubborn and dull destinies, losing right mindfulness, wanting in wisdom. What this layer has in common is that the opportunity is gone — it is not that one cultivates badly, but that one does not so much as meet with it. Next come the hindrances of the six faculties: eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind each make a hindrance; the sixty-fascicle Avataṃsaka joins them here into a single clause, while the eighty-fascicle text sets each faculty out separately. Then comes the class of evil conditions: evil friends, evil companies, delighting to practice the Lesser Vehicle, delighting to draw near the common and mediocre, not believing in and not delighting in those of great awesome virtue, delighting to dwell with those far from right view, being born into a house of the outer paths, dwelling within the realm of Māra, departing from the Buddha’s right teaching, not seeing good friends, roots of good held back and hindered, unwholesome dharmas increased, gaining a low and mean place. The misreading is to take these for an environment that others have imposed. The sūtra’s order says it plainly: these are what one thought of anger accomplishes; they do not come from outside. Landing it: at the very moment the mind rises, what one will and will not meet with begins to fork.
The Ancients’ Assignment of Stages: Matching This Long String of Hindrances to the Five Positions
Further down come the hindrances of where one is born — born in a borderland, born in the house of evil men, born among evil spirits, born among evil dragons and evil yakṣas on to evil rākṣasas; then the hindrances of not delighting in the great Dharma — not delighting in the Buddha’s Dharma, practicing the dharmas of childish ignorance, clinging with love to the Lesser Vehicle, not delighting in the Great Vehicle, being by nature much startled and afraid, a mind ever harboring sorrow and vexation, clinging with love to birth-and-death, not being single-minded upon the Buddha’s Dharma, not delighting to see and hear the Buddha’s sovereign spiritual penetrations; then the hindrances of falling back from the bodhisattva practice — not gaining the bodhisattva’s faculties, not practicing the bodhisattva’s pure practice, shrinking back from the bodhisattva’s deep mind, not giving rise to the bodhisattva’s great vows, not rousing the mind of omniscience, indolence toward the bodhisattva practice, being unable to purify one’s deeds, being unable to gather in great merit, a power of wisdom that cannot be clear and sharp, cutting off vast wisdom, not guarding and upholding the bodhisattva’s practices; then the hindrances of slandering wisdom and dwelling with Māra — delighting to slander the words of omniscience, departing far from the awakening of the Buddhas, delighting to dwell within the realms of the hosts of Māra, not being single-minded in cultivating the Buddha’s realm, not rousing with decision the bodhisattva’s great oath, not delighting to dwell together with bodhisattvas, not seeking the bodhisattva’s roots of good, being by nature much given to views and doubts, a mind ever dark with its own folly. Chengguan here records one manner of outlining used by the ancients, which assigns this long string to the five positions: the first stretch hinders the practice of the ten faiths; from ‘not delighting in the Buddha’s Dharma’ onward hinders the practice of the ten abodes; from ‘not gaining the bodhisattva’s faculties’ onward hinders the practice of the ten practices; from ‘delighting to slander all’ onward hinders the practice of the ten dedications; from ‘not delighting to dwell together with bodhisattvas’ onward hinders the practice of the ten grounds. The misreading is to take this assignment of stages for a division the sūtra carries of itself. It is an outline the ancient masters matched to the text for ease of reading; the text itself only lists the names in one breath. Landing it: once the five positions are matched, one sees that this string of hindrances is no scattered list — it blocks the whole bodhisattva way, stretch by stretch, from faith all the way to the grounds.
The Hindrances of Practice Contrary to the Six Perfections, and of the Six Faculties and the Three Kinds of Action
As the naming of the hindrances passes its midpoint the sentence pattern suddenly changes: before, each was called by its name outright; here it becomes ‘because one cannot do such and such, there arises such and such a hindrance.’ First they are matched to the six perfections: because one cannot practice equal giving there arises the hindrance of stinginess that does not let go; because one cannot keep the Tathāgata’s precepts there arises the hindrance of breaking the precepts; because one cannot enter the gate of forbearance there arise the hindrances of folly, of harming and vexing, and of anger and rage; because one cannot practice great vigor there arises the hindrance of the filth of indolence; because one cannot gain the samādhis there arises the hindrance of distraction; because one does not cultivate the perfection of wisdom there arises the hindrance of evil understanding; and to these are added having no skill amid what is and what is not the case, having no means amid the delivering of beings, being unable to contemplate amid the bodhisattva’s wisdom, and being unable to comprehend amid the bodhisattva’s dharmas of going forth. Then they are matched to the faculties and to action: because one does not accomplish the ten kinds of vast eye, the eyes are as of one born blind; because the ear does not hear the unobstructed Dharma, the mouth is as of a dumb sheep; because one is not furnished with the marks and signs, the faculty of smell is broken; because one cannot distinguish and know the speech of beings, the hindrance of the faculty of the tongue is accomplished; because one slights and despises beings, the hindrance of the faculty of the body is accomplished; because the mind is much distracted and wild, the hindrance of the faculty of the mind is accomplished; because one does not keep the three kinds of restraint, the hindrance of bodily action is accomplished; because one ever rouses the four faults of speech, the hindrance of verbal action is accomplished; because one much gives rise to greed, anger, and wrong view, the hindrance of mental action is accomplished. The misreading is to read ‘eyes as of one born blind’ and ‘a mouth as of a dumb sheep’ as bodily defect. The cause the sūtra gives is ‘one does not accomplish the bodhisattva’s ten kinds of vast eye’ and ‘the ear does not hear the unobstructed Dharma’ — so this is a blindness and a dumbness of the Dharma-eye and the Dharma-ear. Landing it: once the sentence pattern changes, cause and effect stand bare — a hindrance is not a punishment but what naturally comes of a practice left uncultivated.
The Last Clause of the Hindrances Is the Heaviest
After the hindrances of the three kinds of action the sūtra sets up two more, ‘the hindrance of seeking the Dharma with a thief’s mind’ and ‘the hindrance of cutting off the bodhisattva’s realm’; and Chengguan points out here that ‘as for seeking the Dharma with a thief’s mind — how should it hinder one ground only? Know then that it is a hindrance running through them all’ — these two do not hinder a single ground but hinder throughout. Before the very end there are seven more hindrances of one pattern: a mind that shrinks back amid the bodhisattva’s dharmas of valor, a mind that grows lazy amid the way of going forth, a mind that comes to rest amid the gateways of the light of wisdom, a mind that grows weak and mean amid the power of mindfulness, being unable to dwell in and uphold the Tathāgata’s teaching, being unable to draw near the way of leaving birth behind, being unable to cultivate the way that is without loss or ruin — all set up as hindrances upon the bodhisattva’s own falling back along his own road, and what they hinder is the strength to keep walking forward. The last two of the whole long string are these: the hindrance of according with the right position of the two vehicles, and the hindrance of departing far from the lineage of the Buddhas and bodhisattvas of the three times. That they stand at the end is no accident. The hindrances before were of not meeting, of not accomplishing, of faculties and body left dull; here one has entered the right position of the two vehicles and left the bodhisattva’s lineage — which is to say, one has taken another road and is no longer a man upon this one. And so Samantabhadra at once concludes: if a bodhisattva rouses one thought of anger against the bodhisattvas, he accomplishes such a million gateways of hindrance as these; and he speaks that opening sentence of denial once again — I see no single thing so greatly at fault as bodhisattvas rousing a mind of anger against the remaining bodhisattvas. The same sentence at head and at foot, with all the names of the hindrances held between — this is the frame the text gives itself. The misreading is to feel that the closing words are mere repetition. Landing it: that repeated sentence is the bracket; read the million hindrances through and then read it again, and only then does its weight come down.
Turning Over from Hindrance: First Cultivate the Ten Dharmas
After the conclusion the tone turns: therefore, if bodhisattva-mahāsattvas would swiftly fulfill the bodhisattva practices, they should diligently cultivate ten kinds of dharma. The ten are these — in mind to cast away not one being; toward the bodhisattvas to give rise to the thought of them as Tathāgatas; never to slander any Buddha-dharma; to know that the lands are without end; to give rise to deep faith and delight in the bodhisattva practice; not to cast away that mind of awakening which is equal to space and to the Dharma realm; to contemplate awakening and enter the Tathāgata’s powers; to cultivate diligently unobstructed eloquence; to teach and transform beings without weariness; to dwell within all worlds with a mind clinging to nothing. The first two answer directly to the illness set out above: casting away not one being cures the refusal to which anger gives birth; giving rise to the thought of the bodhisattvas as Tathāgatas cures head-on the ‘rousing a mind of anger against another bodhisattva’ — look upon a fellow traveler as a Tathāgata, and anger has nowhere to rise from. The misreading is to read the ten dharmas as an ordinary list of good deeds. They are a prescription aimed at a target, and the second ingredient is this chapter’s chief medicine. Landing it: look upon that fellow traveler beside you who is hardest to get on with as a Tathāgata — this is a medicine that can be taken today.
The Ten Purities: After the Dharmas Are Cultivated, First Comes Purity
The sūtra uses the pattern ‘having dwelt in these ten dharmas, one can then be furnished with’ to join the ten dharmas to the ten purities: the purity of penetrating the most profound Dharma, of drawing near the good friend, of guarding and upholding the Dharma of the Buddhas, of comprehending the realm of space, of entering deeply into the Dharma realm, of contemplating the boundless mind, of sharing one and the same root of good with all bodhisattvas, of not clinging to the kalpas, of contemplating the three times, and of practicing all the dharmas of the Buddhas. ‘Purity’ here is not another kind of practice taken up; it is that, the former ten dharmas having been cultivated to ripeness, the turbidity has gone out of that very same thing. Set them side by side and see: ‘toward the bodhisattvas to give rise to the thought of them as Tathāgatas’ has become here ‘the purity of sharing one and the same root of good with all bodhisattvas’ — what was a deliberate thought has become a sameness without turbidity. The misreading is to take the six stretches for six separate batches of homework. Landing it: the completing of one stretch is the beginning of the next; this is not more piled on, but the same thing grown clear.
The Ten Wisdoms: Once Purified, One Can See
Purity is joined to wisdom: the wisdom knowing the mental conduct of all beings, the wisdom knowing their deeds and recompense, the wisdom knowing all the dharmas of the Buddhas, the wisdom knowing the deep and secret purport of all the dharmas of the Buddhas, the wisdom knowing all the gateways of dhāraṇī, the wisdom knowing all letters and eloquence, the wisdom of skill in all the speech, the sounds, and the turns of phrase of beings, the wisdom of manifesting one’s own body universally within all worlds, the wisdom of manifesting one’s reflected image universally within all assemblies, and the wisdom of being furnished with the wisdom of omniscience in every place of birth. Of the ten, the first seven are ‘knowing,’ and the last three turn into ‘manifesting’ and ‘being furnished’ — knowing carried to its utmost can of itself manifest, and so manifesting one’s body universally and manifesting one’s image universally are not some other kind of spiritual penetration but the working of wisdom; while the tenth speaks of being furnished with the wisdom of omniscience in every place of birth. The misreading is to read wisdom as wide learning. Landing it: these ten wisdoms are every one of them a wisdom aimed at capacities — knowing beings’ mental conduct, knowing their deeds and recompense, knowing their speech — all of it so that one may be able to speak with them at all.
The Ten Universal Enterings: The Passage Where the Avataṃsaka Shows Its Bones Most Plainly
After wisdom come the ten universal enterings, every clause in the pattern of mutual entering: all worlds enter a single hair’s path, and a single hair’s path enters all worlds; the bodies of all beings enter one body, and one body enters the bodies of all beings; kalpas beyond telling enter a single thought, and a single thought enters kalpas beyond telling; all the dharmas of the Buddhas enter one dharma, and one dharma enters all the dharmas of the Buddhas; places beyond telling enter one place, and one place enters places beyond telling; faculties beyond telling enter one faculty, and one faculty enters faculties beyond telling; all faculties enter what is not a faculty, and what is not a faculty enters all faculties; all conceivings enter one conceiving, and one conceiving enters all conceivings; all speech-sounds enter one speech-sound, and one speech-sound enters all speech-sounds; all the three times enter one time, and one time enters all the three times. Among the ten pairs, realm and hair’s path are breadth and narrowness; body and body are host and companion; kalpa and thought are time; dharma and dharma are teaching; faculty and non-faculty are that which acts and that which is acted upon — the sense of the one and the many entering one another is nowhere in this sūtra spoken more directly than here. The misreading is to read ‘enter’ as stuffing one thing into another. The text deliberately says it from both sides, this entering that and that entering this, precisely to cut off the notion of the large containing the small. Landing it: this passage need not be understood first; remember its sentence pattern first, and then the later verse, ‘within a single mote of dust the worlds are wholly seen,’ will have somewhere to come to rest.
The Ten Surpassingly Wondrous Minds: Having Entered, Where Does the Mind Dwell?
After contemplating the universal enterings, the sūtra says that one dwells in ten kinds of surpassingly wondrous mind: the surpassingly wondrous mind dwelling in the speech and the non-speech of all worlds; dwelling in the conceivings of all beings as resting upon nothing; dwelling in the ultimate realm of space; dwelling in the boundless Dharma realm; dwelling in all the deep and secret dharmas of the Buddhas; dwelling in the most profound dharma without distinction; dwelling in the extinguishing of all doubt; dwelling in all worlds as equal and without distinction; dwelling in the sameness of the Buddhas of the three times; dwelling in the measureless powers of all Buddhas. Of the ten there is one that matters most: dwelling in the conceivings of all beings as resting upon nothing. At the chapter’s end it is said that all arise from one’s own conceiving, and here a first stroke is laid down for it — only by knowing that beings’ conceivings rest of themselves upon nothing does one escape being tangled in the net of conceiving. The misreading is to read ‘dwell’ as coming to a halt. The dwelling here is the dwelling of settling, a mind that has its ground and does not stir. Landing it: for the mind to dwell steadily, one must first know that what it dwells in rests, from the first, upon nothing.
The Ten Kinds of Skillful Wisdom: Named Ten, Yet Eleven Are Listed
The last of the six stretches is the ten kinds of skillful wisdom in the Buddha-dharma: comprehending the most profound, bringing forth the vast, proclaiming the manifold, realizing and entering the equal, making clear the differentiated, awakening to the undifferentiated, entering deeply into the adorned, entering by a single means, entering by measureless means, knowing the boundless Buddha-dharma to be without distinction, and by one’s own mind and one’s own strength not turning back amid all the dharmas of the Buddhas. Told off clause by clause, eleven clauses are actually got, and yet the sūtra concludes, ‘these are the ten.’ The base text stands so and is kept word for word; from of old some have joined ‘entering by a single means’ and ‘entering by measureless means’ into one, and some have joined the last two into one — the accounts differ, and they are recorded without adjudication. What is to be looked at is the place of this stretch: the five before it cultivate mind and wisdom, and this one cultivates the being able to use them — one and the same Buddha-dharma, and one can comprehend it, bring it forth, proclaim it, and realize and enter it, realizing sameness without losing difference and making difference clear without obstructing non-difference, coming home at the last to ‘by one’s own mind and one’s own strength not turning back amid all the dharmas of the Buddhas.’ The misreading is to doubt the sūtra because the count does not tally. Landing it: only when one has learned to say it to another without its going crooked is there skill.
With Little Labor, Swiftly Gaining Awakening
The six stretches told to the end, Samantabhadra exhorts in conclusion: having heard this dharma, all should rouse the mind and reverently receive and uphold it; one who upholds this dharma, using little labor, swiftly gains unsurpassed perfect awakening, gains all the dharmas of the Buddhas in their fullness, all equal to the dharmas of the Buddhas of the three times. The words ‘using little labor’ catch the eye most — a million hindrances and sixty gateways of practice have only just been listed, and how then can it be said that little labor is used? The key lies in the closing clause, ‘all equal to the dharmas of the Buddhas of the three times’: this dharma is the equal and perfect cause, and since the cause is already equal to the fruit, it need not wait upon kalpas of accumulation before it can be accomplished. It is on just this ground that Chengguan judges this chapter to make clear the equal and perfect cause, paired with the following chapter’s equal and full fruit. The misreading is to read ‘little labor’ as a shortcut or a saving of effort. Landing it: what is saved is not the work but the roundabout way — recognize this one gate, and strength is no longer spent upon side roads.
The Auspicious Witness: When It Is Rightly Spoken, Heaven and Earth Answer
The prose told through, the compilers narrate the auspicious signs. By the Buddha’s spiritual power and because the Dharma is of itself so, in each of the ten directions worlds to the number of the dust-motes of ten beyond-telling hundreds of thousands of koṭis of nayutas of Buddha-lands quaked in six ways, and ten kinds of cloud rained down — clouds of flowers, of incense, of powdered incense; clouds of garments, canopies, banners, pennants, maṇi jewels and every adornment; clouds of music; clouds of bodhisattvas; clouds of the form and appearance of Tathāgatas; clouds of praise and acclamation; clouds of the Tathāgata’s voice filling the Dharma realm; clouds of adorned worlds; clouds of increasing awakening; clouds of shining light; clouds of expounding the Dharma by spiritual power. It closes with a single clause that carries the whole through: just as in this world, at the place of awakening, the Tathāgata was seen to accomplish right and perfect awakening and to expound this Dharma, so is it in all the worlds of the ten directions. The misreading is to look upon the auspicious signs as decoration. The sūtra gives two causes — the Buddha’s spiritual power, and the Dharma being of itself so; and it is the second that is the point: the Dharma simply is thus, and this is not a display got up on purpose. Landing it: what is called a response the sūtra itself explains as the Dharma being of itself so.
The Samantabhadras of Other Quarters Come to Bear Witness: All Is Equal, with Nothing Added and Nothing Taken Away
Then, from beyond worlds to the number of the dust-motes of ten beyond-telling Buddha-lands in each of the ten directions, bodhisattvas to the number of the dust-motes of ten Buddha-lands come to this land, filling the ten directions, and speak their witness. They give their own station: we are all alike named Samantabhadra, and we have each come from the world Universal Victory, from the presence of the Tathāgata Universal Banner Sovereign; and they say that they too expound this Dharma in every place, that this assembly and that, this speaking and that, are all equal, with nothing added and nothing taken away; and they close by saying that all of them, borne by the Buddha’s awesome spiritual power, have come to this place of the Way to bear witness for you. The weight lies in the two phrases ‘alike named Samantabhadra’ and ‘nothing added and nothing taken away.’ Samantabhadra is not one man’s name; it is the name of a practice — the practice being the same, the name is the same, and so the countless Samantabhadras of other quarters and the Samantabhadra of this assembly expound one and the same Dharma without getting in one another’s way. The misreading is to take the Samantabhadras of other quarters for outsiders brought in to corroborate. Landing it: the manner of their witness is that they too are saying the very same sentence — and this is what proof looks like in the Avataṃsaka.
The Nine ‘Wishings’ Before the Verses
Before turning into the long verses, the compilers first narrate Samantabhadra’s intent in speaking them: by the Buddha’s spiritual power and by the power of his own roots of good he contemplates the ten directions and on to the Dharma realm, wishing to reveal the bodhisattva practice, wishing to proclaim the realm of the Tathāgata’s awakening, wishing to speak of the realm of the great vows, wishing to speak of the number of kalpas of all worlds, wishing to make clear that the Buddhas appear according to the time, wishing to speak of how the Tathāgata appears for beings whose faculties have ripened and causes them to make offerings, wishing to make clear that the Tathāgata’s coming into the world is not in vain, wishing to make clear that the roots of good that are planted must surely obtain their fruit, wishing to make clear that bodhisattvas of great awesome virtue manifest their form and expound the Dharma for all beings and cause them to awaken. These nine wishings are the table of contents of the hundred and twenty-one verses. The misreading is to take them for a formula of transition. Landing it: when you lose your way in the long verses, come back and match what you are reading against these nine clauses, and you will know which stretch you are in.
The First Twenty-Four Verses: First Saying What Is to Be Said
The long verses open with a charge to listen — you should rejoice, cast away the coverings, and with one mind reverently listen to the vows and practices of the bodhisattvas; then comes the promise to speak of the bodhisattvas of old, those most surpassing lions among men, and of the practices they cultivated, together with the number of kalpas, the worlds, the deeds, and the honored ones who arose therein. Into the middle is set the very wording of the past Buddhas’ original vow: they pondered and gave rise to this vow — I shall be a lamp for the world, furnished with the Buddha’s merits, his ten powers, and omniscience; all the beings there are burn in the flames of greed, anger, and folly, and I shall deliver them all and cause the sufferings of the evil destinies to be extinguished. Then it says that the vow once made, they practiced without turning back, and are therefore called lions of discourse; then comes the promise to speak of the universal eyes of the thousand Buddhas of the Worthy Kalpa, of the practices of the Buddhas to come through measureless kalpas, and of the practices of the World-Honored Ones of ten powers in measureless lands; then the marks of the Buddhas’ coming into the world are laid out with eight uses of the word ‘according’ — according to their vows, their names, their predictions, their spans of life, the true Dharma, those they transformed, and their Buddha-lands; and it comes home at the last to ever doing the deeds of Samantabhadra, to the three kinds of action of body, speech, and mind being unhindered and pure, to bringing the way of Samantabhadra to its end and bringing forth the sun of pure wisdom. Chengguan judges these first twenty-four verses to be ‘displaying the compass of what is spoken,’ and this is just the sense of it: first the range of what is to be said is drawn out. The misreading is to hurry on to the marks of the practice. Landing it: what the prose has already taught, the verses here only match against, without teaching it again; what the verses have of their own is the very wording of that original vow.
The Head of the Ninety-Seven Verses: Within a Single Mote of Dust the Worlds Are Wholly Seen
From the twenty-fifth verse the marks of the practice of Samantabhadra are properly set forth. The opening clause is the most famous verse of the chapter — “Within a single mote of dust the worlds are wholly seen; should beings hear this word, they would be confounded and their minds go mad.” The sūtra itself foretells the reader’s response: hearing it, one goes mad. Then it opens out layer upon layer: as it is with one mote, so with all motes; within each single mote are the dharmas of the ten directions and the three times; within each single mote are measureless kinds of Buddha-land; on to measureless and boundless lands known to be one land, and all the worlds entering wholly within one land, yet the worlds not thereby becoming one, nor any confusion arising. This long stretch is the verse form of that one clause in the prose, ‘all worlds enter a single hair’s path,’ and every clause of it keeps two bounds: entering without the marks being broken, and being one without becoming confused. The misreading is to take it for a boast of spiritual power. Landing it: mutual entering without the marks being broken — this is what the Avataṃsaka calls unobstructedness; break the marks and it is only a lump of chaos, and not the Dharma realm.
The Thirty Verses on the Practice of Compassion Wherein Wisdom Is Great: Those Not Yet Settled He Makes Settled
From the ninety-second verse Chengguan judges it to be the practice of compassion wherein wisdom is great. The opening clauses are: those not yet settled he makes settled; to those already settled he displays the place of the Way; in this way he pervades the Dharma realm, and his mind clings to nothing. Then come the two clauses that show the bone most plainly: he does not dwell within the real limit, nor does he enter nirvāṇa — not dwelling in the real limit, he does not fall into a sunken emptiness; not entering nirvāṇa, he does not cast beings away. Further down it says that the number of dharmas and the number of beings he knows and yet does not cling to, that he rains down the rain of Dharma universally, that thought after thought he accomplishes right awakening and yet still cultivates the bodhisattva practice and has never turned back; and the last stretch gathers into the great section on all arising from one’s own conceiving: measureless and boundless minds and their several distinct deeds are all heaped up by conceiving; he knows that they are neither one nor two, neither defiled nor pure, and that all arise from one’s own conceiving; beings all falsely rouse conceivings of the good and evil destinies and thereby are born in the heavens or fall again into the hells; all the lands are what the net of conceiving displays, and because there is a means like a net of conjuring, in a single thought he can enter them all. The misreading is to see the earlier verses on emptiness and these verses on delivering beings as two disconnected halves. Landing it: it is precisely because he knows the world to be what the net of conceiving displays that he dares to enter it in a single thought and fish men out — and this is wisdom and compassion within one and the same sentence.
The Final Verses: The Buddha Speaks, Beings Speak, the Lands Speak
Where the long verses close it says: the Buddha speaks, beings speak, and the lands too speak; throughout the three times it is spoken thus, and he wholly knows the manifold of it; and again: within the past there is the future, and within the future the present, the three times behold one another, and each and every one is clear; and the final verse concludes: in measureless ways such as these he awakens the worlds; of the means of omniscience, the bound cannot be got. Of the hundred and twenty-one verses, the ninety-seven that properly set forth the marks of the practice come home at the end not to any one thing gained but to ‘the bound cannot be got.’ The misreading is to feel that the ending falls away into emptiness. The sūtra’s sense is that the means by which the world may be awakened are measureless, and so no bound can be spoken to them — what cannot be got is the bound, not the means. Landing it: measureless means set against measureless beings — this is the definition that this chapter gives to the practice of Samantabhadra.
Lineage
The lineage of this chapter lies first of all in the chapter that follows. Chengguan judges the Chapter on the Practice of Samantabhadra and the Chapter on the Appearance of the Tathāgata to be a pair, the former making clear the equal and perfect cause and the latter the equal and full fruit; and so this chapter’s ‘all equal to the dharmas of the Buddhas of the three times’ opens directly into the following chapter’s sense of nature-arising and the appearing. As to the tenets, the stretch on the ten universal enterings is the scriptural ground within this chapter for the one and the many entering one another and for breadth and narrowness being sovereign; while the verses ‘within a single mote of dust the worlds are wholly seen’ and ‘all the worlds enter wholly within a single Buddha-land, yet the worlds do not thereby become one, nor is there any confusion’ are the ground of the subtle and the fine containing one another and of the net of Indra layer upon layer, and the later talk of the ten mysteries takes much of its material from here. As to the substance of the teaching, Fazang, judging the difference between the One Vehicle and the three vehicles in the Huayan yisheng jiaoyi fenqi zhang, cites in his third item, ‘the difference of the host,’ this chapter’s final verse, ‘the Buddha speaks, bodhisattvas speak, the lands speak, beings speak, all the three times speak,’ as his warrant, to make clear that the host of the teaching in the One Vehicle is the Buddha of ten bodies together with the three world-realms without end, unlike the three vehicles, where it is the emanation body and the enjoyment body alone that speak — and what he cites is the wording of the sixty-fascicle Avataṃsaka, not the text of the eighty-fascicle, which is here recorded. As to the outlines of the several masters, three tracks run side by side: Chengguan, upon the eighty-fascicle text, outlines it as the two divisions of what is cured and what cures, the curing being six positions of ten practices each; Fazang, upon the sixty-fascicle text, outlines it as the three senses of ‘universal,’ ‘worthy,’ and ‘practice’ in three divisions, gathered under sixty gateways of practice; and Li Tongxuan sets up no chapter-by-chapter explanation of the name at all, taking this chapter only as a brief raising of a greater original text having a million koṭis of verses — the three accounts differ both in their base numbers and in what they match to what, and cannot be matched against one another; they are recorded together without adjudication.